UNITED STATES

SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION

Washington, D.C. 20549

FORM 10-K

ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d)

OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

For the fiscal year ended December 31, 2005

Commission File Number 0-25756

IBERIABANK Corporation

(Exact name of registrant as specified in its charter)

 

Louisiana   72-1280718
(State of incorporation or organization)   (I.R.S. Employer Identification Number)
200 West Congress Street, Lafayette, Louisiana   70501
(Address of principal executive office)   (Zip Code)

Registrant’s telephone number, including area code: (337) 521-4003

Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act: Not Applicable

Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act

Common Stock (par value $1.00 per share)

(Title of Class)

Indicate by check if the registrant is a well-known seasoned issuer, as defined in Rule 405 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934. Yes  ¨    No  x

Indicate by check if the registrant is not required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934. Yes  ¨    No  x

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports), and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days. Yes  x    No  ¨

Indicate by check mark if disclosure of delinquent filers pursuant to Item 405 of Regulation S-K is not contained herein, and will not be contained, to the best of registrant’s knowledge, in definitive proxy or information statements incorporated by reference in Part III of this Form 10-K or any amendment to this Form 10-K.   x

Indicate by check whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer or a non-accelerated filer (as defined in Securities Exchange Act Rule 12b-2).

 

Large Accelerated Filer   ¨   Accelerated Filer   x   Non-accelerated Filer   ¨

Indicate by check whether the registrant is a shell company, as defined in Rule 12b-2 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934. Yes  ¨    No  x

As of June 30, 2005, the aggregate market value of the voting shares of Common Stock held by non-affiliates of the registrant was approximately $427.8 million. This figure is based on the closing sale price of $48.79 per share of the registrant’s common stock on June 30, 2005. For purposes of this calculation, the term “affiliate” refers to all executive officers and directors of the registrant and all shareholders beneficially owning more than 10% of the registrant’s common stock.

Number of shares of Common Stock outstanding as of February 28, 2006: 9,599,189

DOCUMENTS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE

(1) Portions of the Annual Report to Shareholders for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2005 are incorporated into Part II, Items 5 through 9B of this Form 10-K; (2) portions of the definitive proxy statement for the 2006 Annual Meeting of Shareholders to be filed within 120 days of Registrant’s fiscal year end (the “Proxy Statement”) are incorporated into Part III, Items 10 through 14 of this Form 10-K.

 



PART 1.

 

Item 1. Business.

General

IBERIABANK Corporation (the “Company”), a Louisiana corporation, is the bank holding company for IBERIABANK (the “Bank”), a wholly owned Louisiana-chartered commercial bank subsidiary, both headquartered in Lafayette, Louisiana. The principal business of the Company is conducted through the Bank. The Bank operates 44 full service offices in its market areas including New Orleans, Baton Rouge, Shreveport, Monroe, and the Acadiana region of Louisiana. The Bank provides a variety of financial services to individuals and businesses throughout its service area. Primary deposit products are checking, savings and certificate of deposit accounts and primary lending products are consumer, commercial and mortgage loans. The Bank also offers discount brokerage services through a wholly owned subsidiary. The Company’s common stock trades on the NASDAQ Stock Market under the symbol “IBKC.” At December 31, 2005, the Company had total assets of $2.9 billion, total deposits of $2.2 billion and shareholders’ equity of $263.6 million.

Subsidiaries

The Bank has two active, wholly owned non-bank subsidiaries, Iberia Financial Services, LLC and Acadiana Holdings, LLC. Iberia Financial Services offers brokerage services provided through ProEquities, Inc. At December 31, 2005, the Bank’s equity investment in Iberia Financial Services was $2.9 million, and Iberia Financial Services had total assets of $3.5 million. Acadiana Holdings owns and operates a commercial office building which also serves as the Company’s headquarters and the Bank’s main office. At December 31, 2005, the Bank’s equity investment in Acadiana Holdings was $9.8 million, and Acadiana Holdings had total assets of $9.9 million.

Competition

The Company faces strong competition both in attracting deposits and originating loans. Its most direct competition for deposits has historically come from other commercial banks, savings institutions and credit unions located in its market areas, including many large financial institutions that have greater financial and marketing resources available to them. In addition, during times of high interest rates, the Company has faced significant competition for investors’ funds from short-term money market securities, mutual funds and other corporate and government securities. The ability of the Company to attract and retain savings deposits depends on its ability to generally provide a rate of return, liquidity and risk comparable to that offered by competing investment opportunities.

The Company experiences strong competition for loan originations principally from other commercial banks, savings institutions and mortgage banking companies. The Company competes for loans principally through the interest rates and loan fees it charges, the efficiency and quality of services it provides borrowers and the convenient locations of its branch office network.

Employees

The Company had 650 full-time employees and 59 part-time employees as of December 31, 2005. None of these employees is represented by a collective bargaining agreement. The Company believes that it enjoys excellent relations with its personnel.

Business Combinations

The Company continually evaluates business combination opportunities and sometimes conducts due diligence activities in connection with them. As a result, business combination discussions and, in some cases, negotiations take place, and transactions involving cash, debt or equity securities can be expected. Any future business combinations or series of business combinations that the Company might undertake may be material in terms of assets acquired or liabilities assumed.


Available Information

The Company’s filings with the Securities and Exchange Commission (“SEC”), including annual reports on Form 10-K, quarterly reports on Form 10-Q, current reports on Form 8-K, and all amendments thereto, are available on the Company’s website as soon as reasonably practicable after the reports are filed with or furnished to the SEC. Copies can be obtained free of charge in the “Investor Relations” section of the Company’s website at www.iberiabank.com. The Company’s SEC filings are also available through the SEC’s website at www.sec.gov.

Supervision and Regulation

The banking industry is extensively regulated under both federal and applicable state law. The following discussion is a summary of certain statutes and regulations applicable to bank holding companies and their subsidiaries; and provides specific information relevant to the Company and the Bank. Regulation of financial institutions is intended primarily for the protection of depositors, deposit insurance funds and the banking system, and generally is not intended for the protection of shareholders.

General . The Company, as a bank holding company, is subject to regulation and supervision by the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System (“FRB”) under the Bank Holding Company Act of 1956 (“BHCA”). The BHCA requires the Company to obtain the prior approval of the FRB for bank and non-bank acquisitions and prescribes certain limitations in connection with acquisitions and the non-banking activities of the Company.

The Bank is a state bank, chartered under the laws of Louisiana, and is a member of the Federal Reserve System. The Bank is subject to regular examination and comprehensive regulation and supervision by the Office of Financial Institutions of the State of Louisiana (“OFI”), which is the Bank’s chartering authority, and the FRB, the Bank’s primary federal regulator. The Bank is subject to certain reserve requirements established by the FRB and is a member of the Federal Home Loan Bank (“FHLB”) of Dallas, which is one of the 12 regional banks comprising the FHLB System. It is also subject to regulation by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (“FDIC”). The FDIC insures the deposits of the Bank to the maximum extent permitted by law (currently a maximum of $100,000 for each insured depositor).

The banking industry is affected by the monetary and fiscal policies of the FRB. An important function of the FRB is to regulate the national supply of bank credit to moderate recessions and to curb inflation. Among the instruments of monetary policy used by the FRB to implement its objectives are: open-market operations in U.S. Government securities, changes in the discount rate and the federal funds rate (which is the rate banks charge each other for overnight borrowings) and changes in reserve requirements on bank deposits.

Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 . The Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 (the “SOX Act”) implements a broad range of corporate governance, accounting and disclosure requirements for public companies, and also for their directors and officers. SEC rules adopted to implement SOX Act requirements require a reporting company’s chief executive and chief financial officers to certify certain financial and other information included in the Company’s quarterly and annual reports. The rules also require these officers to certify that they are responsible for establishing, maintaining and regularly evaluating the effectiveness of the Company’s financial reporting and disclosure controls and procedures; that they have made certain disclosures to the auditors and to the audit committee of the board of directors about the Company’s controls and procedures; and that they have included information in their quarterly and annual filings about their evaluation and whether there have been significant changes to the controls and procedures or other factors which would significantly impact these controls subsequent to their evaluation. Section 404 of the SOX Act requires management to undertake an assessment of the adequacy and effectiveness of the Company’s internal controls over financial reporting and requires the Company’s auditors to attest to, and report on, management’s assessment and the effectiveness of these controls. See Item 9A.—“Controls and Procedures” hereof for the Company’s evaluation of disclosure controls and procedures. The certifications required by Sections 302 and 906 of the SOX Act also accompany this Form 10-K.

Check 21 . The Check Clearing for the 21 st Century Act, or “Check 21”, facilitates check collection by creating a new negotiable instrument called a “substitute check,” which permits, but does not require, banks to replace original checks with substitute checks or information from the original check and process check information electronically. Banks that do use substitute checks must comply with certain notice and recredit rights. Check 21 is expected to cut the time and cost involved in physically transporting paper items and reduce the time between the deposit of a check in a bank and payment, especially in cases in which items were not already being delivered same-day or overnight.


USA Patriot Act . The USA Patriot Act authorizes regulatory powers to combat international terrorism. The provisions that affect financial institutions most directly provide the federal government with enhanced authority to identify, deter, and punish international money laundering and other crimes. Among other things, the USA Patriot Act prohibits financial institutions from doing business with foreign “shell” banks and requires increased due diligence for private banking transactions and correspondent accounts for foreign banks. In addition, financial institutions have to follow minimum verification of identity standards for all new accounts and are permitted to share information with law enforcement authorities under certain circumstances that were not previously permitted. Failure of a financial institution to comply with the USA Patriot Act’s requirements could have serious legal and reputational consequences for the institution.

Financial Modernization Legislation . The Gramm-Leach-Bliley Financial Modernization Act of 1999 (the “GLB Act”) includes a number of provisions intended to modernize and to increase competition in the American financial services industry, including authority for bank holding companies to engage in a wider range of nonbanking activities. Under the GLB Act, a bank holding company that elects to become a financial holding company may engage in any activity that the FRB, in consultation with the Secretary of the Treasury, determines by regulation or order is (i) financial in nature, (ii) incidental to any such financial activity, or (iii) complementary to any such financial activity and does not pose a substantial risk to the safety or soundness of depository institutions or the financial system generally. The GLB Act specifies certain activities that are deemed to be financial in nature, including lending, exchanging, transferring, investing for others, or safeguarding money or securities; underwriting and selling insurance; providing financial, investment, or economic advisory services; underwriting, dealing in or making a market in, securities; and any activity currently permitted for bank holding companies by the FRB. A bank holding company may elect to be treated as a financial holding company only if all depository institution subsidiaries of the holding company are and continue to be well-capitalized and well-managed and have at least a satisfactory rating under the Community Reinvestment Act.

National banks and state banks with requisite investment authority under applicable state law are also authorized by the GLB Act to engage, through “financial subsidiaries,” in any activity that is permissible for a financial holding company (as described above) and any activity that the Secretary of the Treasury, in consultation with the FRB, determines is financial in nature or incidental to any such financial activity, except (i) insurance underwriting, (ii) real estate development or real estate investment activities (unless otherwise permitted by law), (iii) insurance company portfolio investments and (iv) merchant banking. The authority of a bank to invest in a financial subsidiary is subject to a number of conditions, including, among other things, requirements that the bank must be well-managed and well-capitalized (after deducting from capital the bank’s outstanding investments in financial subsidiaries).

At this time, the Company has not determined whether it will become a financial holding company in order to utilize the expanded powers offered by the GLB Act. The Bank believes that the GLB Act’s financial subsidiary provisions and consumer protections have not had a material impact on its operations.

Privacy Laws . The GLB Act also adopts a number of significant consumer protections, including provisions intended to protect privacy of bank customers’ financial information. Regulations implementing the GLB Act require financial institutions to (i) provide initial notices to customers about their privacy policies, describing the conditions under which they may disclose nonpublic personal financial information to nonaffiliated third parties and affiliates; (ii) provide annual notices of their privacy policies to their current customers; and (iii) provide a reasonable method for customers to “opt out” of disclosure to nonaffiliated third parties.

The Fair Credit Reporting Act and the Fair and Accurate Credit Transactions Act of 2003 generally require a financial institution to allow customers to opt-out of sharing certain information with affiliates.

In March 2005, the federal banking agencies jointly issued Interagency Guidance on Response Programs for Unauthorized Access to Customer Information and Customer Notice. The guidance requires all financial institutions to implement a response program to address security breeches involving customer information, including procedures for notifying customers regarding incidents of unauthorized access that could result in substantial harm or convenience to the customer.


Community Reinvestment Act . The Community Reinvestment Act (“CRA”) requires banks to have a continuing and affirmative obligation consistent with safe and sound operation to help meet the credit needs of their entire communities, including low- and moderate-income neighborhoods. The CRA does not establish specific lending requirements or programs for financial institutions nor does it limit an institution’s discretion to develop the types of products and services that it believes are best suited to its particular communities. The CRA requires each appropriate federal bank regulatory agency to assess a bank’s record in assessing and meeting the credit needs of the communities served by that bank, including low- and moderate-income neighborhoods. The regulatory agency’s assessment of the bank’s record is made available to the public. The assessment also is part of the FRB’s consideration of applications to acquire, merge or consolidate with another banking institution or its holding company, to establish a new branch office that will accept deposits or to relocate an office. In the case of a bank holding company applying for approval to acquire a bank or other bank holding company, the FRB will assess the records of the applicant bank holding company, and such records may be the basis for denying the application. The Bank received a “satisfactory” CRA rating in its most recent examination.

Dividend Restrictions . Various federal and state requirements limit the amount of dividends the Bank can pay to the Company without regulatory approval. Additional information is provided in Note 20 to the Consolidated Financial Statements incorporated herein by reference.

Capital Adequacy. The Company and the Bank are subject to the risk-based capital requirements and guidelines imposed by the FRB and the FDIC. Failure to meet capital guidelines could subject a bank to a variety of enforcement remedies, including the termination of deposit insurance by the FDIC, and to certain restrictions on its business. The Company and the Bank were in compliance with applicable minimum capital requirements as of December 31, 2005. Additional information is provided in Note 14 to the Consolidated Financial Statements and in “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations – Capital Resources” in Exhibit 13 to this Form 10-K incorporated herein by reference.

The Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation Improvement Act. The Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation Improvement Act of 1991 (“FDICIA”), among other things, identifies five capital categories for insured depository institutions. A depository institution is “well capitalized” if it significantly exceeds the minimum level required by regulation for each relevant capital measure, “adequately capitalized” if it meets each such measure, “undercapitalized” if it fails to meet any such measure and “significantly undercapitalized” if it is significantly below such measures. If a depository institution receives an unsatisfactory examination rating, it may be deemed to be in a capitalization category that is lower than is indicated by its actual capital position.

FDICIA generally prohibits a depository institution from making any capital distribution (including payment of a dividend) or paying any management fee to its holding company if the depository institution would be undercapitalized after making the payment. Undercapitalized depository institutions are also subject to restrictions on borrowing from the Federal Reserve System and growth limitations, and are required to submit capital restoration plans.

As of December 31, 2005, the Bank was categorized as “well capitalized”. Additional information is provided in Note 14 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

Source of Strength. According to FRB policy, a bank holding company is expected to act as a source of financial strength to its subsidiary bank and to commit resources to support the subsidiary.

Federal Taxation

The Company and the Bank are subject to the generally applicable corporate tax provisions of the Internal Revenue Code (the “Code”), and the Bank is subject to certain additional provisions of the Code which apply to financial institutions. The Company, the Bank and all subsidiaries file a consolidated federal income tax return on the basis of a fiscal year ending on December 31.

Retained earnings at December 31, 2005 and 2004 included approximately $21.9 million accumulated prior to January 1, 1987 for which no provision for federal income taxes has been made. If this portion of retained earnings is used in the future for any purpose other than to absorb bad debts, it will be added to future taxable income.


The net deferred tax asset at December 31, 2005 includes $56.2 million of future deductible temporary differences. Included is $36.6 million related to book deductions for the bad debt reserve that have not been deducted for tax purposes.

State Taxation

Louisiana does not permit the filing of consolidated income tax returns. The Company is subject to the Louisiana Corporation Income Tax based on its separate Louisiana taxable income, as well as a corporate franchise tax. The Bank is not subject to the Louisiana income or franchise taxes. However, the Bank is subject to the Louisiana Shares Tax which is imposed on the assessed value of its stock. The formula for deriving the assessed value is to calculate 15% of the sum of (a) 20% of the Company’s capitalized earnings, plus (b) 80% of the Company’s taxable shareholders’ equity, and to subtract from that figure 50% of the Company’s real and personal property assessment. Various items may also be subtracted in calculating a company’s capitalized earnings. The Louisiana shares tax expense is included in noninterest expenses.

 

Item 1A. Risk Factors.

There are risks, many beyond the Company’s control, which could cause the Company’s results to differ significantly from management’s expectations. Some of these risk factors are described below. Any factor described in this report could, by itself or together with one or more other factors, adversely affect the Company’s business, results of operations and/or financial condition.

The most important risk factors affecting the success of the Company are believed to be the management of loan credit risk and interest rate risk.

Loan Credit Risk Loan credit risk is discussed in the “Asset Quality and Allowance for Loan Losses” section of “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” in Exhibit 13 hereto.

Interest Rate Risk Interest rate risk is discussed in the “Asset/ Liability Management and Market Risk” section of “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” in Exhibit 13 hereto.

Other key risks include, but are not limited to, operating risk, legal risk and acquisition risk.

Operating Risk Operating risk is the risk of loss resulting from inadequate or failed internal processes, people or systems or from external events that are wholly or partially beyond the Company’s control. Operational risk includes items such as fraud by employees or persons outside the Company, business interruptions and errors related to processing and systems. Management regularly reviews and updates the Company’s internal controls, disclosure controls and procedures, and corporate governance policies and procedures. Any system of controls, however well designed and operated, is based in part on certain assumptions and can provide only reasonable, not absolute, assurances that the objectives of the system are met. Any failure or circumvention of the Company’s controls and procedures or failure to comply with regulations related to controls and procedures could have a material adverse effect on the Company’s business, results of operations and financial condition.

Legal Risk Legal risk is the risk of legal proceedings against the Company and regulatory reviews that arise in the course of business. The Company operates in a heavily regulated industry. The regulatory framework is discussed further in the Supervision and Regulation section in Item 1 – “Business” of this Form 10-K.

Acquisition Risk The Company regularly explores opportunities to acquire financial institutions and other financial services providers. The Company’s ability to complete an acquisition is subject to regulatory approval, which may or may not be granted. The Company might be required to divest branches as a condition to receiving regulatory approval.

Difficulty in integrating an acquired company may cause the Company not to realize expected revenue increases, cost savings, increases in geographic or product presence, and/or other projected benefits from the acquisition. Specifically, the integration process could result in higher than expected deposit attrition (run-off), loss of key employees, the disruption of our business or the business of the acquired company, or otherwise adversely affect our ability to maintain relationships with customers and employees or achieve the anticipated benefits of the


acquisition. Also, the negative impact of any divestitures required by regulatory authorities in connection with acquisitions or business combinations may be greater than expected.

There are also other factors not described in this report that could cause results to differ from management’s expectations. These factors include:

 

    General business, economic and political conditions in the United States and, in particular, the Company’s market areas.

 

    Competition from other banks, as well as securities dealers, brokers, mortgage bankers and specialty finance and insurance companies.

 

    The loss of key members of senior management and the ability to attract and retain additional qualified banking personnel.

 

    The ability of third parties to provide core systems processing, essential web hosting and other Internet systems and deposit and other processing services.

 

    The vulnerability of the Company’s network and computer systems to unforeseen problems, including a security breach.

 

    Future legislation affecting the Company’s operations.

 

Item 1B. Unresolved Staff Comments.

None.

 

Item 2. Properties.

As of December 31, 2005, the Company, through the Bank, operates 44 branch offices in five areas of Louisiana. The Company also operates seven loan production offices (“LPOs”) in Mandeville, Morgan City, Houma, Alexandria, Baton Rouge, Prairieville, and Shreveport. The Prairieville and Shreveport LPOs were opened in 2005. During the year, the Company acquired seven branch facilities as a result of the merger with American Horizons Bancorp, Inc of Monroe. The Company closed six of its branches in Monroe, Louisiana due to their proximity to American Horizons branches. Also during 2005, the Company opened two full service branch locations in Mandeville and Broussard, Louisiana. The Company’s headquarters is located in Lafayette, Louisiana. The Company’s primary operations center is located in New Iberia, Louisiana. A total of 31 offices are owned and 20 are leased. The following table summarizes the Company’s locations by geographic market.

 

Market

   No. of Branches    No. of LPOs

Acadiana

   22    1

Alexandria

   —      1

Baton Rouge

   1    2

New Orleans

   8    2

Northeast Louisiana

   12    —  

Shreveport

   1    1
         

Totals

   44    7
         

 

Item 3. Legal Proceedings.

The Company is subject to certain claims and litigation arising in the ordinary course of business. In the opinion of management, after consultation with legal counsel, the ultimate disposition of these matters is not expected to have a material effect on the consolidated financial position of the Company.


Item 4. Submission of Matters to a Vote of Security Holders.

Not applicable.

Executive Officers of the Registrant

Set forth below is information with respect to the executive officers of the Company and principal occupations and positions held for periods including the last five years.

DARYL G. BYRD, age 51, serves as President and Chief Executive Officer of the Company and the Bank. He has served in this capacity since July 1999, with the exception of Chief Executive Officer of the Company and the Bank to which position he was promoted in July 2000. Prior to joining the Company and the Bank, Mr. Byrd was President and Chief Executive Officer of Bank One New Orleans Region from 1998 to 1999.

MICHAEL J. BROWN, age 42, serves as Senior Executive Vice President and Chief Credit Officer of the Company and the Bank, positions he has held since January 2001. Mr. Brown also serves as Commercial Segment Leader for the Bank. Mr. Brown was hired as Executive Vice President of the Company and the Bank in December 1999.

JOHN R. DAVIS, age 45, serves as Senior Executive Vice President of Finance and Investor Relations of the Company and the Bank, positions he has held since January 2001. Mr. Davis was hired as Executive Vice President and Chief Strategic Officer of the Company and the Bank in December 1999.

MICHAEL A. NAQUIN, age 45, serves as Senior Executive Vice President of the Company and the Bank, positions he has held since joining the Company and the Bank in March 2004. In these roles, Mr. Naquin is responsible for all North Louisiana markets, the Retail Banking Segment, Treasury Management and Corporate Facilities. Prior to joining the Company and the Bank, Mr. Naquin served in several senior roles with Bank One, including Commercial Banking Manager for Arizona and California from 2002 until 2004 and Market President & CEO of Northeast Louisiana from 1999 until 2002.

GEORGE J. BECKER III, age 65, has served as Executive Vice President and Director of Organizational Development and Corporate Secretary of the Company and the Bank since February 2005. Mr. Becker previously served as the Director of Corporate Operations and Corporate Secretary of the Company and the Bank. Mr. Becker was hired as Executive Vice President and Northeast Louisiana Market President in 1999. Mr. Becker is a Certified Public Accountant.

MARILYN W. BURCH, age 55, has served as Executive Vice President and Director of Corporate Operations of the Company and the Bank since February 2005. Ms. Burch previously served as Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer of the Company and the Bank, roles she assumed in 2001. Ms. Burch joined the Company as Corporate Controller in 1999. Ms. Burch is also a Certified Public Accountant.

ANTHONY J. RESTEL, age 36, has served as Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer and Treasurer of the Company and the Bank since February 2005. Mr. Restel was hired as Vice President and Treasurer of the Company and the Bank in March 2001. Prior to joining the Company and the Bank, Mr. Restel served as Vice President in Bank One’s Energy Group from 1998 to 2001.

PART II.

 

Item 5. Market for Registrant’s Common Equity, Related Stockholder Matters and Issuer Purchases of Equity Securities.

The information required herein is incorporated by reference to “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and “Corporate Information Data” in Exhibit 13 hereto.

 

Item 6. Selected Financial Data.

The information required herein is incorporated by reference to “Selected Consolidated Financial and Other Data” in Exhibit 13 hereto.


Item 7. Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operation.

The information required herein is incorporated by reference to “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” in Exhibit 13 hereto.

 

Item 7A. Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures about Market Risk.

The information required herein is incorporated by reference to “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” in Exhibit 13 hereto.

 

Item 8. Financial Statements and Supplementary Data.

The information required herein is incorporated by reference to “IBERIABANK Corporation and Subsidiary Consolidated Financial Statements” in Exhibit 13 hereto.

 

Item 9. Changes in and Disagreements With Accountants on Accounting and Financial Disclosure.

Not Applicable.

 

Item 9A. Controls and Procedures.

As required by Rule 13a-15 under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (the “Exchange Act’), the Company performed an evaluation of the effectiveness of the Company’s disclosure controls and procedures as of December 31, 2005. The evaluation was carried out under the supervision, and with the participation of, the Chief Executive Officer (“CEO”) and Chief Financial Officer (“CFO”). Based on that evaluation, the CEO and CFO have concluded that the Company’s disclosure controls and procedures are effective in alerting them in a timely manner to material information required to be disclosed by the Company in reports that it files or submits under the Exchange Act.

In addition, the Company reviewed its financial reporting internal controls. There was no significant change in the Company’s internal controls over financial reporting during the last fiscal quarter that has materially affected, or is reasonable likely to materially affect, the Company’s internal control over financial reporting. Management’s Annual Report on Internal Control over Financial Reporting, and the attestation report of the registered public accounting firm are included in Exhibit 13 and is incorporated by reference herein.

 

Item 9B. Other Information.

Effective February 20, 2006, the Compensation Committee of the Board of Directors approved a restricted stock award of 10,420 shares of the Company’s common stock to Daryl G. Byrd, President and Chief Executive Officer of the Company. The value of the shares was $59.06 per share on the date of the award. On February 20, 2006, Mr. Byrd was also granted options to purchase 25,630 shares of common stock at an exercise price of $59.06 per share. The term of the options is 10 years. The restricted stock award and the options will vest over a seven-year period commencing with the first anniversary of the date of the award and grant. Effective February 27, 2006, Mr. Byrd’s annual base salary was increased to $446,900.

Effective March 3, 2006, the Compensation Committee approved restricted stock awards and option grants to the following executive officers:

 

Award Recipient

  

Restricted Stock

Award

  

Common Stock

Underlying Options

Michael J. Brown

   4,741    11,556

Marilyn W. Burch

   2,318    3,633

John R. Davis

   4,741    11,556

Michael A. Naquin

   4,741    11,556

Anthony J. Restel

   2,154    5,250


The value of the shares on the date of the restricted stock awards and the exercise price of the options each were $57.66 per share. The term of the options is 10 years. The restricted stock awards and the options will vest over a seven-year period commencing with the first anniversary of the date of the awards and grants.

The restricted stock awards and the options are subject to other terms and conditions of the Restricted Stock Award Agreement and Incentive Stock Option Agreement filed as Exhibit 10.18 and Exhibit 10.19, respectively, hereto and incorporated herein by reference.

PART III.

 

Item 10. Directors and Executive Officers of the Registrant.

Information concerning the Registrant’s executive officers is contained in Part I of this Form 10-K. Other information required herein is incorporated by reference to the Proxy Statement.

 

Item 11. Executive Compensation.

The information required herein is incorporated by reference to the Proxy Statement.

 

Item 12. Security Ownership of Certain Beneficial Owners and Management and Related Stockholder Matters.

The information required herein is incorporated by reference to the Proxy Statement.

 

Item 13. Certain Relationships and Related Transactions.

The information required herein is incorporated by reference to the Proxy Statement.

 

Item 14. Principal Accountant Fees and Services.

The information required herein is incorporated by reference to the Proxy Statement.

PART IV.

 

Item 15. Exhibits and Financial Statement Schedules.

 

(a) Documents Filed as Part of this Report.

 

  (1) The following financial statements are incorporated by reference from Item 8 hereof (see Exhibit No. 13):

 

 

  (2) All schedules for which provision is made in the applicable accounting regulation of the SEC are omitted because of the absence of conditions under which they are required or because the required information is included in the consolidated financial statements and related notes thereto.

 

  (3) The following exhibits are filed as part of this Form 10-K, and this list includes the Exhibit Index.


Exhibit Index

 

Exhibit No. 2.1    Agreement and Plan of Merger, dated September 22, 2002, by and between the Registrant and Acadiana Bancshares, Inc. – incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 2.1 to Registrant’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the fiscal quarter ended September 30, 2002.
Exhibit No. 2.2    Agreement and Plan of Merger, dated November 17, 2003, by and among Alliance Bank of Baton Rouge, the Registrant, and IBERIABANK – incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 2.1 to Registrant’s Registration Statement on Form S-4 (File No. 333-111308).
Exhibit No. 2.3    Agreement and Plan of Merger, dated September 29, 2004, by and between the Registrant and American Horizons Bancorp, Inc. – incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 10.1 to Registrant’s Current Report of Form 8-K dated September 29, 2004.
Exhibit No. 3.1    Articles of Incorporation, as amended – incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 3.1 to the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2001.
Exhibit No. 3.2    Bylaws of the Company, as amended – incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 3.1 to Registrant’s Current Report of Form 8-K dated December 19, 2005.
Exhibit No. 4.1    Stock Certificate – incorporated herein by reference to Registration Statement on Form S-8 (File No. 33-93210).
Exhibit No. 4.2    Junior Subordinated Indenture between the Registrant and Wilmington Trust Company, dated September 20, 2004 – incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 4 to Registrant’s Current Report of Form 8-K dated September 20, 2004.
Exhibit No. 10.1    Retirement Savings Plan
Exhibit No. 10.2    Employment Agreement with Daryl G. Byrd, as amended and restated – incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 10.4 to the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2001.
Exhibit No. 10.3    Indemnification Agreements with Daryl G. Byrd and Michael J. Brown – incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 10.5 to the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the fiscal year ended December 31, 1999.
Exhibit No. 10.4    Severance Agreements with Michael J. Brown and John R. Davis – incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 10.6 to the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2000.
Exhibit No. 10.5    Severance Agreements with Marilyn W. Burch and George J. Becker III – incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 10.7 to the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2000.
Exhibit No. 10.6    Severance Agreements with Anthony J. Restel – incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 10.1 to Registrant’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the fiscal quarter ended March 13, 2005.
Exhibit No. 10.7    1996 Stock Option Plan – incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 10.1 to Registration Statement on Form S-8 (File No. 333-28859).
Exhibit No. 10.8    1999 Stock Option Plan – incorporated herein by reference to Registrant’s definitive proxy statement dated March 19, 1999.
Exhibit No. 10.9    Recognition and Retention Plan – incorporated herein by reference to Registrant’s definitive proxy statement dated April 16, 1996.
Exhibit No. 10.10    Supplemental Stock Option Plan – incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 10.10 to the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the fiscal year ended December 31, 1999.
Exhibit No. 10.11    2001 Incentive Compensation Plan, as amended – incorporated herein by reference to Registrant’s definitive proxy statement dated April 2, 2003.
Exhibit No. 10.12    2005 Stock Incentive Plan – incorporated herein by reference to Registrant’s definitive proxy statement dated April 11, 2005.
Exhibit No. 10.13    Purchase Agreement, dated as of June 17, 2003, among IBERIABANK Corporation, IBERIABANK Statutory Trust II and Trapeza CDO III, LLC - incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 10.1 to Registrant’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the fiscal quarter ended June 30, 2003.
Exhibit No. 10.14    Placement Agreement among the Registrant, IBERIABANK Statutory Trust III and Suntrust Capital Markets, Inc., dated as of September 20, 2004 – incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 10.1 to Registrant’s Current Report of Form 8-K dated September 20, 2004.


Exhibit No. 10.15    Guarantee Agreement between the Registrant and Wilmington Trust Company, dated as of September 20, 2004 – incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 10.7 to Registrant’s Current Report of Form 8-K dated September 20, 2004.
Exhibit No. 10.16    Change in Control Severance Agreement with Michael A. Naquin, dated August 25, 2004 - incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 10.15 to the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2004.
Exhibit No. 10.17    Indemnification Agreement with Michael A. Naquin, dated March 3, 2004 - incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 10.15 to the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2004.
Exhibit No. 10.18    Form of Restricted Stock Agreement Under the IBERIABANK Corporation 2001 Incentive Compensation Plan.
Exhibit No. 10.19    Form of Incentive Stock Option Agreement Under the IBERIABANK Corporation 2001 Incentive Compensation Plan.
Exhibit No. 12    Statements: Computations of Ratios .
Exhibit No. 13    Annual Report to Shareholders – Portions of Annual Report to Shareholders for the year ended December 31, 2005, which are expressly incorporated herein by reference.
Exhibit No. 21    Subsidiaries of the Registrant .
Exhibit No. 23    Consent of Castaing, Hussey & Lolan, LLC .
Exhibit No. 31.1    Certification of principal executive officer pursuant to Exchange Act Rule 13a-14(a) or 15d-14(a).
Exhibit No. 31.2    Certification of principal financial officer pursuant to Exchange Act Rule 13a-14(a) or 15d-14(a).
Exhibit No. 32.1    Certification of principal executive officer pursuant to 18 U.S.C. Section 1350, as adopted pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002.
Exhibit No. 32.2    Certification of principal financial officer pursuant to 18 U.S.C. Section 1350, as adopted pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002.
Exhibit No. 99    Audit Committee Charter, as amended – incorporated herein by reference to Exhibit 99 to the Registrant’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2004.


SIGNATURES

Pursuant to the requirements of Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, the Registrant has duly caused this report to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized.

 

   

IBERIABANK CORPORATION

 

Date: March 15, 2006

   

By:

 

/s/ Daryl G. Byrd

       

President/CEO and Director

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, this report has been signed below by the following persons on behalf of the Registrant and in the capacities and on the dates indicated.

 

Name

  

Title

  

Date

/s/ Daryl G. Byrd

Daryl G. Byrd

   President, Chief Executive Officer and Director    March 15, 2006

/s/ John R. Davis

John R. Davis

   Senior Executive Vice President of Finance and Investor Relations    March 15, 2006

/s/ Anthony J. Restel

Anthony J. Restel

   Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer    March 15, 2006

/s/ Joseph B. Zanco

Joseph B. Zanco

   Senior Vice President and Controller and Principal Accounting Officer    March 15, 2006

/s/ Elaine D. Abell

Elaine D. Abell

  

Director

   March 15, 2006

/s/ Harry V. Barton, Jr.

Harry V. Barton, Jr.

  

Director

   March 15, 2006

/s/ Ernest P. Breaux, Jr.

Ernest P. Breaux, Jr.

  

Director

   March 15, 2006

/s/ John N. Casbon

John N. Casbon

  

Director

   March 15, 2006

/s/ William H. Fenstermaker

William H. Fenstermaker

  

Director

   March 15, 2006

/s/ Larrey G. Mouton

Larrey G. Mouton

  

Director

   March 15, 2006

/s/ Jefferson G. Parker

Jefferson G. Parker

  

Director

   March 15, 2006

/s/ O. Miles Pollard, Jr.

O. Miles Pollard, Jr.

  

Director

   March 15, 2006

/s/ E. Stewart Shea III

E. Stewart Shea III

  

Director

   March 15, 2006

/s/ David H. Welch

David H. Welch

  

Director

   March 15, 2006

Exhibit 10.1

IBERIABANK Corporation

Retirement Savings Plan

Amended and Restated April 1, 2005


TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

ARTICLE I DEFINITIONS

   1
1.1    Accounts    1
1.2   

Active Participant

   1
1.3    After-Tax Rollover Contribution Account    1
1.4    Affiliate or Affiliated Company    1
1.5    Beneficiary    1
1.6    Board of Directors    1
1.7    Catch-up Contribution Account    1
1.8    Change of Control    2
1.9    Code    2
1.10    Committee    2
1.11    Company    2
1.12    Compensation    2
1.13    Disability    3
1.14    Dividend    3
1.15    Dividend Account    3
1.16    Eligible Employee    3
1.17    Employee    4
1.18    Employer    4
1.19    Employer Contribution    4
1.20    Employer Contribution Account    4
1.21    Employer Discretionary Contribution    4
1.22    Employer Securities    4
1.23    Entry Date    4
1.24    ERISA    4
1.25    ESOP    5
1.26    Highly Compensated Employee    5
1.27    Hour of Service    5
1.28    Legacy ESOP    6
1.29    Legacy ESOP Account    6
1.30    Matching Contribution    6
1.31    Matching Contribution Account    6
1.32    Non-Highly Compensated Employee    6
1.33    Non-Participating Employer    6
1.34    Normal Retirement Age    6
1.35    Normal Retirement Date    7
1.36    One Year Break in Service or Break in Service    7
1.37    Parental Absence    7
1.38    Participant    7
1.39    Participating Employer    7
1.40    Plan    7
1.41    Plan Administrator    7
1.42    Plan Year    7
1.43    Pre-Tax Contribution or Pre-Tax Contribution    7
1.44    Pre-Tax Contribution Account    7
1.45    Pre-Tax Contribution Agreement    7
1.46    Required Beginning Date    7
1.47    Rollover Contribution Account    8

 

i


1.48

  

Trust or Trust Agreement

   8

1.49

  

Spouse

   8

1.50

  

Temporary Employee

   8

1.51

  

Trustee

   8

1.52

  

Valuation Date

   8

1.53

  

Year of Service

   8

ARTICLE II PARTICIPATION

   9

2.1

  

401(k) Participant.

   9

2.2

  

Eligible Participant.

   9

2.3

  

Termination of Participation.

   9

2.4

  

Participation Following Reemployment.

   9

2.5

  

Rights of Returning Veteran

   9

2.6

  

Omission of Eligible Employee

   11

2.7

  

Inclusion of Ineligible Employee

   12

ARTICLE III EMPLOYEE CONTRIBUTIONS

   13

3.1

  

Pre-Tax Contributions.

   13

3.2

  

Delivery of Pre-Tax Contribution Contributions

   13

3.3

  

Changes in and Discontinuance of Pre-Tax Contributions

   13

3.4

  

Dollar Limitation

   13

3.5

  

Return of Excess Deferral Amounts

   13

3.6

  

Rollover Contributions

   14

3.7

  

Catch-up Contributions

   14

ARTICLE IV EMPLOYER CONTRIBUTIONS

   15

4.1

  

Matching Contributions

   15

4.2

  

Employer Discretionary Contributions

   15

4.3

  

Top-Heavy Contributions

   15

4.4

  

Delivery of Contributions

   15

4.5

  

Adjustments if Pre-Tax Contribution Contributions Adjusted

   15

ARTICLE V VESTING

   16

5.1

  

Vesting Schedule

   16

5.2

  

Forfeitures.

   16

5.3

  

Reemployment Before Break in Service

   17

5.4

  

Reemployment After Break in Service

   17

ARTICLE VI ALLOCATIONS

   18

6.1

  

Allocation of Contributions

   18

6.2

  

Definitions

   18

6.3

  

Annual Additions

   19

6.4

  

Limitation for Other Defined Contribution Plans

   19

ARTICLE VII INVESTMENTS

   21

7.1

  

Trust Fund

   21

7.2

  

Separate Accounts

   21

7.3

  

Valuation

   21

7.4

  

Available Investments.

   21

 

ii


7.5

  

Employer Securities Fund

   21

7.6

  

Investment of Contributions.

   22

7.7

  

Transfer of Amounts Among Investments

   22

7.8

  

Liability for Investment Decisions

   23

7.9

  

Accounting Procedures

   23

ARTICLE VIII EMPLOYER SECURITIES FUND

   24

8.1

  

Status of Employer Securities Fund.

   24

8.2

  

Maintenance of Employer Securities Fund.

   24

8.3

  

Dividends

   24

8.4

  

Pass-Through of Voting Rights

   25

8.5

  

Tender Offers

   25

8.6

  

Manner of Distribution

   26

8.7

  

ESOP Trustee

   26

8.8

  

Right of First Refusal

   26

8.9

  

Put

   26

8.10

  

Certain Transactions Involving Company Stock.

   27

ARTICLE IX PAYMENT OF BENEFITS

   29

9.1

  

Benefits Upon Termination of Employment

   29

9.2

  

Distribution Upon Severance From Employment

   29

9.3

  

Form of Distribution.

   29

9.4

  

Form of Benefit

   29

9.5

  

When Benefits are Paid or Commence

   29

9.6

  

Direct Rollover Rules

   30

9.7

  

Notice

   32

9.8

  

Nonalienation of Benefits

   32

9.9

  

Qualified Domestic Relations Order

   32

9.10

  

Minimum Distribution Requirements.

   34

ARTICLE X IN-SERVICE DISTRIBUTION AND LOANS

   40

10.1

  

In-Service Distributions

   40

10.2

  

Financial Hardship

   40

10.3

  

Loans to Participants

   41

ARTICLE XI ADMINISTRATION

   43

11.1

  

Board of Directors

   43

11.2

  

Administrative Committee

   43

11.3

  

Committee’s Duties and Responsibilities

   43

11.4

  

Committee’s Powers

   44

11.5

  

Chairman of the Committee

   45

11.6

  

Claims Review Procedure

   45

11.7

  

Information from Participants, Beneficiaries and Alternate Payees

   46

11.8

  

Actions

   46

11.9

  

Bond

   47

11.10

  

Indemnification

   47

ARTICLE XII AMENDMENT AND TERMINATION

   48

12.1

  

Right to Amend or Suspend Contributions

   48

12.2

  

Restriction on Amendment

   48

 

iii


12.3

  

Merger

   48

12.4

  

Termination

   48

ARTICLE XIII STAND-BY TOP-HEAVY PROVISIONS

   50

13.1

  

Top Heavy Plan

   50

13.2

  

Definitions

   50

13.3

  

Vesting

   51

13.4

  

Minimum Contribution

   52

13.5

  

Limitations on Contributions

   53

13.6

  

Other Plans

   53

ARTICLE XIV GENERAL PROVISIONS

   54

14.1

  

Plan Voluntary

   54

14.2

  

Payments to Minors and Incompetents

   54

14.3

  

Missing Payee

   54

14.4

  

Required Information.

   54

14.5

  

Communications to Committee

   54

14.6

  

Communications from Employer or Committee

   54

14.7

  

Action

   55

14.8

  

Liability for Benefits

   55

14.9

  

Named Fiduciary

   55

14.10

  

Gender

   55

14.11

  

Captions

   55

14.12

  

Applicable Law

   55

14.13

  

Reversion of Employer Contributions

   55

14.14

  

Expenses

   56

 

iv


PREAMBLE

This plan holds the assets of the IBERIABANK Corporation Employee Stock Ownership Plan (“Legacy ESOP”), which merged into the IBERIABANK Corporation Profit Sharing Plan and Trust (“Profit Sharing Plan”). The merged plan is hereby renamed the IBERIABANK Corporation Retirement Savings Plan. The history of the Plan is as follows:

The Profit Sharing Plan was originally established effective January 1, 1982, and has been amended and restated numerous times since then (most recently restated effective January 1, 2003). The Profit Sharing Plan was amended effective June 30, 2005 to create an employee stock ownership plan within the Profit Sharing Plan, represented by the assets held in the form of Employer Securities.

The Legacy ESOP was originally established effective January 1, 1995, to enable eligible employees to acquire a proprietary interest in capital stock of the Employer, while allowing the use of exempt loans to the Legacy ESOP pursuant to Labor Regulation §2550.408b-3 and Treasury Regulation §54.4975-7(b). The exempt loan was repaid in full as of March 31, 2005.

The Legacy ESOP merged into the Profit Sharing Plan effective April 1, 2005, to create the IBERIABANK Corporation Retirement Savings Plan (“Plan”). The Plan no longer allows exempt loans, but remains an ESOP (represented by assets in the Legacy ESOP Accounts and other assets of the Plan held in the Employer Securities Fund).

To the extent not inconsistent with the terms of this Plan document, the Trust document for the Plan shall be the trust provisions in the Merrill Lynch Special/Flexible Prototype Defined Contribution Plan and Trust, until such time as the individual Trustees named by the Company are replaced by an institutional directed trustee.

The purpose of this Plan is to encourage Employees to save and systematically invest a portion of their current compensation in order that they may have an additional source of income upon their retirement, to provide them with an opportunity to become stockholders of the Company, and to provide an opportunity to receive current income in the form of dividends on Employer Securities (which dividends may also be reinvested to purchase additional Employer Securities). The benefits provided by the Plan are paid from the Trust Fund established by the Employer and are in addition to the benefits Employees are entitled to receive under the United States Social Security Administration. The Plan and the Trust forming a part hereof are maintained for the exclusive benefit of the Participants and their Beneficiaries.

The Plan is hereby restated effective April 1, 2005 (except as otherwise stated) to implement provisions relative to the Merger, to incorporate prior amendments relating to the addition of employee stock ownership plan features, and to make other changes and clarifications.


ARTICLE I

DEFINITIONS

All capitalized terms used in this Plan shall have the meaning set forth in this Article I, unless a different meaning is plainly required by the context:

1.1 Accounts means each of a Participant’s Pre-Tax Contribution Account, After-Tax Contribution Account, Catch-up Contribution Account, Employer Contribution Account, Dividend Account, Legacy ESOP Account, Pre-Tax Rollover Contribution Account, and After-Tax Rollover Account (including sub accounts established from time to time under each such Account) established and maintained to record the interest of a Participant in the Trust Fund.

1.2 Active Participant means an Eligible Participant who performs 1,000 Hours of Service during a Plan Year and is employed by a Participating Employer on the last day of the Plan Year. A Participant on leave pursuant to the Family and Medical Leave Act of 1993 shall be deemed to be employed on the last day of the Plan Year. An Eligible Participant who terminates employment after his Normal Retirement Date, Disability or death shall be deemed to be an Active Participant.

1.3 After-Tax Rollover Contribution Account means the Account maintained for a Participant to record his after-tax rollover contribution made pursuant to Section 3.6.

1.4 Affiliate or Affiliated Company means the Company and all other entities required to be aggregated with the Company under Sections 414(b), (c), (m) or (o) of the Code.

1.5 Beneficiary means the person or persons designated by a Participant to receive the amount, if any, payable under the Plan in the event of a Participant’s death. Each Beneficiary designation shall be in the form prescribed by the Committee.

If the Participant is married and designates someone other than his legal spouse, his Beneficiary designation must include the written consent of his spouse at the time the designation is made. Such written consent must approve the Beneficiary designated and acknowledge the effect of such designation and must be notarized by a notary public. Such written consent shall not be required if it is established to the satisfaction of the Committee that: (i) the Participant has no spouse; (ii) the spouse’s consent cannot be obtained because the spouse cannot be located, or (iii) such other circumstances exist as may be prescribed in regulations issued pursuant to Code Section 417.

If no valid Beneficiary designation is in effect at the time of the Participant’s death, then, to the extent that any benefits are payable under the Plan after such death, Beneficiary shall mean the Participant’s legal spouse, if he is married at the time of his death, otherwise Beneficiary shall mean the Participant’s estate.

1.6 Board of Directors means the Board of Directors of the Company.

1.7 Catch-up Contribution Account means the Account maintained for a Participant to record the Catch-up Contributions under Section 3.7 contributed by the Employer on such Participant’s behalf.

 

1


1.8 Change of Control means a change in control of a nature that would be required to be reported in response to Item 6(e) of Schedule 14A of Regulation 14A promulgated under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, or any successor thereto, whether or not the Employer is registered under the Exchange Act, other than a conversion of the Employer’s mutual holding company to the stock form of organization.

1.9 Code means the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended.

1.10 Committee means the Plan Administration and Investment Committee designated by the Company to administer the Plan in accordance with Article XI or a person or entity designated by the Committee.

1.11 Company means IBERIABANK Corporation and any successor company that may continue the Plan.

1.12 Compensation The term “Compensation,” as modified below, has the following meaning for each respective purpose under the Plan:

 

  (a) Plan Compensation . For purposes of determining contributions to the Plan, Plan Compensation means wages within the meaning of Code Section 3401(a) for the purposes of income tax withholding at the source but determined without regard to any rules that limit the remuneration included in wages based on the nature or location of the employment or the services performed (such as the exception for agricultural labor in Code Section 3401(a)(2)). For purposes of determining the amount of Pre-Tax and Matching Contributions, Plan Compensation includes any amount an Employee contributes to a qualified plan under Code Section 401(k), including Catch-Up Contributions, or Code Section 125, and shall include all compensation during the Plan Year in which the Participant enters the Plan (although Participant cannot make Pre-Tax Contributions of greater than 100% of Plan Compensation earned after the Participant’s Entry Date). Effective January 1, 2003, Plan Compensation shall include elective amounts that are not includible in the gross income of the Employee by reason of Code Section 132(f)(4) (qualified transportation fringe benefits). Plan Compensation does not include severance payments, distributions from a nonqualified plan, or compensation from the exercise of stock options or restricted stock.

 

  (b) Limitation Compensation . For the purpose of applying the limitations of Section 415 of the Code, Limitation Compensation means wages within the meaning of Code Section 3401(a) for the purposes of income tax withholding at the source but determined without regard to any rules that limit the remuneration included in wages based on the nature or location of the employment or the services performed (such as the exception for agricultural labor in Code Section 3401(a)(2)). An Employee’s Limitation Compensation includes any amount an Employee contributes to a qualified plan under Section 401(k), including Catch-up Contributions, or Code Section 125, and shall include all compensation during the Plan Year

 

2


       in which the Participant enters the Plan. Effective January 1, 2003, Limitation Compensation shall include elective amounts that are not includible in the gross income of the Employee by reason of Code Section 132(f)(4).

The amount of a Participant’s annual Compensation that can be taken into account under the Plan shall not exceed the annual compensation limit under Code Section 401(a)(17), as adjusted for cost-of-living increases in accordance with Code Section 401(a)(17)(B) ($210,000 in 2005).

1.13 Disability means a condition that qualifies the Participant for commencement of either (i) benefits for permanent and total disability under Federal Old Age and Survivor Insurance, or (ii) benefits under the Participating Employer’s long term disability plan.

1.14 Dividend means a cash distribution paid by the Employer with respect to Employer Securities that is characterized as a dividend under applicable state law.

1.15 Dividend Account means the Account maintained for a Participant to record Dividends paid with respect to assets held in his Account pursuant to Section 8.3.

1.16 Eligible Employee means any Employee of a Participating Employer who has attained age eighteen (18), provided, however, that an Eligible Employee shall not include:

 

  (a) Employees covered by a collective bargaining agreement . No Employee whose terms and conditions of employment are determined by a collective bargaining agreement between employee representatives and an Employer shall be an Eligible Employee unless such collective bargaining agreement provides to the contrary, in which case such Employee shall be eligible or shall qualify for participation upon compliance with such provisions for eligibility or participation as such agreement shall provide; except that no Employee who has selected, or in the future selects, a union shall become ineligible during the period between his selection of the union and the execution of the first collective bargaining agreement which covers him.

 

  (b) Employees of Certain Related Entities . No Employee of an Affiliate that is not a Participating Employer shall be an Eligible Employee.

 

  (c) Employees Not on the Payroll . No Employee who is not on the payroll of a Participating Employer shall be an Eligible Employee.

 

  (d) Leased Employees . No Employee who is a Leased Employee within the meaning of Section 414(n)(2) of the Code shall be an Eligible Employee. For purposes of this paragraph, the term “Leased Employee” means any person (other than an employee of the recipient) who, pursuant to an agreement between the recipient and any other person (“leasing organization”), has performed services for the recipient (or for the recipient and any related persons determined in accordance with Section 414(n)(6) of the Code) on a substantially full time basis for a period of at

 

3


       least one year and such services are performed under primary direction or control by the recipient. Notwithstanding the foregoing, a Leased Employee shall include a person treated as such, notwithstanding the fact that such person is later determined to be a common-law employee of the Employer.

 

  (e) Consultants or Independent Contractors . No Employee who is employed as such pursuant to an agreement with the Employer that designates such Employee as a consultant or independent contractor shall be an Eligible Employee, notwithstanding the fact that such person is later determined to be a common-law employee of the Employer.

 

  (f) Nonresident Aliens . Nonresident aliens (within the meaning of Section 7701(b)(1)(B) of the Code) who receive no earned income (within the meaning of Section 911(d)(2) of the Code) from the Employer that constitutes income from sources within the United States (within the meaning of Section 861(a)(3) of the Code) shall not be Eligible Employees.

All determinations shall be made in the sole discretion of the Participating Employer in a uniform non-discriminatory manner.

1.17 Employee means any person who is receiving remuneration for personal services rendered as a common law employee.

1.18 Employer means a Participating Employer or a Non-Participating Employer. Appendix A lists each Participating Employer.

1.19 Employer Contribution means any (a) Matching Contributions, (b) Employer Discretionary Contributions, (c) contributions required on account of the Plan being deemed to be Top-Heavy, and (d) contributions made to the Legacy ESOP that have been transferred to the Plan.

1.20 Employer Contribution Account means the Account established for a Participant that is funded by Employer Contributions under Article IV of the Plan.

1.21 Employer Discretionary Contribution means a contribution by an Employer to the Trust Fund in accordance with Section 4.2.

1.22 Employer Securities means common stock issued by the Company that is readily tradable on an established securities market.

1.23 Entry Date means the first business day after the date the Employee meets the eligibility requirements of Article II, and each business day thereafter.

1.24 ERISA means the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as amended.

 

4


1.25 ESOP means the Employee Stock Ownership Plan portion of the Plan, which is intended to meet the requirements of Code Section 4975(e)(7) and Treas. Reg. Section 54.4975-11, and which shall consist of the Employer Securities Fund (as defined in Section 8.1 of the Plan).

1.26 Highly Compensated Employee as determined for any Plan Year after the Plan Year ending December 31, 1996, means any Employee who (a) was a 5% owner (as defined at Section 416(i)(1)(B)(i) of the Code) at any time during the current year or the previous year or (b) received Compensation in excess of $80,000 (as adjusted after 1997 under Code Section 414(q)(1)) in the preceding Plan Year (Employees earning $90,000 in 2004 will be considered Highly Compensated Employees in 2005; Employees earning $95,000 in 2005 will be considered Highly Compensated Employees in 2006).

1.27 Hour of Service means:

 

  (a) Each hour for which an Employee is directly or indirectly paid or entitled to payment by an Employer for the performance of duties;

 

  (b) Each hour for which an Employee is directly or indirectly paid or entitled to payment by an Employer (including payments made or due from a trust fund or insurer to which the Employer contributes or pays premiums) on account of a period of time during which no duties are performed (irrespective of whether the employment relationship has terminated) due to vacation, holiday, illness, incapacity (including disability), layoff, jury duty, military duty, or leave of absence, provided that:

 

  (i) no more than 501 Hours of Service shall be credited under this paragraph (b) to an Employee on account of any single continuous period during which the Employee performs no duties; and

 

  (ii) Hours of Service shall not be credited under this paragraph (b) to an Employee for a payment which solely reimburses the Employee for medically-related expenses incurred by the Employee or which is made or due under a plan maintained solely for the purpose of complying with applicable worker’s compensation, unemployment compensation or disability insurance laws;

 

  (c) Each hour not already included under this Section above for which back pay, irrespective of mitigation of damages, is either awarded or agreed to by such Employer, provided that crediting of Hours of Service under this Section with respect to periods described in this Section above shall be subject to the limitation therein set forth; and

 

  (d) If an Employee is absent from his or her employment with the Employer for any period on account of (i) Parental Absence, or (ii) any period of leave recognized under the Family and Medical Leave Act of 1993, such Employee shall be credited with sufficient Hours of Service (not in excess of 501 in any Plan Year) so that a Break in Service does not occur in either the Employment Year in which such absence begins (if credit is required

 

5


       to preclude a Break in Service in such year) or in the immediately following Employment Year (if no credit was awarded in the preceding year). For purposes of computing Hours of Service credited under this paragraph (d), an Employee shall be credited with (i) Hours of Service which would otherwise be credited to such Employee without regard to the absence, or (ii) 8 Hours of Service for each day of the absence. The Committee, in its sole discretion, may require (i) evidence that the absence is on account of a reason enumerated in this paragraph (d), and (ii) evidence as to the duration of the absence.

Hours of Service shall also include service with any corporation or partnership that enters into an asset or stock transaction with a Participating Employer (“Seller”), as to Employees who were employed with the Seller on the date of the acquisition and who are employed by any Participating Employer within 30 days of the acquisition, provided (a) the Seller in a stock transaction does not sponsor a defined contribution plan with 401(k) features, or (b) the Seller in an asset transaction does not transfer sponsorship of a defined contribution plan with 401(k) features to a Participating Employer. The Plan will be amended on a regular basis to identify the new predecessor employers pursuant to this provision.

Hours of Service includes service with Iberia Savings Bank, Iberia Financial Services, LLC, Finesco, LLC, Jefferson Bank, LBA Savings Bank, IBERIABANK Insurance Services, LLC, Alliance Bank and American Horizons Bank.

The number of Hours of Service to be credited under this Section on account of a period during which an Employee performs no duties, and the Plan Years to which Hours of Service shall be credited under this Section, shall be determined by the Committee in accordance with Sections 2530.200b-2(b) and (c) of the Regulations of the U.S. Department of Labor.

1.28 Legacy ESOP means the IBERIABANK Corporation Employee Stock Ownership Plan, which was merged into the Plan effective April 1, 2005.

1.29 Legacy ESOP Account means the Account maintained for a Participant to record assets held in a Participant’s Account that are attributable to the Legacy ESOP.

1.30 Matching Contribution means a contribution by an Employer to the Trust Fund as described in Article IV.

1.31 Matching Contribution Account means the Account established for a Participant that is funded by Matching Contributions under Section 4.1 of the Plan.

1.32 Non-Highly Compensated Employee means an Employee who is not a Highly Compensated Employee.

1.33 Non-Participating Employer means an Affiliated Company that is not a Participating Employer.

1.34 Normal Retirement Age means the Participant’s attainment of age sixty-five (65).

 

6


1.35 Normal Retirement Date means the first day of the month following the month during which the Participant attains Normal Retirement Age.

1.36 One Year Break in Service or Break in Service means a Plan Year in which a Participant has 500 or less Hours of Service.

1.37 Parental Absence means an Employee’s absence from work for any of the following reasons: (i) the pregnancy of the Employee, (ii) the birth of the Employee’s child, (iii) the adoption of a child by the Employee, or (iv) the need to care for the Employee’s child immediately following the child’s birth or adoption; provided, however, that the Committee, in its sole discretion, may require evidence that any absence is on account of a reason enumerated herein and evidence as to the duration of such absence.

1.38 Participant means (a) any Eligible Employee who satisfies the participation requirements set forth in Article II, and (b) any former Employee on whose behalf an Account continues to be maintained in the Plan pursuant to Article II. An Eligible Employee remains a Participant as long as he has an Account balance, as provided in Section 2.3.

1.39 Participating Employer means the Company and any Affiliated Companies, listed at Appendix A of the Plan.

By participating in this Plan, the governing body of any Participating Employer expressly recognizes and delegates to the Company and its Board of Directors the right to exercise on the behalf of the Participating Employer all power and authority conferred by the Plan to the Participating Employer or its board of directors.

1.40 Plan means the IBERIABANK Corporation Retirement Savings Plan, as set forth in this document and as amended from time to time.

1.41 Plan Administrator means the Committee.

1.42 Plan Year means the calendar year.

1.43 Pre-Tax Contribution or Pre-Tax Contribution means the amount contributed by the Employer on behalf of a Participant in accordance with Section 3.1.

1.44 Pre-Tax Contribution Account means the Account maintained for a Participant to record the Pre-Tax Contributions under Section 3.1, contributed by the Employer on such Participant’s behalf.

1.45 Pre-Tax Contribution Agreement means the agreement described in Article III.

1.46 Required Beginning Date means for anyone other than a 5% owner (as defined in Code Section 416(i)(1)(B)(i)), April 1st of the calendar year following the calendar year in which the Employee attains age 70  1 / 2 or, if later, the calendar year in which the Employee terminates employment with all Participating Employers. For 5% owners, Required Beginning Date means April 1st of the calendar year following the calendar year in which a Participant attains age 70  1 / 2 .

 

7


1.47 Rollover Contribution Account means the Account maintained for a Participant to record his rollover contribution made pursuant to Section 3.6.

1.48 Trust or Trust Agreement means the trust established by the Plan under which contributions to the Plan shall be received, held, invested and disbursed to or for the benefit of Participants and their Beneficiaries and Alternate Payees.

1.49 Spouse means an individual of the opposite sex who is legally married to the Employee.

1.50 Temporary Employee means an individual who is paid through an Employer payroll and is classified by the Employer as employed on a temporary basis.

1.51 Trustee means such individual, individuals or entity that has or shall have accepted the appointment by the Board of Directors as Trustee under the Plan.

1.52 Valuation Date means each business day. The Annual Valuation Date means the last day of the Plan Year.

1.53 Year of Service for vesting purposes means a Plan Year in which the Employee completes 1,000 Hours of Service. Years of Service for eligibility purposes means the twelve (12) consecutive month period beginning on the date the Employee first performs an Hour of Service for the Employer in which the Employee completes 1,000 Hours of Service. Provided, however, that succeeding computation periods shall be based on the Plan Year, commencing with the Plan Year that began immediately prior to the first anniversary of the date the Employee first performed an Hour of Service. Years of Service shall include all service with the Employer, including service prior to the attainment of age 18.

 

8


ARTICLE II

PARTICIPATION

2.1 401(k) Participant . Each Eligible Employee shall be eligible to enter into a Pre-Tax Contribution Agreement and thereby make Pre-Tax Contributions as of the first of the month following the date of employment by a Participating Employer. Effective September 1, 2005, entry shall be as soon as is administratively feasible following the Participant’s date of employment by a Participating Employer. Effective September 1, 2005, each Eligible Employee who is a Temporary Employee shall be eligible to enter into a Pre-Tax Contribution Agreement and thereby make Pre-Tax Contributions only upon completion of one Year of Service for eligibility purposes.

2.2 Eligible Participant .

 

  (a) Matching Contributions . Each Eligible Employee who is eligible to make and who does make Pre-Tax Contributions shall be an Eligible Participant in the Matching Contribution portion of the Plan.

 

  (b) Employer Discretionary Contributions . Each Eligible Employee who is an Active Participant shall be an Eligible Participant in the Employer Discretionary Contribution portion of the Plan.

2.3 Termination of Participation. An Eligible Employee or Participant who (i) has terminated employment, (ii) becomes a member of a group of employees covered by a negotiated collective bargaining agreement which does not provide for participation in the Plan, (iii) no longer meets the definition of Eligible Employee, or (iv) becomes an employee of a Non-Participating Employer shall no longer be an Eligible Employee but shall continue as a Participant in the Plan entitled to share in the earnings and losses of the Trust Fund and to exercise the rights of a Participant hereunder until his Accounts have been distributed.

The participation of any Participant shall end when (i) no further benefits are payable to him or his Beneficiary under the Plan and (ii) no further amounts are credited to his Accounts.

2.4 Participation Following Reemployment. If an Eligible Employee has terminated employment but is reemployed, he shall automatically become a Participant as of the date he first performs an Hour of Service following reemployment. The Committee shall allow the Participant to elect to make Pre-Tax Contributions pursuant to Section 3.1.

2.5 Rights of Returning Veteran . This Section applies to Returning Veterans who apply for reemployment. Notwithstanding any provisions of the Plan to the contrary, contributions, benefits, Plan loan repayments and service credit with respect to qualified military service will be provided in accordance with Code Section 414(u).

 

  (a) Definitions

 

  (i) Returning Veteran means a reemployed Employee who gave notice to the Employer of his impending Service in the Uniformed Services, (unless such notice was precluded by military necessity or was otherwise impossible or unreasonable), and resumes

 

9


       employment with an Employer during such time as such Employee has reemployment rights under Chapter 43 of Title 38 of the United States Code, popularly known as the Uniformed Services Employment and Reemployment Rights Act.

 

  (ii) Service in the Uniformed Services means the performance of duty on a voluntary or involuntary basis in a “Uniformed Service” and includes: active duty, active duty for training, initial active duty for training, inactive duty training, full-time National Guard duty, and a period for which a person is absent from a position of employment for the purpose of an examination to determine the fitness of the person to perform any such duty. The “Uniformed Services” include the Armed Forces, the Army National Guard, and the Air National Guard when engaged in active duty for training, inactive duty training, or full-time National Guard duty; the commissioned corps of the Public Health Service; and any other category of persons designated by the President of the United States in time of war or emergency.

 

  (iii) Compensation of a Returning Veteran . The allowable contributions will be based on the Compensation that the Returning Veteran would have received for that period if not in the Uniformed Services (including wage increases and bonuses), or, if that can not be determined with reasonable certainty, based on the Returning Veteran’s average earnings during the 12 months preceding the leave.

 

  (iv) Employee-Deferrals and Catch-Up Contribution Limitations . For purposes of the limitations under Articles III and VII, Employee Deferrals shall be deemed to be made in the Plan Years to which the contributions apply, not the year in which they are made. Similarly, for purposes of Section 3.7, Catch-Up Contributions shall be deemed to be made in the Plan Year to which the contributions apply. No earnings shall be included in the Employee-Deferrals or Catch-Up Contributions, even though the Returning Veteran’s account balance would have been greater if the contributions had been made in the years to which they apply.

 

  (b) Make-Up Employee Contributions . A Returning Veteran is allowed to make the Pre-Tax and Catch-up Contributions that he or she could have made if employed by the Employer during the period of service in the Uniformed Services.

The Employee Contributions can be made over a period of years equal to three times the period of Uniformed Service, not to exceed five years. The Employee Contributions shall be deemed to apply first to the earliest period of the Service with the Uniformed Services.

 

10


  (c) Make-Up Matching Contributions . If a Returning Veteran makes a Pre-Tax Contribution, the Employer will make the Matching Contribution, if any, that would have been made to the account of the Returning Veteran if he or she had made the Pre-Tax Contribution in the years to which they apply.

 

  (d) Make-Up Employer Discretionary Contributions . A Returning Veteran shall receive the Employer Discretionary Contributions, if any, (exclusive of forfeitures) that he would have received if employed by an Employer during the period of service in the Uniformed Services.

 

  (e) Hours of Service . An Hour of Service means each hour the Returning Veteran would have been paid, directly or indirectly, or entitled to payment under Section 1.27 assuming that but for such military service he would have been regularly engaged in the performance of his duties. Such hours shall be credited to the Year of Service in which he would have been regularly engaged in the performance of his duties but for such military service.

 

  (f) Severance Date . A Returning Veteran who is absent from employment on account of Service in the Uniformed Services shall incur a Service Termination Date under this subsection only if he fails to return to active employment with the Employer within the period provided by law for the protection of his re-employment rights.

 

  (g) Loan Repayment . Any loan repayment suspension for a Participant will not be taken into account for purposes of Code Sections taxing unpaid loans for any part of any period during which such Participant is in the Service in the Uniformed Services and will not be considered in testing for discriminatory benefits or treated as a “prohibited transaction” between the Plan and Participant. The interest rate charged on loans shall be capped at six percent (6%) for any period during which a Participant is covered by the Soldiers’ and Sailors’ Civil Relief Act of 1940. Upon return to employment, the Returning Veteran will resume payments via payroll withholding at a higher level, taking into account the additional interest accruing on the loan during the period of Service in the Uniformed Services and spreading this interest over the remaining term of the loan. Alternatively, the Returning Veteran has the option to resume payments via payroll withholding at the same level in effect prior to the commencement of the period of Service in the Uniformed Services and to pay the interest that accrued during such service shall be payable in a lump sum “balloon payment” at the end of the loan term.

2.6 Omission of Eligible Employee . If in any Plan Year, any Employee who should be included as a Participant in the Plan is erroneously omitted and discovery of such omission is not made until after a contribution by his Employer for the year has been made, the Administrator shall allocate Forfeitures to the Participant’s Account for the omitted Employee in

 

11


the amount the Employer would have contributed with respect to him had he not been omitted and any earnings, as specified in applicable IRS guidance. If Forfeitures are insufficient to satisfy the obligation to the omitted Employee, the Employer shall make a contribution with respect to the omitted Employee in the amount that the Employer would have contributed with respect to him had he not been omitted. Such contribution shall be made regardless of whether or not it is deductible in whole or in part in any taxable year under applicable provisions of the Code.

2.7 Inclusion of Ineligible Employee . If, in any Plan Year, any person who should not have been included as a Participant in the Plan is erroneously included and discovery of such incorrect inclusion is not made until after a contribution for the year has been made, the Employer shall not be entitled to recover the contribution made with respect to the ineligible person regardless of whether or not a deduction is allowable with respect to such contribution. In such event, the amount contributed with respect to the ineligible person shall constitute a Forfeiture for the Plan Year in which the discovery is made, in accordance with Section 5.2.

 

12


ARTICLE III

EMPLOYEE CONTRIBUTIONS

3.1 Pre-Tax Contributions. A 401(k) Participant may enter into a Pre-Tax Contribution Agreement with his Employer on such form(s) as the Committee shall prescribe. In the Pre-Tax Contribution Agreement the Eligible Employee shall agree to accept a deferral of his Plan Compensation, determined on a payroll basis, expressed as a dollar amount or as a whole percentage no more than 100% of Plan Compensation. The Plan Administrator may adjust a Participant’s Pre-Tax Contribution election to the extent necessary to enable withholding for applicable taxes, benefits and other deductions. The Pre-Tax Contribution Agreement shall remain in effect until changed or discontinued as provided in Section 3.3. An Eligible Employee’s election under this Section 3.1 will be made effective as of the next payroll period.

No Pre-Tax Contribution may be paid to the Plan by the Employer on behalf of a Participant after he ceases to be an Eligible Employee or during any period when such Participant is not receiving Plan Compensation from a Participating Employer.

3.2 Delivery of Pre-Tax Contribution Contributions . All Pre-Tax Contributions shall be transmitted to the Trustee by the Employer as soon as practicable (but in no event later than the 15th business day of the month following the month in which the Pre-Tax Contributions would have otherwise been payable to the Participant in cash).

3.3 Changes in and Discontinuance of Pre-Tax Contributions . A Participant may change his Pre-Tax Contribution agreement on a monthly basis following advance notice of such change in such form and within such time period preceding the effective date as the Committee may prescribe. Any such change shall be effective as of the first payroll period coincident with or next following the first day of the month following the election change. A Participant may discontinue Pre-Tax Contributions paid by his Employer to the Plan on his behalf effective as of the next payroll period after written notice is provided to the Plan Administrator.

3.4 Dollar Limitation . In no event shall a Participant’s Pre-Tax Contribution Contributions for a Participant’s taxable year exceed the dollar limitation contained in Code Section 402(g) to reflect increases in the cost of living. The dollar limit is $14,000 for 2005 and $15,000 for 2006. Catch-up Contributions under Section 3.7 and Code Section 414(v) shall not be considered in determining whether the limit in this Section 3.4 has been reached.

3.5 Return of Excess Deferral Amounts . If a Participant’s Pre-Tax Contribution Contributions under the Plan should exceed the dollar limitation under Section 3.4 for a Plan Year, the excess amount and the earnings thereon shall be distributed to the Participant no later than the April 15 following the calendar year of the excess deferral. If a Participant notifies the Committee in writing no later than March 1 following the calendar year of the excess deferral that he was also a participant in a plan of an unrelated employer governed by the Code Section 402(g) dollar limitation described in Section 3.4, that the total deferrals under the plans exceeded the dollar limitation described in Section 3.4, and that he has allocated some or all of the excess deferrals to this Plan, then the excess allocated to this Plan (and the earnings thereon) shall be distributed to the Participant no later than the following April 15. Excess deferrals that are distributed back to the Participant are not considered to be Annual Additions.

 

13


Any returned excess deferrals will include income or loss for the calendar year of the excess deferral, as well as income or loss for the “gap period” between the end of that year and the date of distribution. The gain or loss allocable to the excess deferral amount for the preceding calendar year shall be determined by any reasonable method, provided that such method does not violate Section 401(a)(4) of the Code, is consistently applied, and is used for allocating income to Participants’ Accounts.

Any Matching Contributions attributable to returned Pre-Tax Contributions shall be forfeited. The amount of excess deferrals to be distributed shall be reduced by Excess Contributions previously distributed for the taxable year ending in the same Plan Year, as provided in Appendix B, Section 3.

3.6 Rollover Contributions . An Eligible Employee may contribute to the Plan any amount distributed from the Participant’s individual retirement account, individual retirement annuity, or qualified plan which qualifies under either of Code Sections 402(c) or 408(d)(3)(A)(ii), which is transferred within the required time, and which meets all other requirements of law for a rollover to the Plan. The Employer, the Committee, and the Trustee shall rely upon the Participant’s written certification that the transfer is a permitted rollover meeting all the above requirements. Such a contribution shall be held in a separate Rollover Contribution Account for the Eligible Employee. If the Committee should learn that the rollover did not meet all the aforesaid requirements, the value of the Participant’s Rollover Contribution Account as of the preceding Valuation Date (or the date of the rollover, if later) shall be returned to him. The Plan does not accept Rollover Contributions that represent hardship distributions described in Code §401(k)(2)(B)(i)(IV).

Effective January 1, 2002, the Plan accepts, in addition to the rollovers described in the previous paragraphs, the following distributions: distributions from a qualified plan described in Code Sections 403(a) and 403(b); distributions from an eligible plan under Code Section 457(b) that is maintained by a state, political subdivision of a state, or any agency or instrumentality of a state or political subdivision of a state; and the portion of a distribution from an individual retirement account or annuity described in Code Section 408(a) or (b) that is eligible to be rolled over and would otherwise be includible in gross income.

Effective September 1, 2005, the Plan shall accept Rollover Contributions that have previously been subject to federal income taxation. Such Rollover Contributions shall be held in a separate Account (After-Tax Rollover Account).

3.7 Catch-up Contributions . Effective January 1, 2002, all employees who are eligible to make Pre-Tax Contributions under this Plan and who have attained page 50 before the close of the Plan Year shall be eligible to make Catch-up Contributions in accordance with, and subject to the limitations of, Code Section 414(v). Such Catch-up Contributions shall not be taken into account for purposes of Sections 3.4 and 6.3 of the Plan (implementing the required limitations of Code Sections 402(g) and 415). Catch-up Contributions shall be taken into account for purposes of Section 4.1 (regarding Matching Contributions). For all other purposes of the Plan, Catch-up Contributions shall be treated in the same manner as Employee Deferrals. The Plan shall not be treated as failing to satisfy the provisions of the Plan implementing the requirements of Code Sections 401(k)(3), 401(k)(11), 401(k)(12), 401(b), or 416, as applicable, by reason of making of such Catch-up Contributions.

 

14


ARTICLE IV

EMPLOYER CONTRIBUTIONS

4.1 Matching Contributions . The Compensation Committee of the Board of Directors shall determine the amount of a Matching Contribution, if any, to be contributed which shall not exceed 20% of each Participant’s Plan Compensation contributed as Pre-Tax Contributions for the Plan Year. The Matching Contribution shall be allocated as a percentage of each Participant’s Pre-Tax Contributions for the applicable Plan Year, provided such Participant has satisfied the Matching Contribution eligibility requirements of Section 2.2(a).

4.2 Employer Discretionary Contributions . The Compensation Committee of the Board of Directors shall determine the amount of Employer Discretionary Contributions, if any, to be contributed for the Plan Year. The Employer Discretionary Contribution, if any, shall be allocated as of each Annual Valuation Date to the Employer Contribution Accounts of all Active Participants in the proportion that each such Active Participant’s Plan Compensation bears to the Plan Compensation for all Active Participants for such year, provided such Participant has satisfied the Employer Discretionary Contribution eligibility requirements of Section 2.2(b). The Company may contribute all or part of the entire amount due on behalf of one or more Participating Employers and charge the amount thereof to the Participating Employers responsible therefor. With respect to a Participant who terminated employment due to Disability but is eligible to receive Employer Discretionary Contributions, Plan Compensation shall include the earnings he or she would have received or the entire Plan Year in which the Disability occurred if he or she had been paid for such year at the rate at which he or she was being paid immediately prior to such Disability. Contributions made with respect to such Compensation shall be nonforfeitable and continued for all Participants whose employment terminates due to Disability.

In no event shall the contribution under this Section 4.2, when added to the other contributions under the Plan, exceed the maximum amount that may be claimed as a deduction by the Company for federal income tax purposes under Code Section 404(a)(3).

4.3 Top-Heavy Contributions . As of the end of any Plan Year in which the Plan is Top-Heavy, the Employer shall contribute to the Employer Contribution Account of each Participant who is a Non-Key Employee the amount required under Article XIII.

4.4 Delivery of Contributions . Employer Contributions, if any, shall be delivered in one or more installments to the Trustee no later than the due date (including extensions) of the Participating Employer’s federal income tax return for its fiscal year ending with or during the Plan Year for which the contribution is made. Employer Contributions may be paid in cash, Company Stock, or other property as the Employer may from time to time determine.

4.5 Adjustments if Pre-Tax Contribution Contributions Adjusted . If under Section 3.5 or Section 3 of Appendix B a Participant’s Pre-Tax Contribution Contributions are returned to him, the amount of the Matching Contributions shall be reduced accordingly.

 

15


ARTICLE V

VESTING

5.1 Vesting Schedule . The following vesting schedule applies to Matching Contributions and Employer Discretionary Contributions held in the Employer Contribution Account and all amounts held in the Legacy ESOP Account (amounts in all other Accounts, including the Dividend Account, shall be 100% vested at all times):

 

Years of Service

 

Percentage

Less than 2

2

3

4

5

6

 

0%

20%

40%

60%

80%

100%

Notwithstanding the above, Employer Contributions and amounts held in the Legacy ESOP Account shall become 100% vested if a Participant terminates on or after his Normal Retirement Date or due to Disability or death. Legacy ESOP Accounts shall also be 100% vested upon a Change of Control.

5.2 Forfeitures. A Participant shall forfeit the nonvested portion of his Employer Contribution Account upon the earlier of 5 consecutive Breaks in Service or the distribution of the vested portion of his Accounts. If the value of a Participant’s vested percentage is zero, the Participant shall be deemed to have received a distribution as of the date of termination (and therefore shall incur a forfeiture).

Forfeitures of Employer Contributions shall be used: first, to reinstate previously forfeited Account balances of former Participants, if any, who are reemployed after a Break in Service (in accordance with Section 5.4); second, to make up contributions for any Eligible Employees erroneously omitted from the Plan (pursuant to Section 2.6), third, to offset Employer Contributions; fourth, to offset administrative costs; and finally, allocated to Participants in the same manner as Employer Contributions. Prior to September 1, 2005, forfeitures of assets attributable to the Legacy ESOP during such period shall be used: first to reinstate the previously forfeited Account balances of former Participants, if any, who are reemployed after Break in Service (in accordance with Section 5.4); second, to make contributions to Accounts of Participants erroneously omitted from the Plan (in accordance with Section 2.6) and to correct any other errors or omissions in the administration and operation of the Plan that would otherwise require additional contributions by the employer; and third, allocated among the Accounts of (i) Active Participants and (ii) Participants who terminated on or after their Normal Retirement Date prior to September 1, 2005, in the same proportion that each such Participant’s Plan Compensation for the year bears to the total Plan Compensation of all such Participants for the year.

 

16


5.3 Reemployment Before Break in Service . If an Employee has a termination of employment with an Employer and is reemployed before a One-Year Break in Service occurs, he will be treated for vesting purposes as if the termination had not occurred.

5.4 Reemployment After Break in Service . The following special rules apply if an Employee has a One-Year Break in Service and is later reemployed by an Employer.

 

  (a) His Years of Service prior to the Break in Service shall be taken into account for purposes of determining the vested portion of such Participant’s Employer Contribution Account funded after reemployment (i) if any portion of the Participant’s Employer Contribution Account is vested at the time of the Break in Service, or (ii) if he incurs fewer than five consecutive one-year Breaks in Service.

 

  (b) His Years of Service which accrue after the Break in Service shall be taken into account for purposes of determining the vested portion of such Participant’s Employer Contribution Account funded prior to the Break in Service, provided such Participant is reemployed by the Employer before he incurs five (5) consecutive one-year Breaks in Service.

 

  (c) If a Participant has a termination of employment with Employer and receives a distribution of the balance of his Employer Contribution Account, he will be credited with the full value of his forfeited account balance, determined as of the date of the distribution, provided the Participant repays the amount of the distribution before the earlier of (1) five (5) years after the first day on which an Employee is subsequently reemployed by the Employer, or (2) the close of the first period of five (5) consecutive Breaks in Service. Any Participant who terminates employment with zero vesting shall be credited with the full value of his Employer Contribution Account determined as of the date of the deemed distribution if the Participant is reemployed before he incurs five (5) consecutive One-Year Breaks in Service.

 

  (d) If any credit is required under this Paragraph (c), the credit shall be made at the close of the Plan Year in which occurs the later of the reemployment or the repayment. The credit shall be satisfied from Forfeitures or from Employer Discretionary Contributions.

 

17


ARTICLE VI

ALLOCATIONS

6.1 Allocation of Contributions . Contributions to the Plan shall be allocated in the following manner:

 

  (a) Pre-Tax Contribution and Catch-up Contributions shall be allocated to the Pre-Tax Contribution and Catch-up Contribution Accounts of each Participant in accordance with the provisions of Article III.

 

  (b) Matching and Employer Discretionary Contributions shall be allocated to the Employer Contribution Account of each Participant in accordance with the provisions of Article IV.

 

  (c) Qualified Matching Contributions and Qualified Nonelective Contributions shall be allocated to the Pre-Tax Contribution Account of each Participant in accordance with the provisions of Appendix B, Section 6.

 

  (d) All contributions made to the Plan according to the provisions of Articles III and IV and Appendix B shall be contributed to the non-ESOP portion of the Plan. Such contributions that are invested in the Employer Securities Fund at a Participant’s election or as prescribed in the Plan shall be transferred from the non-ESOP portion of the Plan to the ESOP as soon as administratively feasible.

6.2 Definitions .

 

  (a) The term Annual Addition shall mean, for any Limitation Year, the sum of Matching Contributions, Pre-Tax Contribution Contributions, Employer Discretionary Contributions, Qualified Matching Contributions, and Qualified Non-Elective Contributions.

 

  (b) The term Defined Benefit Plan Fraction shall mean, for any year, a fraction (a) the numerator of which is the projected annual benefit of the Participant under any defined benefit plan maintained by the Employer (determined as of the close of the Plan Year), and (b) the denominator of which is the lesser of (i) the product of 1.25 multiplied by the maximum dollar limitation in effect under Code Section 415(b)(1)(A) for such year, or (ii) the product of 1.4 multiplied by the amount which may be taken into account under Code Section 415(b)(1)(B) for such year.

 

  (c) The term Defined Contribution Plan Fraction shall mean, for any year, a fraction (a) the numerator of which is the sum of the Annual Additions to the Participant’s Accounts as of the close of the Plan Year, and (b) the denominator of which is the sum of the lesser of the following amounts determined for such year and each prior year of service with a Employer: (i) the product of 1.25 multiplied by the dollar limitation in effect under Code Section 415(c)(1)(A) for such year (determined without regard to

 

18


       Code Section 415(c)(6)), or (ii) the product of 1.4 multiplied by the amount which may be taken into account under Code Section 415(c)(1)(B) for such year.

 

  (d) The term Employer includes the group of Employers, if any, which constitute a controlled group of corporations, trades or businesses under common control (within the meaning of Code Sections 1563(a) or 414(b) as modified by 415(h) and 414(c)), or an affiliated service group (within the meaning of Code Sections 414(m) and 318). All such Employers shall be treated as a single Employer for purposes of applying the Code Section 415 limitations.

 

  (e) The term Limitation Year shall mean the Plan Year.

6.3 Annual Additions . Except to the extent permitted under Section 3.7 and Code Section 414(v), if applicable, the Annual Addition limit in this Section 6.3 shall be the lesser of (a) $40,000, as adjusted for increases in the cost of living under Code Section 415(d), or (b) 100% of the Participant’s Limitation Compensation for such Limitation Year. The limit referred to in (b) shall not apply to any contribution for medical benefits after separation from service (within the meaning of Code Section 401(h) or 419(A)(f)(2)) that is otherwise treated as an Annual Addition. Makeup contributions for Returning Veterans will be subject to this limitation with respect to the year in which the contributions relate but not in the year in which the contributions were made.

6.4 Limitation for Other Defined Contribution Plans . In the event that the Annual Addition which would otherwise be made to an Employee’s accounts under all defined contribution plans maintained by the Employer for any Limitation Year exceeds the limitations set forth in this Article VI, the excess Annual Addition shall be attributed first to the Plan, and the Employer shall treat such excess as follows:

 

  (a) First, the Pre-Tax Contribution Contributions in excess of the deferrals matched with Matching Contributions shall be returned to the Employee to the extent necessary.

 

  (b) Second, the portion of the excess consisting of Matching Contributions shall be allocated and reallocated to the Pre-Tax Contributions of other Active Participants in accordance with Section 4.1 to the extent such allocations would not cause Annual Additions to each Active Participant’s Accounts to exceed the limitations of this Section 6.4

 

  (c) Third, the portion of the excess consisting of Employer Discretionary Contributions shall be allocated and reallocated to the Employer Contribution Accounts of other Active Participants in accordance with Section 4.2 to the extent such allocations would not cause Annual Additions to each Active Participant’s Accounts to exceed the limitation of this Section 6.4.

 

  (d) If treated in accordance with subparagraphs (a) through (c) above, the excess amounts shall not be deemed Annual Additions in that limitation

 

19


       year if the excess amounts are a result of the allocation of forfeitures, a reasonable error in estimating a Participant’s annual Plan Compensation, a reasonable error in determining the amount of elective deferrals (within the meaning of Section 402(g)(3)) that may be made with respect to any individual under the limits of Section 415 or under other limited facts and circumstances that the Commissioner finds justify the availability of the rules set forth in this subparagraph.

 

  (e) To the extent excess Annual Additions exist after the distributions described in subparagraphs (a) through (c), such excess amounts shall be allocated to a Section 415 Suspense Account. All amounts in the Section 415 Suspense Account must be used to reduce Matching Contributions, contributions required on account of a Top-Heavy Plan Year, or Employer Discretionary Contributions in succeeding Limitation Years. In the event of termination of the Plan, the balance of the Section 415 Suspense Account shall revert to the Company to the extent it may not then be allocated to any Participants’ Accounts.

 

20


ARTICLE VII

INVESTMENTS

7.1 Trust Fund . All contributions, and the earnings on such amounts, shall be delivered to the Trustee and held in trust and pursuant to the terms of the Plan, and in particular the terms of this Article VII and Article XV.

7.2 Separate Accounts . Separate Accounts shall be maintained by the Trustee or a recordkeeping agent appointed by the Plan Administrator for each Participant.

7.3 Valuation . The fair market value of the assets comprising the Trust shall be determined as of each Valuation Date, in accordance with generally accepted valuation methods and accounting practices. As of each Valuation Date, the value of each Account shall be adjusted to reflect the effect on each sub-account of any change in the value of each Investment Fund since the preceding Valuation Date, as well as the effect of any deposits, withdrawals, distributions, other transactions and charges occurring since the last Valuation Date. The Committee shall provide to each Participant, Beneficiary and Alternate Payee as of the end of each calendar quarter a statement of the value of each Account in which such person has an interest.

7.4 Available Investments.

 

  (a) The Committee shall determine the investments to be offered under the Plan and may, from time to time, change the investments offered hereunder (“Investment Funds”). Participants may invest funds held in each of their Accounts in any of the Investment Funds offered under the Plan. There shall be at least three Investment Funds available to Participants, in addition to the Employer Securities Fund.

 

  (b) Notwithstanding the above, Participants may not invest any portion of their Accounts in an investment that would result in unrelated business income tax or a prohibited transaction. Specifically, debt-financed income, margin accounts and self-dealing transactions are not permitted.

 

  (c) As of each Valuation Date, the Trustee shall perform a valuation of each investment in order to determine the value of each investment and to reconcile the Investment Funds from the prior Valuation Date. Such valuation shall recognize any appreciation or depreciation in the fair market value of all securities or other property held by each respective investment, any cash and accrued earnings and shall take into account any accrued expenses and proper charges against the investment as of such Valuation Date.

7.5 Employer Securities Fund . The Trustee shall maintain an Employer Securities Fund in accordance with Section 8.1. The purpose of the fund shall be to permit Participants to acquire an equity interest in the business of the Company through ownership of its common stock.

 

21


The Trustee may acquire Employer Securities from shareholders of the Company or directly from the Company. Neither the Trustee, the Employer, nor the Plan Administrator shall have any responsibility or duty to anticipate market condition changes in the value of Employer Securities in order to maximize return or minimize loss with respect to any acquisition or sale of such securities. The expenses directly related to any purchase or sale of Employer Securities will be paid by the Participant who requests such purchase or sale.

In accordance with rules established by the Plan Administrator or Trustee, a Participant may convert a designated portion of his or her investment in the Employer Securities Fund to one or more of the other Investment Funds made available by the Committee pursuant to Section 7.4(a). Such conversions shall be allowed each business day, provided that any change is received by the Committee within such time period preceding the effective date or time as shall be prescribed by the Committee.

7.6 Investment of Contributions.

 

  (a) A Participant may direct that Contributions to his Accounts be allocated to one or more of the Investment Funds then available by providing a written request to the Committee, by providing appropriate instructions via the Internet, via telephonic direction, or via such other media as the Committee may prescribe. The total of all such allocations shall equal one hundred percent of the Participant’s interest in his Accounts. The Committee will provide, upon Participant’s request, a written confirmation of any investment made pursuant to his investment instructions.

 

  (b) Each Participant must consent to the allocation of his contributions among the available investments. Such direction shall continue in effect until the Participant provides a different allocation. Changes in the investment direction of future contributions may be made daily, provided any change is received by the Committee within such time period preceding the effective date as shall be prescribed by the Committee. In the event an acceptable form is not received by the Committee for all or any portion of a Participant’s Accounts, or if adequate instructions are not provided, the current investment direction shall continue in effect until adequate instructions are received.

 

  (c) If no investment direction exists, the Participant’s affected interest shall automatically be invested in the default Investment Fund(s) prescribed by the Committee.

7.7 Transfer of Amounts Among Investments

 

  (a) A Participant may elect to transfer amounts within Accounts from one investment to another in increments of one percent (1%), on a daily basis, provided any change is received by the Committee within such time period preceding the effective date or time as shall be prescribed by the Committee. Any such change shall be made in writing on a form acceptable to the Committee, via the Internet, via telephonic direction, or

 

22


       via such other media as the Committee may prescribe. Such election shall be effective as soon as administratively feasible. Percent transfers will be converted into fund shares, traded based on the previous night’s price, and processed based on the current night’s price.

 

  (b) The timing and frequency of transfers among investment options may be further restricted if such restrictions are required by the institution handling or providing the investment.

7.8 Liability for Investment Decisions . This Plan is intended to constitute a plan described in Section 404(c) of ERISA, and Title 29 of the Code of Federal Regulations Section 2550.404c-1. Fiduciaries of the Plan may be relieved of liability for any losses that are the direct and necessary result of investment instructions given by each Participant or Beneficiary. Neither the Employer, the Trustee nor the Committee shall be responsible for any loss that may result from a Participant’s exercise of control over the investment of his Accounts.

Each Participant shall have exclusive responsibility for and control over the investment of amounts allocated to his Accounts. Neither the Employers, the Trustee nor the Committee shall have any duty, responsibility or right to question a Participant’s investment directions or to advise a Participant with respect to the investment of his accounts.

The Committee will be obligated to follow the Participant’s investment directions except when the instructions:

 

  (a) are not in accordance with this Plan document and instruments governing this Plan insofar as such documents and instruments are consistent with the provisions of Title I of ERISA;

 

  (b) would result in a prohibited transaction described in ERISA Section 406 or Code Section 4975 that is not otherwise exempted by statute or regulation;

 

  (c) would generate income that would be taxable to this Plan;

 

  (d) would cause a fiduciary to maintain the indicia of ownership of any assets of the Plan outside the jurisdiction of the district courts of the United States other than as permitted by Section 404(b) of ERISA and related regulations;

 

  (e) would jeopardize the Plan’s tax qualified status under the Code; or

 

  (f) could result in a loss in excess of the Account balance.

7.9 Accounting Procedures . The Committee shall establish such equitable accounting procedures as may be required to make (a) allocations, (b) valuations, and (c) adjustments to Participants’ accounts in accordance with the provisions of the Plan. The Plan Administrator may modify its accounting procedures, from time to time, for the purpose of achieving equitable and nondiscriminatory allocations.

 

23


ARTICLE VIII

EMPLOYER SECURITIES FUND

8.1 Status of Employer Securities Fund. “Employer Securities Fund” means the investment fund or account of the Plan maintained hereunder, the assets of which are invested primarily or solely in Employer Securities. “Employer Securities” means common stock issued by the Employer, which securities are qualifying employer securities within the meaning of Code Section 409(l). Amounts allocated to the Employer Securities Fund from time to time, including all Employer Securities held in the Plan as of June 30, 2005, shall be deemed to constitute a plan that is an employee stock ownership plan (“ESOP”) within the meaning of Code Section 4975(e)(7), the assets of which are invested primarily or solely in Employer Securities. Amounts transferred from the Legacy ESOP that were invested in Employer Securities while held by the Legacy ESOP shall also be held in the Employer Securities Fund. Participants shall at all times have the right to diversify shares in the Employer Securities Fund that are allocated to their accounts, by directing that such shares be invested in other Investment Funds under the Plan (the number of other Investment Funds shall be no less than three).

8.2 Maintenance of Employer Securities Fund. Amounts allocated to the Employer Securities Fund shall be invested and reinvested in Employer Securities. The acquisition and disposition of such shares shall be made by the Trustee (or its designee) in accordance with the provisions of the Trust.

8.3 Dividends . Effective for Dividend record dates occurring on or after June 30, 2005, the Committee shall cause to be distributed in accordance with this Section 8.3 any Dividends subject to the following special rules:

 

  (a) Within a reasonable period before the first day of each calendar quarter (January 1, April 1, June 1 and October 1), each Participant shall be entitled to direct the Committee to:

 

  (i) distribute any Dividend payable hereunder, or

 

  (ii) reinvest the amount of any such Dividend in the Employer Securities Fund.

Any such election shall be made in the manner designated by the Committee. Such elections shall be irrevocable two days prior to the last day of the calendar quarter that immediately precedes the calendar quarter with respect to which the direction relates (or such other period as the Committee may designate). The Committee, in its discretion, may permit additional directions during a Plan Year, to the extent necessary to comply with Code Section 404(k). Notwithstanding the above, elections with respect to Dividend record dates that occur on or after June 30, 2005, and on or before September 30, 2005, must be made on or before October 31, 2005, and shall be irrevocable as of such date.

 

24


  (b) If a Participant fails to make an election in accordance with Section 8.3(a), he or she shall be deemed to have directed the reinvestment of any Dividend in the Employer Securities Fund.

 

  (c) Dividends shall be:

 

  (i) directly distributed to applicable Participants as of each Dividend payment date, or

 

  (ii) distributed from the Plan no less frequently than annually, not later than 90 days after the close of the Plan Year in which each Dividend payment date occurs, in the discretion of the Committee.

 

  (d) If Dividends are held in the Trust pending distribution or reinvestment hereunder, the Committee shall direct the Trustee to invest such amounts in a manner intended to preserve principal.

8.4 Pass-Through of Voting Rights . With respect to all corporate matters, Employer Securities allocated to the Accounts of Participants shall be voted in accordance with the directions of each such Participant. As soon as administratively feasible before each annual or special shareholders meeting of the Employer, the Trustee, the Plan Administrator or a designee shall furnish to each Participant a copy of any proxy solicitation material furnished to shareholders of the Employer, together with a form requesting confidential instructions on how Employer Securities allocated to such Participant’s Account are to be voted. Upon timely receipt of such instructions, the Trustee, the Plan Administrator or such designee shall vote the securities as instructed. The instructions received from Participants shall be held in strict confidence and shall not be divulged or released to any person, including officers or Employees of the Employer.

Neither the Employer, the Trustee nor the Plan Administrator shall make recommendations to Participants on whether to vote or how to vote. Each Participant in the Plan (or, in the event of the Participant’s death, the Participant’s Beneficiary) is, for purposes of voting the Employer Securities allocated to his Employer Securities Sub-account, hereby designated a “named fiduciary” within the meaning of Section 403(a)(1) of ERISA.

Each Participant, as a named fiduciary, shall also be entitled to separately direct the vote of a portion of the number of votes with respect to which voting direction is not timely received from the Participants (“Undirected ESOP Votes”). Such direction with respect to each Participant who timely elects to direct the vote of Undirected ESOP Votes as a named fiduciary shall be with respect to a number of Undirected ESOP Votes equal to the total number of Undirected ESOP Votes multiplied by a fraction, the numerator of which is the total number of votes attributable to shares of Employer Securities allocated to the Participant and the denominator of which is the total number of votes attributable to the Employer Securities of all Participants who timely elect to vote Undirected ESOP Votes as a named fiduciary.

8.5 Tender Offers . The Plan Administrator, the Trustee or an unrelated third-party recordkeeper shall notify each Participant of a tender or other exchange offer and utilize its best efforts to distribute to Participants in a timely manner all information distributed to other shareholders of the Employer in connection with any such offer. Each Participant shall have the right to instruct the Trustee, the Plan Administrator or the recordkeeper, in writing, as to the

 

25


manner in which to respond to any tender or exchange offer with respect to Employer Securities allocated to his or her accounts. Such instructions shall be held in strict confidence and shall not be divulged or released to any person, including any officer or director of the Employer except as may be required to implement the provisions of this Section 8.5; provided, however, that the Trustee, the Plan Administrator or the recordkeeper shall advise, upon request, the total number of shares not subject to instructions to exchange or tender.

If the Trustee shall not receive timely instruction from a Participant (or Beneficiary) as to the manner in which to respond to such a tender or exchange offer, the Trustee shall tender or exchange any shares of Company Stock with respect to which such Participant has the right of direction in accordance with the same procedures applicable to Undirected ESOP Votes in Section 8.4.

Each Participant in the Plan (or, in the event of the Participant’s death, the Participant’s Beneficiary) is hereby designated as a “named fiduciary” within the meaning of Section 403(a)(1) of ERISA, for purposes of responding to any tender or exchange offer with respect to Employer Securities allocated to his Employer Contribution Account and Employer Securities voted in accordance with the previous paragraph.

8.6 Manner of Distribution . Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan to the contrary, Participants shall have the right to have amounts in the Employer Securities Fund distributed in the form of Employer Securities, although cash will be distributed in lieu of fractional shares. Notwithstanding any provision in the Plan to the contrary, distributions of balances in the Employer Securities Fund shall comply with Code Section 409(o).

8.7 ESOP Trustee . The Trustee of the Plan shall also be the Trustee of the ESOP portion of the Plan.

8.8 Right of First Refusal . During any period when Employer Securities are not publicly traded on an established market, a Participant (or other recipient of a distribution of Employer Securities) shall not sell Employer Securities without first offering such securities to the Trust (and then to the Employer) at a price equal to the greater of (a) the fair market value of Employer Securities, or (b) the purchase price (or other terms of payment) offered by a bona fide third-party purchaser.

The Participant or other distributee shall notify the Plan Administrator, in writing, of any bona fide third-party offer to purchase and the terms of such offer. The Participant (or distributee) shall be free to sell to such third-party if the Trustee (or the Employer) fails to notify the Participant or distributee, in writing, of its intention to purchase all or any portion of the Employer Securities within thirty days after the Plan Administrator receives written notification of the offer.

Neither the Employer nor the Trustee shall be required to exercise the right of first refusal provided for in this Section 8.8.

8.9 Put . If Employer Securities are not readily tradable on an established market (within the meaning of Code Section 409(h)) at the time of any distribution from the Plan, a Participant (or other recipient of a distribution of Employer Securities) shall be entitled to put all or any portion of such stock to the Employer (or to the Trustee if the Trustee elects to assume the

 

26


obligations of the Employer) by notifying the Employer (or Trustee), in writing. The following special rules shall apply to the exercise of a put pursuant to this Section 8.9:

 

  (a) The put may be exercised by the Participant or Beneficiary:

 

  (i) during the sixty-day period following the date on which the Employer Securities are initially distributed from the Plan, or

 

  (ii) in the Plan Year immediately following the Plan Year in which the initial distribution occurs during the sixty-day period that commences on the date following the Participant’s (or other distributee’s) receipt of a statement of the value of each Account in accordance with Section 7.3, provided the put was not exercised during the sixty-day period described in (i).

 

  (b) The consideration paid on the exercise of the put shall equal the fair market value of the Employer Securities determined as of the Valuation Date that immediately precedes or coincides with the date on which the put is exercised.

 

  (c) If a Participant or Beneficiary fails to exercise the put during the period described in Paragraph (a) by notifying the Plan Administrator, in writing, then neither the Trustee nor the Employer shall have any obligation to purchase Employer Securities distributed to such Participant or other recipient.

 

  (d) The consideration paid by the Employer on the exercise of a put may consist of an installment note bearing a reasonable rate of interest and a term not to exceed five years, provided such obligation is adequately secured and satisfies the additional requirements of Code Section 409(h).

8.10 Certain Transactions Involving Company Stock .

 

  (a) No portion of the Trust attributable to (or allocable in lieu of) Company Stock acquired by the Plan in a sale to which Code Section 1042 applies may accrue or be allocated directly or indirectly under any plan maintained by the Employer meeting the requirements of Code Section 401(a):

 

  (i) during the “Nonallocation Period”, for the benefit of

 

  (A) any taxpayer who makes an election under Code Section 1042(a) with respect to Company Stock,

 

  (B) any individual who is related to the taxpayer (within the meaning of Code Section 267(b)), or

 

27


  (ii) for the benefit of any other person who owns (after application of Code Section 318(a) applied without regard to the employee trust exception in Code Section 318(a)(2)(B)(i)) more than 25 percent of

 

  (A) any class of outstanding stock of the Employer or Affiliate that issued such Company Stock, or

 

  (B) the total value of any class of outstanding stock of the Employer or Affiliate.

 

  (b) Except, however, subparagraph (a) (1) (ii) above shall not apply to lineal descendants of the taxpayer, provided that the aggregate amount allocated to the benefit of all such lineal descendants during the “Nonallocation Period” does not exceed more than five (5) percent of the Company Stock (or amounts allocated in lieu thereof) held by the Plan which are attributable to a sale to the Plan by any person related to such descendants (within the meaning of Code Section 267 (c) (4)) in a transaction to which Code Section 1042 is applied.

 

  (c) A person shall be treated as failing to meet the stock ownership limitation under paragraph (a) (2) above if such person fails such limitation:

 

  (i) at any time during the one (1) year period ending on the date of sale of Company Stock to the Plan, or

 

  (ii) on the date as of which Company Stock is allocated to Participants in the Plan.

 

  (d) For purposes of this Section, “Nonallocation Period” means the period beginning on the date of the sale of the Company Stock and ending on the later of:

 

  (i) the date which is ten (10) years after the date of sale, or

 

  (ii) the date of the Plan allocation attributable to the final payment of the exempt loan incurred in connection with such sale.

 

28


ARTICLE IX

PAYMENT OF BENEFITS

9.1 Benefits Upon Termination of Employment . A Participant shall be eligible to receive a benefit funded by the Participant’s Accounts upon termination of employment for any reason.

9.2 Distribution Upon Severance From Employment (Removal of Same Desk Rule). Effective January 1, 2002, a Participant’s Accounts shall be distributed on account of the Participant’s severance from employment, regardless of when the severance from employment occurred. However, such a distribution shall be subject to the provisions of the Plan regarding distributions, other than provisions that require a separation from service before such amounts may be distributed.

9.3 Form of Distribution. Distribution will be made in cash or Employer Securities or both, provided that a Participant or Beneficiary can demand that his distribution of assets held in the Employer Securities Fund will be made only in the form of Employer Securities.

9.4 Form of Benefit . The normal form of benefit is a single lump sum benefit. The optional form of benefit is installment payments paid over a period certain in monthly, quarterly, semi-annual or annual installments. The period over which such payment is to be made shall not extend beyond the earlier of the Participant’s life expectancy (or the life expectancy of the Participant and his Designated Beneficiary). Section 9.10(b) explains the form of distribution to a Designated Beneficiary, as defined in Section 9.10(e).

Unless the Participant elects a longer distribution period in writing, distributions to a Participant or his Beneficiary attributable to Employer Securities shall be in a lump sum or in substantially equal monthly, quarterly, semiannual, or annual installments over a period not longer than five (5) years. In the case of a Participant with an account balance attributable to Employer Securities in excess of $500,000, the given (5) year period shall be extended one (1) additional year (but not more than five (5) additional years) for each $100,000 or fraction thereof by which such balance exceeds $500,000. The dollar limits shall be adjusted at the same time and in the same manner as provided in Code Section 415(d).

9.5 When Benefits are Paid or Commence .

 

  (a) Immediate Distribution . Effective March 28, 2005, if the total value of a Participant’s Accounts is $1,000 or less at any time after it becomes distributable upon termination of an employment the distribution shall be made as soon as administratively feasible in a single sum.

 

  (b) Participant’s Election . Effective March 28, 2005, if the total value of a Participant’s Accounts is greater than $1,000 at any time after it becomes distributable after termination of employment, the Participant must consent to a distribution. The distribution shall be made as soon as administratively feasible after a request has been made.

 

29


  (c) Minimum Required Distribution . A Participant’s benefit distribution shall commence no later than the Participant’s Required Beginning Date. The amount of each distribution (if not distributed in a single sum) shall be no less than the Minimum Required Distribution calculated in accordance with applicable IRS regulations. With respect to distributions made on or after January 1, 2003, Section 9.10 shall apply.

 

  (d) Alternate Payee . Payment to an Alternate Payee pursuant to a Qualified Domestic Relations Order (“QDRO”) as defined in Section 9.9 shall be made at such time as determined pursuant to the QDRO and in a form of benefit elected pursuant to Section 9.4 .

 

  (e) Death Benefit . If a Participant dies with a balance in his Accounts, the benefit of such Participant shall be distributed to the Participant’s Beneficiary in a form of benefit elected pursuant to Section 9.4 as soon as administratively practicable after the Participant’s death. If a Participant dies while benefit payments are being made in accordance with Section 9.4, the remaining installment shall be paid to the Participant’s Beneficiary determined under this Article. Distributions on or after January 1, 2003 that are made pursuant to this Section 9.5(e) shall comply with the terms of Section 9.10. Further, Designated Beneficiaries may elect on an individual basis whether the 5-year rule or life-expectancy rule in Sections 9.10(b)(ii) and 9.10(d)(ii)(A) applies to distributions after the death of a Participant. The election must be made no later than the earlier of September 30 of the calendar year in which distributions would be required to begin pursuant to Section 9.10(b)(ii) or by September 30 of the calendar year which contains the fifth anniversary of the Participant’s (or, if applicable, surviving spouse’s) death. If the designated Beneficiary does not make an election under this paragraph, the Participant’s entire interest will be distributed by December 31 of the calendar year containing the fifth anniversary of the Participant’s death.

Effective January 1, 2002, a Participant’s Rollover Contribution Account shall not be considered in determining the value of a Participant’s Accounts for purposes of the mandatory immediate lump sum distribution rule and Participant election provisions in Section 9.4(b).

If a Participant or Beneficiary fails to furnish information reasonably requested by the Committee that is necessary to determine whether such Participant or Beneficiary has satisfied all requirements for payment of benefits, the Committee shall delay payment of benefits until the requested information is furnished and shall make reasonable efforts to obtain such information.

Unless the Participant elects otherwise, no provision of the Plan shall require payment of a Participant’s benefits under the Plan to commence as of a date that is more than 60 days after the close of the later of (a) the Plan Year in which the Participant attains age 65 or (b) the Plan Year in which said Participant terminates employment with the Employer.

9.6 Direct Rollover Rules . Notwithstanding any provision of the Plan to the contrary that would otherwise limit a Distributee’s election under this Article, the Distributee

 

30


may elect, at the time and in the manner prescribed by the Committee, to have any portion of an Eligible Rollover Distribution paid directly to an Eligible Retirement Plan specified by the Distributee in a Direct Rollover. Definitions are as follows:

 

  (a) The term Eligible Rollover Distribution means any distribution of all or any portion of the balance to the credit of the Distributee, except that an Eligible Rollover Distribution does not include: any distribution that is one of a series of substantially equal periodic payments (not less frequently than annually) made for the life (or life expectancy) of the Distributee or the joint lives (or joint life expectancies) of the Distributee and the Distributee’s designated beneficiary, or for a specified period of ten years or more; any distribution to the extent such distribution is required under Code Section 401(a)(9) of the Code; the portion of any distribution that is not includible in gross income (determined without regard to the exclusion for net unrealized appreciation with respect to employer securities); and distributions on account of a Financial Hardship, Section 10.2 herein.

Effective January 1, 2002, a portion of a distribution shall not fail to be an Eligible Rollover Distribution merely because the portion consists of after-tax employee contributions that are not includible in gross income. However, such portion may be transferred only to an individual retirement account or annuity described in Code Section 408(a) or (b), or to a qualified defined contribution plan described in Code Section 401(a) or 403(a) that agrees to separately account for amounts so transferred, including separately accounting for the portion of such distribution that is includible in gross income and the portion of such distribution that is not so includible.

 

  (b) An Eligible Retirement Plan includes an individual retirement account described in Code Section 408(a), an individual retirement annuity described in Code Section 408(b), an annuity plan described in Code Section 403(a), or a qualified trust described in Code Section 401(a), that accepts the Distributee’s Eligible Rollover Distribution. However, in the case of an Eligible Rollover Distribution to the surviving spouse, an eligible retirement plan is an individual retirement account or individual retirement annuity.

Effective January 1, 2002, an Eligible Retirement Plan shall include an annuity contract described in Code Section 403(b) and an eligible plan under Code Section 457(b) that is maintained by a state, political subdivision of a state, or any agency or instrumentality of a state or political subdivision of a state and which agrees to separately account for amounts transferred into such plan from this Plan. The definition of Eligible Retirement Plan shall also apply in the case of a distribution to a surviving spouse, or to a spouse or former spouse who is the Alternate Payee under a Qualified Domestic Relations Order, as defined in Code Section 414(p).

 

31


  (c) The term Distributee includes an employee or former employee. In addition, the employee’s or former employee’s surviving spouse and the employee’s or former employee’s spouse or former spouse who is the Alternate Payee under a qualified domestic relations order, as defined in Section 414(p) of the Code, are Distributees with regard to the interest of the spouse or former spouse.

 

  (d) The term Direct Rollover means a payment by the plan to the eligible retirement plan specified by the Distributee.

9.7 Notice . The notice required by Section 1.411(a)-11(c) of the Income Tax Regulations must be provided to a Participant no less than 30 days and no more than 90 days before the date of distribution. The notice explains a Participant’s right to defer receipt of the distribution if his benefit exceeds $1,000 ($5,000 prior to March 28, 2005). A Participant will also receive an explanation of his distribution options no less than 30 days and no more than 90 days before the date of distribution. The distribution may commence less than 30 days after the notice required under Section 1.411(a)-11(c) of the Income Tax Regulations is given, provided that:

 

  (a) the Committee clearly informs the Participant that the Participant has a right to a period of at least 30 days after receiving the notice to consider the decision of whether or not to elect a distribution, and

 

  (b) the Participant, after receiving the notice, affirmatively elects a distribution.

9.8 Nonalienation of Benefits . Except with respect to federal income tax withholding and federal tax levies, benefits payable under this Plan shall not be subject in any manner to anticipation, alienation, sale, transfer, assignment, pledge, encumbrance, charge, garnishment, execution or levy of any kind, either voluntary or involuntary, including any such liability which is for alimony or other payments for the support of a spouse or former spouse or for any other relative of the Employee, prior to actually being received by the person entitled to the benefit under the terms of the Plan; and any attempt to anticipate, alienate, sell, transfer, assign, pledge, encumber, charge or otherwise dispose of any right to benefits payable hereunder, shall be void. The Trust Fund shall not in any manner be liable for, or subject to, the debts, contracts, liabilities, engagements or torts of any person entitled to benefits hereunder.

Notwithstanding the above, the Committee shall direct the Trustee to comply with a qualified domestic relations order described in Section 9.9.

9.9 Qualified Domestic Relations Order . All rights and benefits, including election rights, provided to Participants pursuant to this Plan, are subject to the rights afforded to any “Alternate Payee” pursuant to a “qualified domestic relations order,” (“QDRO”) as those terms are defined below. An Alternate Payee shall generally have the same rights as a Participant, with respect to investment of Accounts and distributions from the Plan.

Payment to an “Alternate Payee” pursuant to a QDRO shall be made at such time as determined pursuant to the QDRO and even while the Participant is employed if the QDRO

 

32


requires or permits such distribution. The payment shall be based on the value of the Alternate Payee’s interest in the account as of the Valuation Date preceding the date the payment is made. If the Participant has a loan as an investment of his account, such Participant will continue to be responsible for the entire loan. The Plan Administrator is authorized to establish any additional rules necessary to determine the rights of Alternate Payees under QDROs.

Pursuant to the provisions of Section 414(p) of the Code, a “qualified domestic relations order” shall mean a judgment, decree or order (including approval of a property settlement agreement) made pursuant to a state domestic relations law (including a community property law) that relates to the provision of child support, alimony payments, or marital property rights to a spouse, former spouse, child or other dependent of a Participant (“Alternate Payee”) and which:

 

  (a) creates or recognizes the existence of an Alternate Payee’s right to, or assigns to an Alternate Payee the right to, receive all or a portion of the benefits payable to a Participant under this Plan; and

 

  (b) specifies (i) the name and last known mailing address (if any) of the Participant and each Alternate Payee covered by the order, (ii) the amount or percentage of the Participant’s benefits under the Plan to be paid to each such Alternate Payee, or the manner in which such amount or percentage is to be determined and, (iii) the number of payments or the period to which the order applies; and

 

  (c) does not require this Plan to:

 

  (i) provide any type or form of benefit, or any option, not otherwise provided hereunder;

 

  (ii) pay any benefits to any Alternate Payee prior to the earlier of:

 

  (A) the earliest date benefits are payable hereunder to a Participant, or

 

  (B) the later of the date the Participant attains age 50 or the earliest date on which the Participant could obtain a distribution under the Plan if the Participant terminated employment;

 

  (iii) pay any benefits which are not vested under the Plan;

 

  (iv) provide increased benefits; or

 

  (v) pay benefits to an Alternate Payee which are required to be paid to another Alternate Payee under a prior QDRO.

Upon receipt of any judgment, decree or order (including approval of a property settlement agreement) relating to the provision of payment by the Plan to an Alternate Payee pursuant to a state domestic relations law, the Committee shall promptly notify the affected

 

33


Participant and any person identified in the document as an Alternate Payee of the receipt of such judgment, decree order and shall notify the affected Participant and any such designated Alternate Payee of the Committee’s procedure for determining whether or not the judgment, decree or order is a QDRO.

The Committee shall establish procedures to determine the status of a judgment, decree or order as a QDRO and to administer Plan distributions in accordance with any such QDRO. Such procedures shall be in writing, shall include provisions specifying the notification requirements enumerated in the preceding paragraph, shall permit an Alternate Payee to designate a representative for receipt of communications from the Committee, and shall include such other provisions as the Committee shall determine, including such provisions required under Treasury Regulations.

In the event that the Committee is informed in writing of a claim by a person (a “Claimant”) that may result in the rendering of a qualified domestic relations order with respect to a Participant’s Accounts in the Plan, the Committee is authorized to suspend any payments from those Accounts until receipt of a judgment, decree or order setting forth the rights of Claimant as an Alternate Payee, or upon receipt of an order or written release by the Claimant evidencing that the Claimant has no further claim to the Participant’s interest in the Plan.

If the judgment, decree or order is determined to be a qualified domestic relations order within the 18-month period following the receipt by the Committee of the qualified domestic relations order, then payment of the amount shall be paid to the appropriate Alternate Payee at the time and in the form specified in such order. If such a determination is not made within the 18-month period, the amount shall be returned to the Participant’s Accounts under the Plan and shall be paid at the time and in the manner provided under the Plan as if no order, judgment or decree had been received by the Committee.

9.10 Minimum Distribution Requirements.

 

  (a) General Rules.

 

  (i) Effective Date . The provisions of this Section 9.10 will apply for purposes of determining required minimum distributions for calendar years beginning with the 2003 calendar year.

 

  (ii) Precedence . The requirements of this Section 9.10 will take precedence over any inconsistent provisions of the Plan.

 

  (iii) Requirements of Treasury Regulations Incorporated . All distributions required under this article will be determined and made in accordance with the Treasury regulations under Section 401(a)(9) of the Internal Revenue Code.

 

  (iv) TEFRA Section 242(b)(2) Elections . Notwithstanding the other provisions of this Section 9.10, distributions may be made under a designation made before January 1, 1984, in accordance with Section 242(b)(2) of the Tax Equity and Fiscal Responsibility Act

 

34


       (TEFRA) and the provisions of the Plan that relate to Section 242(b)(2) of TEFRA.

 

  (v) Definitions . The definitions for this Section 9.10 are at Section 9.10(e).

 

  (b) Time and Manner of Distribution.

 

  (i) Required Beginning Date . The Participant’s entire interest will be distributed, or begin to be distributed, to the Participant no later than the Participant’s Required Beginning Date.

 

  (ii) Death of Participant Before Distributions Begin . If the Participant dies before distributions begin, the Participant’s entire interest will be distributed, or begin to be distributed, no later than as follows:

 

  (A) If the Participant’s surviving spouse is the Participant’s sole designated Beneficiary, then distributions to the surviving spouse will begin by December 31 of the calendar year immediately following the calendar year in which the Participant died, or by December 31 of the calendar year in which the Participant would have attained age 70  1 / 2 , if later.

 

  (B) If the Participant’s surviving spouse is not the Participant’s sole Designated Beneficiary, then distributions to the Designated Beneficiary will begin by December 31 of the calendar year immediately following the calendar year in which the Participant died.

 

  (C) If there is no Designated Beneficiary as of September 30 of the year following the year of the Participant’s death, the Participant’s entire interest will be distributed by December 31 of the calendar year containing the fifth anniversary of the Participant’s death.

 

  (D) If the Participant’s surviving spouse is the Participant’s sole Designated Beneficiary and the surviving spouse dies after the Participant but before distributions to the surviving spouse begin, this Section 9.10(b)(ii), other than Section 9.10(b)(ii)(A), will apply as if the surviving spouse were the Participant.

For purposes of this Section 9.10(b)(ii) and Section 9.10(d), unless Section 9.10(b)(ii)(D) applies, distributions are considered to begin on the Participant’s Required Beginning Date. If Section 9.11(b)(ii)(D) applies, distributions are considered to begin on the date distributions are required to begin to the surviving spouse under Section 9.10(b)(ii)(A).

 

35


  (iii) Forms of Distribution . Unless the Participant’s interest is distributed in the form of a single sum on or before the Required Beginning Date, as of the first Distribution Calendar Year distributions will be made in accordance with Sections 9.10(c) and (d).

 

  (c) Required Minimum Distributions During Participant’s Lifetime.

 

  (i) Amount of Required Minimum Distribution For Each Distribution Calendar Year . During the Participant’s lifetime, the minimum amount that will be distributed for each Distribution Calendar Year is the lesser of:

 

  (A) the quotient obtained by dividing the Participant’s Account Balance by the distribution period in the Uniform Lifetime Table set forth in Section 1.401(a)(9)-9 of the Treasury Regulations, using the Participant’s age as of the Participant’s birthday in the Distribution Calendar Year; or

 

  (B) if the Participant’s sole Designated Beneficiary for the Distribution Calendar Year is the Participant’s spouse, the quotient obtained by dividing the Participant’s Account Balance by the number in the Joint and Last Survivor Table set forth in Section 1.401(a)(9)-9 of the Treasury Regulations, using the Participant’s and spouse’s attained ages as of the Participant’s and spouse’s birthdays in the Distribution Calendar Year.

 

  (ii) Lifetime Required Minimum Distributions Continue Through Year of Participant’s Death . Required minimum distributions will be determined under this Section 9.10(c) beginning with the first Distribution Calendar Year and up to and including the Distribution Calendar Year that includes the Participant’s date of death.

 

  (d) Required Minimum Distributions After Participant’s Death.

 

  (i) Death On or After Date Distributions Begin.

 

  (A) Participant Survived by Designated Beneficiary . If the Participant dies on or after the date distributions begin and there is a Designated Beneficiary, the minimum amount that will be distributed for each Distribution Calendar Year after the year of the Participant’s death is the quotient obtained by dividing the Participant’s Account Balance by the longer of the remaining Life Expectancy of the Participant or the remaining Life Expectancy of the Participant’s Designated Beneficiary, determined as follows:

The Participant’s remaining Life Expectancy is calculated using the age of the Participant in the year of death, reduced by one for each subsequent year.

 

36


If the Participant’s surviving spouse is the Participant’s sole Designated Beneficiary, the remaining Life Expectancy of the surviving spouse is calculated for each Distribution Calendar Year after the year of the Participant’s death using the surviving spouse’s age as of the spouse’s birthday in that year. For Distribution Calendar Years after the year of the surviving spouse’s death, the remaining Life Expectancy of the surviving spouse is calculated using the age of the surviving spouse as of the spouse’s birthday in the calendar year of the spouse’s death, reduced by one for each subsequent calendar year.

If the Participant’s surviving spouse is not the Participant’s sole Designated Beneficiary, the Designated Beneficiary’s remaining Life Expectancy is calculated using the age of the beneficiary in the year following the year of the Participant’s death, reduced by one for each subsequent year.

 

  (B) No Designated Beneficiary . If the Participant dies on or after the date distributions begin and there is no Designated Beneficiary as of September 30 of the year after the year of the Participant’s death, the minimum amount that will be distributed for each Distribution Calendar Year after the year of the Participant’s death is the quotient obtained by dividing the Participant’s Account Balance by the Participant’s remaining Life Expectancy calculated using the age of the Participant in the year of death, reduced by one for each subsequent year.

 

  (ii) Death Before Date Distributions Begin.

 

  (A) Participant Survived by Designated Beneficiary . If the Participant dies before the date distributions begin and there is a Designated Beneficiary, the minimum amount that will be distributed for each Distribution Calendar Year after the year of the Participant’s death is the quotient obtained by dividing the Participant’s Account Balance by the remaining Life Expectancy of the Participant’s Designated Beneficiary, determined as provided in Section 9.10(d)(i).

 

  (B) No Designated Beneficiary . If the Participant dies before the date distributions begin and there is no Designated

 

37


       Beneficiary as of September 30 of the year following the year of the Participant’s death, distribution of the Participant’s entire interest will be completed by December 31 of the calendar year containing the fifth anniversary of the Participant’s death.

 

  (C) Death of Surviving Spouse Before Distributions to Surviving Spouse Are Required to Begin . If the Participant dies before the date distributions begin, the Participant’s surviving spouse is the Participant’s sole Designated Beneficiary, and the surviving spouse dies before distributions are required to begin to the surviving spouse under Section 9.10(b)(ii)(A), this Section 9.10(d)(ii) will apply as if the surviving spouse were the Participant.

 

  (e) Definitions . The following definitions are applicable to this Section 9.10.

 

  (i) Designated Beneficiary . The individual who is designated as the Beneficiary under Section 1.5 of the Plan and is the Designated Beneficiary under Section 401(a)(9) of the Internal Revenue Code and Section 1.401(a)(9)-1, Q&A-4, of the Treasury regulations.

 

  (ii) Distribution Calendar Year . A calendar year for which a minimum distribution is required. For distributions beginning before the Participant’s death, the first Distribution Calendar Year is the calendar year immediately preceding the calendar year which contains the Participant’s Required Beginning Date. For distributions beginning after the Participant’s death, the first Distribution Calendar Year is the calendar year in which distributions are required to begin under Section 9.10(b)(ii). The required minimum distribution for the Participant’s first Distribution Calendar Year will be made on or before the Participant’s Required Beginning Date. The required minimum distribution for other Distribution Calendar Years, including the required minimum distribution for the Distribution Calendar Year in which the Participant’s Required Beginning Date occurs, will be made on or before December 31 of that Distribution Calendar Year.

 

  (iii) Life Expectancy . Life Expectancy as computed by use of the Single Life Table in Section 1.401(a)(9)-9 of the Treasury regulations.

 

  (iv) Participant’s Account Balance . The Account Balance as of the last valuation date in the calendar year immediately preceding the Distribution Calendar Year (valuation calendar year) increased by the amount of any contributions made and allocated or forfeitures

 

38


       allocated to the Account Balance as of dates in the valuation calendar year after the valuation date and decreased by distributions made in the valuation calendar year after the valuation date. The Account Balance for the valuation calendar year includes any amounts rolled over or transferred to the plan either in the valuation calendar year or in the Distribution Calendar Year if distributed or transferred in the valuation calendar year.

 

  (v) Required Beginning Date . The date specified in Section 1.46 of the Plan.

 

39


ARTICLE X

IN-SERVICE DISTRIBUTION AND LOANS

10.1 In-Service Distributions . With the exception of hardship distributions pursuant to Section 10.2, and loans pursuant to Section 10.3, in-service distributions are not permitted.

10.2 Financial Hardship . Prior to a Participant’s termination of employment he may apply to the Committee for a withdrawal of vested funds held in his Accounts on account of a Financial Hardship. However, the total of such withdrawals from a Participant’s Pre-Tax Contribution and Catch-up Contribution Accounts shall not exceed the total of his Pre-Tax Contribution and Catch-up Contributions, less earnings accrued prior to January 1, 1989 on a Participant’s Pre-Tax Contributions. The withdrawal shall be made only under the following conditions:

 

  (a) The withdrawal may be made only to meet one of the following needs:

 

  (i) Medical expenses described in Code Section 213(d), incurred by the Participant, the Participant’s spouse, or any dependent (as defined in Code Section 152) of the Participant;

 

  (ii) Purchase (excluding mortgage payments) of a principal residence for the Participant;

 

  (iii) Payment for all or a portion of the next twelve (12) months of post-secondary education for the Participant, his spouse, children, or dependents;

 

  (iv) To prevent the eviction of the Participant from his principal residence or foreclosure on the mortgage of the Participant’s principal residence; or

 

  (v) Any other need that the Commissioner of the IRS determines is a deemed immediate and heavy financial need and is authorized by the Committee.

 

  (b) The Participant provides to the Committee a letter containing the following:

 

  (i) A statement of the amount needed and the purpose for which it is needed;

 

  (ii) A representation that the expense will not be paid for by insurance or other source specific to the expense, that the Participant and his spouse (and the Participant’s minor child, if the expense is for the child’s benefit) have no assets he can liquidate to pay for the expense without creating a new hardship, and that ceasing Pre-Tax Contributions will not suffice to satisfy the needs;

 

40


  (iii) A representation that the Participant has not been able to borrow from commercial sources on reasonable commercial terms in an amount sufficient to satisfy the need; and

 

  (iv) A promise that the funds will be used only for the specified purpose.

 

  (c) The withdrawal cannot exceed the amount necessary to satisfy the need described at paragraph (a), plus any amounts necessary to pay federal or state income taxes or penalties reasonably anticipated to result from the distribution.

 

  (d) The Participant has obtained all distributions, other than hardship distributions, and all non-taxable loans currently available under all “plans” (as contemplated by U.S. Treasury Regulation Section 1.401(k)-1(d)(2)(iii)), maintained by the Employer.

 

  (e) Prior to 2002, a Participant’s Pre-Tax Contributions under this Plan were required to be suspended for at least twelve (12) months after receipt of the hardship distribution. A Participant who receives a distribution of Pre-Tax Contributions or Catch-up Contributions after December 31, 2001 on account of hardship shall be prohibited from making Pre-Tax Contributions and Catch-up Contributions for 6 months after receipt of the distribution. A Participant who receives a distribution of Pre-Tax Contributions or Catch-up Contributions in calendar year 2001 on account of hardship shall be prohibited from making Pre-Tax Contributions and Catch-up Contributions under this Plan for 6 months after receipt of the distribution or until January 1, 2002, if later.

 

  (f) The Participant’s limit on Pre-Tax Contribution Contributions in the year immediately following the year of the withdrawal shall be the limit under Section 3.4 for that year, less the amount of the Participant’s Pre-Tax Contribution Contributions made in the year of the hardship withdrawal. However, if the Plan provides for a hardship distribution upon satisfaction of the safe harbor (deemed) standards as set forth in Treasury Regulation Section 1.401(k)–1(d)(2)(iv) and Section 10.2(a)(i) through (iv) above, effective January 1, 2002, there shall be no reduction in the maximum amount of elective deferrals that a Participant may make pursuant to Section 402(g) of the Code solely because of a hardship distribution made by this Plan or any other plan of the Employer.

10.3 Loans to Participants . A Participant may make a loan from the Plan, subject to the following rules and limitations:

 

  (a) Loans shall be made available to all Participants who are current Employees on an equal basis in accordance with the written procedure established by the Committee and communicated to the Participants. Loans shall be available based solely upon completion of the application form and the Participant’s vested balances in his or her Accounts.

 

41


  (b) The principal amount of a loan to a Participant pursuant to this Section may not exceed the lesser of:

 

  (i) $50,000 (reduced by the Participant’s highest outstanding balance of Plan loan(s) during the twelve (12) month period ending on the day before the date on which the loan was made), or

 

  (ii) fifty percent (50%) of the Participant’s vested Accounts balance.

 

  (c) Each loan shall bear a reasonable rate of interest, as determined by the Trustee.

 

  (d) Principal and interest on loans shall be repaid over a term determined by the Participant, but such term shall not be less than 12 months or more than five years, unless the loan is used to acquire a principal residence of the Participant, in which case the maximum term shall not exceed ten years.

 

  (e) A loan made pursuant to this Article X shall be repaid in accordance with a schedule established by the Committee, which schedule shall call for payments of interest and amortized payments of principal over the term of the loan.

 

  (f) Each loan shall be evidenced by the Participant’s promissory note for the amount of the loan, including interest, payable to the order of the Trust, and each loan shall be secured by collateral. The collateral shall consist of the assignment of up to fifty percent (50%) of the Participant’s right, title and interest in the Participant’s vested Accounts in the Trust. The promissory note shall contain the terms of repayment and such other provisions as may be necessary or advisable.

The Committee may prescribe such additional rules and procedures as it may deem appropriate, including, without limitation, rules and procedures by which the making of loans to Participants or to any class of Participants may be terminated, suspended, or restricted, if and to the extent deemed by the Committee to be necessary or desirable in order to effect compliance with applicable laws and regulations, pursuant to a Participant Loan Program, which shall be established in writing and made a part of the Plan.

 

42


ARTICLE XI

ADMINISTRATION

11.1 Board of Directors . The Board of Directors shall have the following duties and responsibilities in connection with the administration of the Plan:

 

  (a) making decisions with respect to contributions to the Plan;

 

  (b) making decisions with respect to amending or terminating the Plan;

 

  (c) making decisions with respect to the selection, retention and removal of the Trustee and the members of the Committee;

 

  (d) periodically reviewing the performance of the Trustee and the members of the Committee; and

 

  (e) performing such additional duties as are or may be imposed by law.

The Board of Directors will have all powers and authority necessary or appropriate to carry out its duties and responsibilities with respect to the administration of the Plan. The Board of Directors may by written resolution allocate its duties and responsibilities to one or more of its members or delegate such duties and responsibilities to any other persons, provided, however, that any such allocation or delegation shall be terminable upon such notice as the Board of Directors deems reasonable and prudent under the circumstances.

11.2 Administrative Committee . The Administrative Committee (the “Committee”) shall administer the Plan and is designated as the “administrator” within the meaning of Section 3(16) of ERISA. The Committee shall have not less than three members, who shall be appointed by the Board of Directors and who may be removed by the Board of Directors at any time with or without cause. A Committee member may resign at any time by filing his written resignation with the Board of Directors.

All members of the Committee are designated as agents of the Plan for the service of legal process.

The Company will notify the Trustee in writing of each Committee member’s appointment, and the Trustee may assume such appointment continues in effect until written notice to the contrary is given by the Company.

11.3 Committee’s Duties and Responsibilities . The Committee shall have the following duties and responsibilities in connection with the administration of the Plan:

 

  (a) interpreting and construing the provisions of the Plan;

 

  (b) determining all questions of eligibility to participate, eligibility for benefits, the allocation of contributions, and the status and rights of Participants, Beneficiaries and Alternate Payees;

 

43


  (c) complying with the reporting and disclosure requirements established by ERISA;

 

  (d) determining and deciding any dispute arising under the Plan and administering the Plan’s claims procedures;

 

  (e) directing the Trustee concerning all payments to be made out of the Trust in accordance with the provisions of the Plan;

 

  (f) establishing procedures for withholding of federal income tax from distributions;

 

  (g) establishing procedures to prevent the Plan from engaging in transactions described in Section 406 of ERISA and transactions described in Section 4975(c) of the Code;

 

  (h) establishing equitable accounting methods and designating additional Valuation Dates;

 

  (i) communicating with Participants, Beneficiaries and Alternate Payees;

 

  (j) reviewing the performance of the Trustee;

 

  (k) reviewing the performance of any advisors appointed by the Committee;

 

  (l) selecting and reviewing Investment Funds;

 

  (m) making recommendations to the Board of Directors with respect to the amendment or termination of the Plan; and

 

  (n) keeping minutes to record its proceedings, acts and decisions pertaining to the administration of the Plan.

11.4 Committee’s Powers The Committee will have all powers and authority necessary or appropriate to carry out its duties and responsibilities with respect to the operation and administration of the Plan. It shall interpret and apply all provisions of the Plan and may supply any omission or reconcile any inconsistency or ambiguity in such manner as it deems advisable, including the adoption of interpretative memoranda. All determinations and any actions of the Committee will be conclusive and binding upon all persons, except as otherwise provided herein or by law; provided, however, that the Committee may revoke or modify a determination or action previously made in error. The Committee shall exercise all powers and authority given to it in a nondiscriminatory manner, and will apply uniform administrative rules of general application in order to assure similar treatment to persons in similar circumstances.

The Committee may delegate to any such agent or any sub-committee or member of the Committee its authority to perform any duty or responsibility specified in Section 11.3, including those matters involving the exercise of discretion, provided that such delegation shall be subject to revocation at any time at the discretion of the Committee. Any member of the Committee, any sub-committee or agent to whom the Committee delegates any authority, and any other person or group of persons, may serve in more than one fiduciary capacity (including service as both Committee member and Trustee) with respect to the Plan.

 

44


Any action or decision concurred in by a majority of the Committee members, either at a meeting or in writing (including electronic communications) without a meeting, will constitute an action or decision of the Committee. The Committee may adopt and amend such rules for the conduct of its business and administration of the Plan as it deems advisable.

11.5 Chairman of the Committee . The Committee shall elect any Committee member to serve as Chairman, and may remove him at any time. The Chairman, or a majority of the Committee members then in office, will have the authority to execute all instruments or memoranda necessary or appropriate to carry out the actions and decisions of the Committee; and any person may rely upon any instrument or memoranda so executed as evidence of the Committee’s action or decision indicated thereby.

11.6 Claims Review Procedure . If a Participant (or Beneficiary or Alternate Payee) believes a benefit or distribution is due under the Plan, he may request the distribution of such benefit, in writing, on forms acceptable to the Committee. At such time, the Participant (or Beneficiary) will be given the information and materials necessary to complete any request for the distribution of a benefit. Benefits under the Plan will be paid only if the Committee decides in its discretion that the applicant is entitled to them.

If the request for distribution is disputed or denied, the following action shall be taken:

 

  (a) Notice . First, the Participant (or Beneficiary) will be notified, in writing, of the dispute or denial as soon as possible (but no later than 90 days) after receipt of the request for a distribution. If special circumstances require an extension of time for processing of the claim, the Committee will give the Participant a written notice of the extension prior to the end of the initial 90-day period. In no event will the extension exceed an additional 90 days.

The denial notice will set forth in a clear and simple manner: (i) the specific reasons for the denial, (ii) reference to relevant provisions of the Plan on which the denial is based; (iii) a description of any additional material or information necessary for the participant to perfect the claim and an explanation of why such items are necessary; and (iv) appropriate information as to the steps to be taken if the Participant wishes to submit his or her claim for review, including the right to bring an action under ERISA Section 502(a) following an adverse determination on review.

 

  (b) Review Procedure . Second, the Participant (or Beneficiary) shall be entitled to a full review of his request for a distribution. A Participant (or Beneficiary) desiring a review of the dispute or denial must request such a review, in writing, no later than 60 days after notification of the dispute or denial is received. The Committee will undertake a full and fair review of the denial of the claim.

 

45


The Participant should include in his written appeal the following information to support his claim for benefits: (i) a list of the issues in the claim denial that he chooses to contest, if any, and that he wishes the Committee to review on appeal; (ii) his position on each issue; (iii) any additional facts that he believes support his position on each issue; and (iv) any legal or other arguments he believes support his position on each issue.

The Participant or his authorized representative will be permitted to submit issues and comments relevant to the claim and given reasonable access to, and copies of, all documents and information relevant to the claim for benefits at no charge. The review will consider all items submitted by the Participant, regardless of whether such information was submitted or considered in the initial benefit determination.

 

  (c) Decision on Review . The Committee shall render its decision within 60 days after receipt of the request for the review. In the event special circumstances require an extension of time, the Committee shall notify the Participant (or Beneficiary), and the decision will be rendered no later than 120 days after the receipt of the request. If an extension is required, written notice of the extension will be furnished to the Participant before the termination of initial 60-day review period.

The decision on review will be in written or electronic form and will contain, in the event of a claim denial, the following: (i) specific reasons for the decision, written in a clear and simple manner; (ii) specific references to the pertinent Plan provisions on which the decision is based; (iii) a statement that the Participant may request, at no charge, reasonable access to and copies of all documents, records and other information relevant to the claim for benefits; and (iv) a description of the Plan’s appeal and arbitration procedures (if any), and the Participant’s right to bring an action under ERISA Section 502(a).

If the decision on review is not furnished within the time period set forth in this Subsection 11.6(c), the claim will be deemed denied on review.

11.7 Information from Participants, Beneficiaries and Alternate Payees . Each Participant, Beneficiary and Alternate Payee shall be required to furnish to the Committee, in the form prescribed by it, such personal data, affidavits, authorization to obtain information, and other information as the Committee may deem appropriate for the proper administration of the Plan.

11.8 Actions . Any action taken by the Plan Administrator on matters within its discretion shall be final and binding on the parties and on all Participants, Beneficiaries or other persons claiming any right or benefit under the Plan, in the Trust, or in the administration of the Plan, except as outlined in the review procedures of Section 11.6.

 

46


All decisions of the Plan Administrator shall be uniform and made in a nondiscriminatory manner.

11.9 Bond . The Company shall purchase a bond for the Plan Administrator and any other fiduciaries of the Plan in accordance with the requirements of the Code and ERISA.

11.10 Indemnification . The Company shall defend and indemnify to the full extent permitted by law (including ERISA), which indemnification shall include, but not be limited to, attorney’s fees and any tax imposed as a result of a claim asserted by any person, persons or entity (including a governmental entity), any individual serving as a member of the Committee made or threatened to be made a part to any action, suit or proceeding, whether criminal, civil, administrative or investigative, by reason of the fact that such individual is or was a member of the Committee.

 

47


ARTICLE XII

AMENDMENT AND TERMINATION

12.1 Right to Amend or Suspend Contributions . Subject to the provisions of Section 12.2, the Board of Directors reserves the right to amend the Plan or Trust or suspend contributions to the Plan, in whole or in part, at any time and for any reason without the consent of any Participating Employer, Participant, Beneficiary, or Alternate Payee. Each amendment of the Plan shall be in writing, executed by order of the Board of Directors and shall be effective on the date specified therein. Notice of any amendment, modification or suspension of contributions to the Plan shall be given by the Board of Directors to the Committee, the Trustee, and to all Participating Employers.

12.2 Restriction on Amendment . No amendment under Section 12.1 shall:

 

  (a) authorize or permit any part of the Plan assets (other than such part as is required to pay taxes, if any, and administrative expenses) to be used for or diverted to purposes other than for the exclusive benefit of the Participants and that Beneficiaries and Alternate Payees under the Plan prior to the satisfaction of all liabilities of the Plan; or

 

  (b) deprive a Participant of his nonforfeitable right to benefits accrued as of the date of such amendment. If the vesting schedule of the Plan is amended in such a way that an Employee might in any Plan Year have less vesting credit under the new schedule than under the schedule prior to the amendment, each Employee with at least three Years of Service may elect to have his nonforfeitable percentage computed without regard to such amendment. The period during which such election may be made shall commence with the date the amendment is adopted and shall end on the later of (i) sixty days after the amendment is adopted, (ii) sixty days after the amendment becomes effective, or (iii) sixty days after the Employee or Participant is provided with written notice of the amendment.

12.3 Merger . The Plan may be merged or consolidated with, or its assets and liabilities may be transferred to any other plan. The benefits which would be received by a Participant in the event of a termination of the Plan immediately after such transfer, merger or consolidation shall be at least equal to the benefit such Participant would have received if the Plan had terminated immediately prior to the transfer, merger or consolidation.

12.4 Termination . It is expressly declared to be the desire and intention of each Participating Employer to continue the Plan in existence for an indefinite period of time. However, circumstances not now anticipated or foreseeable may arise in the future, as a result of which a Participating Employer may deem it impractical or unwise to continue the Plan established hereunder, and each Participating Employer therefore reserves the right to terminate the Plan at any time insofar as it affects its Eligible Employees. Any Participating Employer may terminate its participation in the Plan by action of its board of directors. Such termination shall be evidenced by an instrument of termination executed by an officer of the Participating Employer pursuant to authorization by its board of directors and shall be delivered to the Board of Directors, the Committee and to each other Participating Employer. To the maximum extent

 

48


permitted by ERISA, the termination of the Plan as to any Participating Employer shall not in any way affect any other Participating Employer’s participation in the Plan. No distribution shall be made of Pre-Tax Contribution Account balances as a result of a termination of the Plan unless the Plan is terminated without the establishment or maintenance of another defined contribution plan, as provided in Code Sections 401(k)(2)(B)(i)(II) and 401(k)(10)(A)(i).

 

49


ARTICLE XIII

STAND-BY TOP-HEAVY PROVISIONS

13.1 Top Heavy Plan . The Plan will be considered a Top Heavy Plan for any Plan Year if it is determined to be a Top Heavy Plan as of the last day of the preceding Plan Year. Notwithstanding any other provisions in the Plan, the provisions of this Article XIII shall apply and supersede all other provisions in the Plan with respect to a Plan Year for which the Plan is a Top Heavy Plan.

13.2 Definitions . For purposes of this Article XIII and as otherwise used in this Plan, the following terms shall have the meanings set forth below:

 

  (a) Aggregation Group ” means the group composed of each qualified retirement plan of a Participating Employer or an Affiliated Company in which a Key Employee is a Participant and each other qualified retirement plan of a Participating Employer or an Affiliated Company which enables a plan of a Participating Employer or an Affiliated Company in which a Key Employee is a Participant to satisfy Sections 401(a)(4) or 410 of the Code. In addition, the Company may choose to treat any other qualified retirement plan as a member of the Aggregation Group if such Aggregation Group will continue to satisfy Sections 401(a)(4) and 410 of the Code with such plan being taken into account.

 

  (b) Key Employee ” means a “Key Employee” as defined in Section 416(i)(1) and (5) of the Code or Regulations. For purposes of determining which employee is a Key Employee, compensation shall mean “compensation” as defined in Section 1.415-2(d) of the Regulations but including employer contributions made pursuant to a salary reduction arrangement.

Effective January 1, 2002, Key Employee means any Employee or former Employee (including any deceased Employee) who at any time during the Plan Year that includes the Determination Date was an officer of the Employer having annual compensation greater than $130,000 (as adjusted under Code Section 416(i)(1) for Plan Years beginning after December 31, 2002), a 5-percent owner of the Employer, or a 1-percent owner of the Employer having annual compensation of more than $150,000. For this purpose, annual compensation means compensation within the meaning of Code Section 415(c)(3). The determination of who is a Key Employee will be made in accordance with Code Section 416(i)(1) and the applicable regulations and other guidance of general applicability issued thereunder.

 

  (c) (i) This Plan shall be a “Top Heavy Plan” for any Plan Year if, as of the Determination Date (as defined in paragraph (d) below), the aggregate of the Accounts under the Plan for Participants who are Key Employees (as defined in paragraph (b), above) exceeds 60% of the aggregate of the Accounts of all Participants or if this Plan is required to be in an Aggregation Group (as defined in paragraph (a), above) which for such Plan Year is a top-heavy group.

 

50


  (ii) Determination of Values and Amounts : This Section 13.2(c)(ii) shall apply effective January 1, 2002 for purposes of determining the values of Account balances of Employees as of the Determination Date.

 

  (A) Distributions During Year Ending on the Determination Date . The Account balances of an Employee as of the Determination Date shall be increased by the distributions made with respect to the Employee under the Plan and any plan aggregated with the Plan under Code Section 416(g)(2) during the 1-year period ending on the Determination Date. The preceding sentence shall also apply to distributions under a terminated plan which, had it not been terminated, would have been aggregated with the plan under Code Section 416(g)(2)(A)(i). In the case of a distribution made for a reason other than separation from service, death, or disability, this provision shall be applied by substituting “5-year period” for “1-year period.”

 

  (B) Employees Not Performing Services During Year Ending on the Determination Date . The Accounts of any individual who has not performed services for the Employer during the 1-year period ending on the Determination Date shall not be taken into account.

 

  (d) Determination Date ” means for any Plan Year the last day of the immediately preceding Plan Year.

13.3 Vesting . This Section 13.3 shall apply only to Participants subject to the graduated vesting schedule in Section 5.1, and shall not apply to Participants or Accounts that are fully vested under such Section 5.1. If the Plan is a Top Heavy Plan with respect to any Plan Year, the Vested Interest of each Participant who has performed one Hour of Service on or after the date the Plan becomes a Top Heavy Plan shall not be less than the percentage determined in accordance with the following vesting schedule:

 

Years of Service

 

Vested %

Less than 2 years

  0%

2 years but less than 3

  20%

3 years but less than 4

  40%

4 years but less than 5

  60%

5 years but less than 6

  80%

6 years or more

  100%

 

51


The following additional rules shall apply:

 

  (i) The Top-Heavy vesting schedule set forth in this Section shall apply to the entire balance of such accounts, including benefits which accrued before the Plan became Top-Heavy.

 

  (ii) In the event the Plan ceases to be Top-Heavy, the vested and nonforfeitable percentage of each Participant’s Employer Contribution Account shall not be reduced by a change in the Plan’s vesting schedule.

 

  (iii) The Top-Heavy vesting schedule set forth above shall not apply to the Employer Contribution Account of any Participant who does not have an Hour of Service after the Plan initially becomes Top-Heavy. The vested interest of such Participant in his or her Employer Contribution Account shall be determined without regard to this Section.

 

  (iv) If the Plan ceases to be Top-Heavy, the vesting schedule set forth in this Section shall apply to all Employer Contributions attributable to Plan Years after the Plan ceases to be Top-Heavy. Such change in the vesting schedule shall be treated as an amendment and the provisions of Section 12.2 shall apply.

13.4 Minimum Contribution . For each Plan Year that the Plan is a Top Heavy Plan, the Employer Contributions described in Article IV, allocable to the Accounts of each Participant who has performed an Hour of Service at the end of the Plan Year and who is not a Key Employee, shall not be less than the lesser of (i) 3% of such Participant’s compensation, within the meaning of Section 415 of the Code, or (ii) the percentage at which contributions and forfeitures for such Plan Year are made and allocated on behalf of the Key Employee for whom such percentage is the highest. Such allocation shall be made for each Participant who is not a Key Employee and who is employed by the Employer through the last payroll period ending within the Plan Year. For the purpose of determining the appropriate percentage under clause (i), all defined contribution plans required to be included in an Aggregation Group shall be treated as one plan. Clause (ii) shall not be applicable if the Plan is required to be included in an Aggregation Group which enables a defined benefit plan also required to be included in said Aggregation Group to satisfy Sections 401(a)(4) or 410 of the Code. Compensation, for purposes of determining a minimum contribution, is Limitation Compensation.

Effective January 1, 2002, Matching Contributions shall be taken into account for purposes of satisfying the minimum contribution requirements of Code Section 416(c)(2) and the Plan. Matching Contributions that are used to satisfy the minimum contribution requirements shall be treated as Matching Contributions for purposes of the ACP test and other requirements of Code Section 401(m).

The Company has provided that the minimum benefit requirement shall be met by contribution of the minimum benefits calculated under this Section 13.4 to this Plan.

 

52


13.5 Limitations on Contributions . For each Plan Year that the Plan is a Top Heavy Plan, 1.0 shall be substituted for 1.25 as the multiplicand of the dollar limitation in determining the denominator of the defined benefit plan fraction and of the defined contribution plan fraction for purposes of Section 415(e) of the Code. If, after substituting 90 percent for 60 percent wherever the latter appears in Section 416(g) of the Code, the Plan is not determined to be a Top Heavy Plan, the provisions of this Section 13.5 shall not be applicable if the minimum Employer Contribution (including forfeitures) allocable to the Accounts of any Participant who is not a Key Employee is determined by substituting “4” for “3”. If the Participant is a participant in both a defined contribution plan and a defined benefit plan, the benefit from the defined contribution plan minimum shall be comparable to a 3% defined benefit plan benefit.

13.6 Other Plans . The Committee shall, to the extent permitted by the Code and in accordance with the Regulations, apply the provisions of this Article XIII by taking into account the benefits payable and the contributions made under any other plans maintained by a Participating Employer or Affiliated Company which are qualified under Section 401(a) of the Code to prevent inappropriate omissions or required duplication of minimum benefits or contributions by making a comparability analysis to prove that the defined contribution plan is providing a benefit at least equal to the minimum benefit under the defined benefit plan.

 

53


ARTICLE XIV

GENERAL PROVISIONS

14.1 Plan Voluntary . Although it is intended that the Plan shall be continued indefinitely, this Plan is entirely voluntary on the part of the Participating Employers and the continuance of this Plan and the payment of contributions hereunder are not to be regarded as contractual obligations of the Participating Employers. The Plan shall not be deemed to constitute a contract between a Participating Employer and any Employee or to be a consideration or an inducement for the employment of an Employee by an Employer. Nothing contained in the Plan shall be deemed to give any Employee the right to be retained in the service of an Employer or to interfere with the right of an Employer to discharge or to terminate the service of any Employee at any time without regard to the effects such discharge or termination may have on any rights under the Plan.

14.2 Payments to Minors and Incompetents . If a Participant, Beneficiary or Alternate Payee entitled to receive any benefits hereunder is a minor or is deemed by the Committee, or is adjudged to be legally incapable of giving valid receipt and discharge for such benefits, such benefits will be paid to such person or institution as the Committee may designate or to the duly appointed guardian. Such payment shall, to the extent made, be deemed a complete discharge of any liability for such payment under the Plan.

14.3 Missing Payee . The Committee shall retain the address of each Participant, Beneficiary or Alternate Payee. Any notice sent to the last address filed with the Plan Administrator or for the last address indicated on an Employer’s records will be binding upon a Participant or Beneficiary.

14.4 Required Information. Each Participant shall file with the Committee such pertinent information concerning himself, his spouse and his Beneficiary as the Committee may specify, and no Participant, or Beneficiary, or other person shall have any rights or be entitled to any benefits under the Plan unless and until such information is filed by or with respect to him.

14.5 Communications to Committee . All elections, designations, requests, notices, instructions, and other communications from an Employee, a Participant, Beneficiary, or Alternate Payee to the Committee required or permitted under the Plan (i) shall be in such form as is prescribed from time to time by the Committee, (ii) shall be mailed by first-class mail or delivered to such location as shall be specified by the Committee, and (iii) shall be deemed to have been given and delivered only upon actual receipt thereof by the Committee at such location.

14.6 Communications from Employer or Committee . All notices, statements, reports and other communications from an Employer or the Committee to any Employee, Participant, Beneficiary or Alternate Payee shall be deemed to have been duly given when delivered to (including, where applicable, electronic delivery), or when mailed by first-class mail, postage prepaid and addressed to, such Employee, Participant, Beneficiary or Alternate Payee at his address last appearing on the records of the Committee or Company, or when posted by the Company or the Committee as permitted by law.

 

54


14.7 Action . Except as may be specifically provided herein, any action required or permitted to be taken by an Employer may be taken on behalf of the Employer by any authorized officer of the Employer.

14.8 Liability for Benefits . Neither the Trustee, the Employers, the Plan Administrator nor the individual members of the Committee guarantee the Trust from loss or depreciation, nor do they guarantee any payment to any person. The liability of the Trustee, the Employers, the Plan Administrator and the individual members of the Committee to make any payment is limited to the available assets of the Trust.

14.9 Named Fiduciary . The “named fiduciaries” of the Plan within the meaning of ERISA Section 403 shall be (a) the Committee, and (b) the Trustee.

14.10 Gender . Whenever used in the Plan the masculine gender includes the feminine.

14.11 Captions . The captions preceding the Sections of the Plan have been inserted solely as a matter of convenience and in no way define or limit the scope or intent of any provisions of the Plan.

14.12 Applicable Law . The Plan and all rights thereunder shall be governed by and construed in accordance with ERISA and the laws of the State of Louisiana.

14.13 Reversion of Employer Contributions . In no event shall the assets of the Plan revert to the benefit of the Employer. Notwithstanding any provision of the Plan to the contrary, however, all contributions by Employers are conditioned upon the deductibility of such contribution under Code Section 404. To the extent that a deduction is disallowed for an Employer’s contribution, the Trustee shall return the principal amount of such contribution upon the demand of the Employer. Any such demand shall be made within one year following the final determination of the disallowance.

Further, notwithstanding any provision of the Plan to the contrary, any contribution that is made by the Employer on account of a good faith mistake of fact may be returned to the Employer. The Employer shall notify the Trustee, in writing, of such mistake within one year of the contribution. The Trustee shall return the principal amount of the Employer Contribution as soon as possible, but in no event more than 60 days after written notification by the Employer.

The maximum amount that may be returned to an Employer in the case of a mistake of fact or the disallowance of a deduction is the excess of (a) the amount contributed over, as relevant, (b)(i) the amount that would have been contributed had no mistake of fact occurred, or (ii) the amount that would have been contributed had the contribution been limited to the amount that is deductible after any disallowance by the Internal Revenue Service. Earnings attributable to the excess contribution may not be returned to the Employer, but losses attributable thereto must reduce the amount to be so returned. Furthermore, if the withdrawal of the amount attributable to the mistaken or nondeductible contribution would cause the balance of the individual account of any Participant to be reduced to less than the balance which would have been in the account had the mistaken or nondeductible amount not been contributed, then the amount to be returned to the Employer must be limited so as to avoid such reduction.

 

55


14.14 Expenses . All expenses of administration shall be paid from the Trust unless paid directly by the Employer. The Employer may reimburse the Trust for any administrative expense paid by the Trust; such reimbursement shall not be treated as an Employer Contribution under the terms of the Plan.

EXECUTED in multiple originals in New Iberia, Louisiana this      day of                      , 2005

 

WITNESSES:     IBERIABANK Corporation

 

    BY:__________________________________________

 

   

 

56


ACKNOWLEDGMENT

STATE OF LOUISIANA

PARISH OF                     

BEFORE ME , the undersigned Notary Public, personally came and appeared                              , who being by me sworn did depose and state that he signed the foregoing IBERIABANK Corporation Retirement Savings Plan as a free act and deed on behalf of IBERIABANK Corporation for the purposes therein set forth.

 

BY:

 

/s/

Print Name:

 

Title:

 

 

SWORN TO AND SUBSCRIBED

BEFORE ME THIS      DAY

OF                      , 2005.

 

 

NOTARY PUBLIC

 

57


APPENDIX A

PARTICIPATING EMPLOYERS

IN

IBERIABANK CORPORATION RETIREMENT SAVINGS PLAN

 

Participating Employer

  

Date of Participation

  

Date Participation Ceased

IBERIABANK Corporation

  

January 1, 1982

  

Jefferson Bank

  

October 1996

  

1997 1

IBERIABANK

  

January 1, 1982

  

Iberia Financial Services, L.L.C.

     

Acadiana Holdings

     

  1 (merged into IBERIABANK).

 

A-1


APPENDIX B

Non-Discrimination Rules

 

1. Employee Contribution Non-Discrimination Rules .

 

  (a) The term “Actual Deferral Percentage” (hereinafter “ADP”) as used in this Appendix B shall mean, for each specified group of 401(k) Participants for a Plan Year, the average of the ratios (calculated separately for each 401(k) Participant in such group) of (1) the amount of Pre-Tax Contributions actually delivered to the Trustee for the 401(k) Participant Limitation Compensation for the Plan Year to (2) the 401(k) Participant for the portion of such Plan Year (during which) the Employee was a 401(k) Participant. The ADP shall be calculated separately for the group consisting of Highly Compensated Employees and the group consisting of Non-Highly Compensated Employees.

 

  (b) A 401(k) Participant who fails to make Pre-Tax Contributions shall be included in the testing with a ratio of zero.

 

  (c) The Tests . In each Plan Year the Plan must satisfy one of the following tests:

 

  (i) The ADP for 401(k) Participants who are Highly Compensated Employees for the Plan Year does not exceed the ADP for 401(k) Participants who are Non-Highly Compensated Employees multiplied by 1.25; or

 

  (ii) The ADP for 401(k) Participants who are Highly Compensated Employees for the Plan Year shall not exceed the ADP for 401(k) Participants who are Non-Highly Compensated Employees multiplied by 2.0, provided that the ADP for 401(k) Participants who are Highly Compensated Employees does not exceed the ADP for 401(k) Participants who are Non-Highly Compensated Employees by more than two (2) percentage points.

 

  (d) Under transition relief provided by the Internal Revenue Service Notice 98-1, the Company may elect to determine the ADP for the Non-Highly Compensated Participants for each Plan Year after 1996 based upon either the prior plan year or current plan year data. Testing year information is set forth in Sections 7 and 8 of Appendix B.

 

  (e) Special Rules in Connection with ADP Testing:

 

  (i) The ADP for any 401(k) Participant who is a Highly Compensated Employee for the Plan Year and who is eligible to have Pre-Tax Contributions allocated to his accounts under two or more arrangements described in Code Section 401(k), that are maintained by one or more Employers, shall be determined as if such contributions were made under a single arrangement. If a Highly Compensated Employee participates in two or more cash or deferred arrangements that have different plan years, all cash or deferred arrangements ending with or within the same calendar year shall be treated as a single arrangement.

 

B-1


  (ii) In the event that this Plan satisfies the requirements of Code Sections 401(k), 401(a)(4), or 410(b) only if aggregated with one or more other plans, or if one or more other plans satisfy the requirements of such Code Sections only if aggregated with this Plan, then this Section 1 of Appendix B shall be applied by determining the ADP of Employees as if all such plans were a single plan.

 

  (iii) For purposes of determining the ADP test, Pre-Tax Contributions shall be taken into account only if: paid to the Trust before the last day of the twelve (12) month period immediately following the Plan Year to which the contributions relate; and which relate to Limitation Compensation which would have been received by the 401(k) Participants in the Plan Year (but for the deferral election) or which is attributable to services performed by the 401(k) Participants in the Plan Year and would have been received by the 401(k) Participants within 2  1 / 2 months after the close of the Plan Year (but for the deferral election).

 

  (iv) The determination and treatment of the ADP amounts of any 401(k) Participants shall satisfy such other requirements as may be prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury. In the event that the ADP of the Highly Compensated Employees for the Plan Year determined as a date prior to the last day of the Plan Year indicates that the Plan for the year will not otherwise comply with either ADP test, the Committee has the authority to reduce the Pre-Tax Contribution rate for the remainder of the Plan Year for all or a portion of the Highly Compensated Employees in an equitable manner to increase the likelihood that one of the ADP tests will be satisfied.

 

2. Authority of the Committee . The Committee, in its discretion, shall adopt such rules and procedures as it deems necessary or appropriate in order to administer the anti-discrimination tests imposed hereunder. Such procedures may include, but are not limited to, the determination of the method by which the Plan will satisfy such anti-discrimination tests, the method by which earnings will be computed, the determination of Compensation (within the meaning of Section 414(s)) to be used for testing purposes, and the method by which Participants will be notified in the event a distribution or other corrective action is required. All such procedures shall comply with the rules of Code Sections 401(k) and (m) and the regulations promulgated thereunder, though the Committee shall have determine whether to implement the final regulations at Treas. Reg. §1.401(k)-1 et. seq. and §1.401(m)-1 et. seq. earlier than required by such final regulations.

 

3. Adjustment to Actual Deferral Percentage Tests .

 

  (a) Excess Contributions mean the excess of Pre-Tax Contributions on behalf of Highly Compensated Participants for a Plan Year over the maximum amount of such contributions permitted under the ADP test.

 

B-2


  (b) Excess Contributions Distribution . In the event it is determined that, unless adjusted, the ADP test for a Plan Year would not be satisfied, the Pre-Tax Contributions (and other contributions so treated) attributable to the Highly Compensated Participants shall be adjusted (reduced) to the extent necessary to bring the actual deferral ratio (“ADR”) of the Highly Compensated Participants into compliance with the ADP test in accordance with Notice 97-2 (or subsequent modifications). Accordingly, in order to distribute the Excess Contributions, the following procedure is used:

 

  (i) Step 1 - Calculate the dollar amount of Excess Contributions for each affected Highly Compensated Participant in a manner described in Section 401(k)(8)(B) and Section 1.401(k)-1(f)(2). However, in applying these rules, rather than distributing the amount necessary to reduce the ADR of each affected Highly Compensated Participant in order of these participants’ ADR, beginning with the highest ADR, the Plan uses these amounts in Step 2.

 

  (ii) Step 2 - Determine the total of the dollar amounts calculated in Step 1. This amount (Excess Contributions) should be distributed in accordance with Steps 3 and 4.

 

  (iii) Step 3 - The Pre-Tax Contributions of the Highly Compensated Participant with the highest dollar amount of Pre-Tax Contributions are reduced by the amount required to cause that Highly Compensated Participant’s Pre-Tax Contributions to equal the dollar amount of the Pre-Tax Contributions of the Highly Compensated Participant with the next highest dollar amount of Pre-Tax Contributions. This amount is then distributed to the Highly Compensated Participant with the highest dollar amount. However, if a lesser reduction, when added to the total dollar amount already distributed under this step, would equal the total Excess Contributions, the lesser reduction amount is distributed.

 

  (iv) Step 4 - If the total amount distributed is less than the total Excess Contributions, Step 3 is repeated.

 

  (c) Excess Contributions shall be adjusted for any income or loss allocable to Excess Contributions for the Plan Year and for the period between the end of the Plan Year and the Valuation Date which immediately precedes the date of distribution of the Excess Contributions (the gap period). Income or loss allocable to Excess Contributions for the Plan Year and for the gap period shall be computed using the same method used for allocating Trust income or loss to Participant’s Pre-Tax Contribution Accounts in accordance with Section 7.3.

 

  (d) Excess Contributions that exceed the maximum amount permitted under the ADP Test, plus any income and minus any loss allowable thereto, shall be distributed (preferably by March 15 in order to avoid a 10% penalty tax imposed on the Employer under Section 4979 of the Code) following the end of the applicable Plan Year, no later than the close of the Plan Year following the applicable Plan Year.

 

B-3


  (e) Excess Contributions shall be treated as Annual Additions under the Plan. The amount of Excess Contributions to be distributed shall be reduced by excess deferrals previously distributed for the same year pursuant to Section 3.5 and any Matching Contributions with respect to such distributed Excess Contributions (and the earnings thereon) shall be forfeited.

 

  (f) Additional Contribution Alternative. In lieu of, or in conjunction with, the application of the Excess Contribution distribution provisions of this Section, the Employer may make additional Contributions described in Appendix B, Section 6 to satisfy the ADP test.

 

4. Matching Contributions – Nondiscrimination Rules .

 

  (a) Definitions:

 

  (i) “Average Contribution Percentage” or “ACP” shall mean the average of the Contribution Percentages of the Eligible Participants in a group.

 

  (ii) “Contribution Percentage” shall mean the ratio (expressed as a percentage) of an Eligible Participant’s Contribution Percentage Amounts to the Eligible Participant’s Limitation Compensation for the portion of the Plan Year in which he was eligible to make Pre-Tax Contributions.

 

  (iii) “Contribution Percentage Amounts” shall mean the Matching Contributions under the Plan on behalf of the Eligible Participant for the Plan Year. The Employer may elect to use Pre-Tax Contributions in the Contribution Percentage Amounts so long as the ADP test is met before the Pre-Tax Contributions are used in the ACP test and continues to be met following the exclusion of those Pre-Tax Contributions that are used to meet the ACP test.

 

  (b) If a 401(k) Participant makes no Pre-Tax Contributions and receives no Matching Contributions, the contribution ratio that is to be included in determining the ACP is zero.

 

  (c) The Tests . In each Plan Year the Plan must satisfy one of the following tests:

 

  (i) The ACP for 401(k) Participants who are Highly Compensated Employees for the Plan Year shall not exceed the ACP for 401(k) Participants who are Non-Highly Compensated Employees for the applicable Plan Year multiplied by 1.25; or

 

  (ii) The ACP for 401(k) Participants who are Highly Compensated Employees for the Plan Year shall not exceed the ACP for 401(k) Participants who are Non-Highly Compensated Employees for the applicable Plan Year multiplied by two (2), provided that the ACP for 401(k) Participants who

 

B-4


       are Highly Compensated Employees does not exceed the ACP for 401(k) Participants who are Non-Highly Compensated Employees by more than two (2) percentage points.

 

  (d) Prior Year or Current Year Testing Methods History . See Section 7 of Appendix B regarding testing methods and history.

 

  (e) The Plan further incorporates by reference Section 401(m) of the Code and Sections 1.401(m)-1(a) and (b) and 1.401(m)-1(f)(6) and (12) of the Treasury Regulations.

 

5. Adjustment to Actual Contribution Percentage Tests.

 

  (a) Excess Aggregate Contributions . If the ACP Test limits are exceeded for a Plan Year, excess amounts (called Excess Aggregate Contributions) must be corrected. “Excess Aggregate Contributions” means for any plan year, the excess of (i) the aggregate amount of Matching Contributions and Employee Deferrals (and any Qualified Nonelective Contributions taken into account in computing the ACP test) actually made on behalf of Highly Compensated Participants for the Plan Year over (ii) the maximum amount of the contributions allowed under the ACP Test, determined by reducing contributions made on behalf of Highly Compensated Participants in order of their contribution percentages beginning with the highest of the percentages. In determining Excess Aggregate Contributions for a Plan Year, Qualified Matching Contributions treated as elective contributions for the ADP test are disregarded.

 

  (b) Treatment of Excess Aggregate Contributions . If the Plan fails to satisfy the ACP Test, Excess Aggregate Contributions and income or loss allocable thereto for the Plan Year in which the ACP Test is failed, shall be treated as follows:

 

  (i) Employer Contributions made with respect to Highly Compensated Participants that exceed the maximum amount permitted under the ACP Test, and income allocable thereto, shall be forfeited, if otherwise forfeitable under the terms of the Plan. Forfeitures of Excess Aggregate Contributions may not be allocated to Participants whose contributions are reduced under this Section 4.

 

  (ii) The Excess Aggregate Contributions (and other contributions so treated) attributable to Highly Compensated Participants shall be adjusted (reduced) to the extent necessary to bring the actual contribution ratio (ACR) of the Highly Compensated Employees into compliance with the ACP test in accordance with Notice 97-2 (or subsequent modifications). Accordingly, in order to distribute the Excess Aggregate Contributions, the following procedure is used:

 

  (A) Step 1 - Calculate the dollar amount of Excess Aggregate Contributions for each affected Highly Compensated Participant in a manner described in Section 401(m)(6)(C) and Section 1.401(m)-1(e)(2) and (3). However, in applying these rules, rather than

 

B-5


       distributing the amount necessary to reduce the ACR of each affected Highly Compensated Participant in order of these employees’ ACR, beginning with the highest ACR, the Plan uses these amounts in Step 2.

 

  (B) Step 2 - Determine the total of the dollar amounts calculated in Step 1. This amount (Excess Aggregate Contributions) should be distributed in accordance with Steps 3 and 4.

 

  (C) Step 3 - The Matching Contributions are reduced by the amount required to cause that Highly Compensated Participant’s Matching Contributions to equal the dollar amount of the Matching Contributions of the Highly Compensated Participant with the next highest dollar amount of Matching Contributions. This amount is then distributed to the Highly Compensated Participant with the highest dollar amount. However, if a lesser reduction, when added to the total dollar amount already distributed under this step, would equal the total Excess Aggregate Contributions, the lesser reduction amount is distributed.

 

  (D) Step 4 - If the total amount distributed is less than the total Excess Aggregate Contributions, Step 3 is repeated.

 

  (iii) Excess Aggregate Contributions that exceed the maximum amount permitted under the ACP Test, plus any income and minus any loss allocable thereto, shall be distributed (preferably by March 15 in order to avoid a 10% penalty tax imposed on the Employer under Section 4979 of the Code) following the end of the applicable Plan Year, no later than the close of the Plan Year following the applicable Plan Year.

 

  (iv) Excess Aggregate Contributions shall be distributed, or forfeited, where otherwise appropriate, from the Participant’s Employer Contribution Account in proportion to such Participant’s Employer Contributions for the Plan Year.

 

  (c) Excess Aggregate Contributions shall be treated as Annual Additions under the Plan even if such contributions are corrected through distribution or recharacterization.

 

  (d) The Excess Aggregate Contributions, if distributed, shall be adjusted for any income or loss allocable to Excess Aggregate Contributions for the Plan Year and for the period between the end of the Plan Year and the Valuation Date that immediately precedes the date of distribution of the Excess Aggregate Contributions (the gap period). Income or loss allocable to Excess Aggregate Contributions for the Plan Year and the gap period shall be computed using the same method used for allocating Trust income or loss to Participant’s Employer Contribution Accounts in accordance with Section 7.3.

 

B-6


  (e) Special Rules

 

  (i) For purposes of this Section, the Contribution Percentage for any Eligible Participant who is a Highly Compensated Participant and who is eligible to have Contribution Percentage Amounts allocated to his account under two (2) or more plans described in Code Section 401(a), or arrangements described in Code Section 401(k) that are maintained by one or more Employers, shall be determined as if the total of such Contribution Percentage Amounts was made under each plan. If a Highly Compensated Participant participates in two (2) or more cash or deferred arrangements under Code Section 401(k) (“CODA”), that have different plan years, all CODA’s ending with or within the same calendar year shall be treated as a single arrangement.

 

  (ii) In the event that this Plan satisfies the requirements of Code Sections 401(m), 401(a)(4) or 410(b) only if aggregated with one or more other plans, or if one or more other plans satisfy the requirements of such Code Sections only if aggregated with this Plan, then this Section shall be applied by determining the Contribution Percentages of Eligible Employees as if all such plans were a single plan.

 

  (iii) For purposes of determining the Average Contributions Percentage test, Employer Matching Contributions will be considered made for a Plan Year only if (i) paid to the trust no later than the end of the twelve (12) month period beginning on the day after the close of the Plan Year and (ii) made on account of the Employee’s Pre-Tax Contribution for the Plan Year.

 

  (iv) Qualified Matching Contributions, Qualified Nonelective Contributions. The Company may, in its sole discretion, use the following contributions to enable the Plan to satisfy the nondiscrimination requirements of Appendix B Section 1 and/or Section 5.

 

6. Qualified Matching Contributions . A Qualified Matching Contribution may be made by the Employers on the basis of either a specified dollar amount or a specified percentage of Plan Compensation of the Employee who is eligible for such contribution under the nondiscrimination tests. Such Qualified Matching Contributions shall be nonforfeitable when made and shall be subject to the same restrictions on distribution that apply to Pre-Tax Contributions.

 

  (a) Qualified Nonelective Contributions . A Qualified Nonelective Contribution may be made by the Employer on the basis of either a specified dollar amount or a specified percentage of Plan Compensation of the Employee who is eligible for such contribution under the nondiscrimination tests. Such Qualified Nonelective Contributions shall be nonforfeitable and shall be subject to the same restrictions on distribution that apply to Pre-Tax Contributions.

 

  (b) Qualified Matching Contributions and/or Qualified Nonelective Contributions may be treated as Pre-Tax Contributions only if the conditions described in Section 1.401(k)-1(b)(5) are satisfied. Qualified Nonelective Contributions may be treated as Matching Contributions if the conditions described in Section 1.401(m)-1(b)(5) of the regulations are satisfied.

 

B-7


  (c) The Employer will maintain records sufficient to demonstrate compliance with this Section, including the extent to which Qualified Nonelective Contributions and Qualified Matching Contributions are taken into account to satisfy the ADP and ACP tests.

 

  (d) The use of contributions described above shall be as provided in regulations under Section 401(k) and Section 401(m) of the Code.

 

  (e) In order to be taken into account in the calculation of the ADP or ACP, Qualified Nonelective Contributions and Qualified Matching Contributions must be allocated as of a date within the year and must actually be paid to the trust no later than the end of the twelve month period following the end of the year to which the contribution relates.

 

7. Prior Year or Current Year Testing Methods History . Under transition relief provided by Internal Revenue Service Notice 97-2, the Company may elect to determine the ADP and ACP for the Non-Highly Compensated Participants for each Plan Year after 1996 based upon either the prior year or current year data. If the Employer elected the current year method, the “testing year” is the current Plan Year. If the Employer elected the prior year method, the “testing year” is the Plan Year immediately preceding the Plan Year being tested.

The ADP and ACP Tests for the following Plan Years were applied using the prior year testing method: 1999 and 2002.

The ADP and ACP Tests for the following Plan Years were applied using the current year testing method: 1997, 1998, 2000 and 2001.

 

8. Prior Year or Current Year Election . For Plan Years 2003 and following, the Employer has elected to use the prior year testing method.

 

B-8

Exhibit 10.18

RESTRICTED STOCK AGREEMENT

UNDER THE IBERIABANK CORPORATION

2001 INCENTIVE COMPENSATION PLAN

THIS INCENTIVE AGREEMENT (“Agreement”) is entered into as of                      , between IBERIABANK Corporation (“IBKC”) and                                  (the “Award Recipient”).

WHEREAS, under the IBKC 2001 Incentive Compensation Plan (the “Plan”), the Compensation Committee of the IBKC Board of Directors (the “Committee”) may, among other things, award shares of common stock of IBKC (the “Common Stock”) in the form of restricted stock (“Restricted Stock”) to a key employee of IBKC or one of its subsidiaries (collectively, the “Company”);

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the premises, it is agreed as follows:

1. Conditional Award of Restricted Stock

Pursuant to the terms of the Plan, the Award Recipient is hereby awarded, subject to the other terms, conditions, and restrictions contained herein,                      shares of Restricted Stock.

2. Award Restrictions

2.1 The shares of Restricted Stock and the right to vote them and to receive dividends thereon may not be sold, assigned, transferred, exchanged, pledged, hypothecated or otherwise encumbered until such time as the shares vest and the restrictions imposed thereon lapse, as provided below.

2.2 The shares of Restricted Stock issued to the Award Recipient will vest and the restrictions imposed thereon will lapse as to one-seventh of the shares of Restricted Stock on each of the first through seventh anniversaries of the date of this Agreement; provided that on each vesting date if a fraction of a share would vest, a whole share shall vest in lieu thereof and on the last date the number of shares that vest will be the total number of shares awarded less the total number of shares previously vested; and provided further that on the applicable vesting date the Award Recipient is in the employ of IBKC. The period during which the restrictions imposed on the shares of Restricted Stock by the Plan and this Agreement are in effect is referred to herein as the “Restricted Period.” During the Restricted Period, the Award Recipient shall be entitled to all rights of a shareholder of IBKC, including the right to vote such shares of Restricted Stock and to receive dividends thereon.

2.3 All restrictions on the Restricted Stock issued to the Award Recipient shall immediately lapse and the shares shall vest (a) if the Award Recipient dies while he is employed by the Company, (b) if the Award Recipient becomes disabled, which means any physical or mental impairment which qualifies the Award Recipient for disability benefits under the applicable long-term disability plan maintained by the Company or, if no such plan applies, which would qualify such Award Recipient for disability benefits under the Federal Social Security System, (c) if the Award Recipient retires from employment with the Company on or after attaining the age of 65 or such earlier age as may be specified in applicable plans or policies of the Company, or (d) pursuant to the provisions of the Plan.


3. Stock Certificates

3.1 Certificates representing shares of Restricted Stock shall be registered in the name of the Award Recipient and deposited with IBKC, together with a stock power endorsed in blank by the Award Recipient. Each such certificate shall bear a legend in substantially the following form:

The transferability of this certificate and the shares of Common Stock represented by it is subject to the terms and conditions (including conditions of forfeiture) contained in the IBERIABANK Corporation 2001 Incentive Compensation Plan (the “Plan”) and an agreement between the registered owner and IBERIABANK Corporation thereunder. Copies of the Plan and the agreement are on file and available for inspection at the principal office of IBERIABANK Corporation.

3.2 Upon the lapse of restrictions on any shares of Restricted Stock issued to the Award Recipient, IBKC shall cause a stock certificate without a restrictive legend representing such shares of Restricted Stock to be issued in the name of the Award Recipient or his nominee within 30 days after the end of the Restricted Period. Upon receipt of such stock certificate, the Award Recipient is free to hold or dispose of the shares of Common Stock represented by such certificate subject to applicable securities laws.

4. Dividends

Any dividends paid on the shares of Restricted Stock issued to the Award Recipient shall be paid to the Award Recipient currently.

5. Withholding Taxes

5.1 IBKC shall have the right to withhold from any payments or stock issuances under the Plan, or to collect as a condition of payment, any taxes required by law to be withheld.

5.2 Reward Recipient may, but is not required to, satisfy his or her withholding tax obligation in whole or in part by electing (the “Election”) to have IBKC withhold, from the shares he or she otherwise would receive, shares of Common Stock having a value equal to the minimum amount required to be withheld. The value of the shares to be withheld shall be based on the Fair Market Value of the Common Stock on the date that the amount of tax to be withheld shall be determined (the “Tax Date”). Each Election must be made prior to the Tax Date. The Committee may disapprove of any Election, may suspend or terminate the right to make Elections, or may provide with respect to any Restricted Stock that the right to make Elections shall not apply to such Restricted Stock.

6. Additional Conditions

Anything in this Agreement to the contrary notwithstanding, if at any time IBKC further determines, in its sole discretion, that the listing, registration or qualification (or any updating of any document) of the shares of Common Stock issued or issuable pursuant hereto is necessary on any securities exchange or under any federal or state securities or blue sky law, or that the consent or approval of any governmental regulatory body is necessary or desirable as a condition

 

-2-


of, or in connection with, the issuance of shares of Common Stock pursuant hereto, or the removal or any restrictions imposed on such shares, such shares of Common Stock shall not be issued, in whole or in part, or the restrictions thereon removed, unless such listing, registration, qualification, consent or approval shall have been effected or obtained free of any conditions not acceptable to IBKC.

7. No Contract of Employment Intended

Nothing in this Agreement shall confer upon the Award Recipient any right to continue in the employment of the Company or to interfere in any way with the right of the Company to terminate the Award Recipient’s employment relationship with the Company at any time.

8. Binding Effect

This Agreement shall inure to the benefit of and be binding upon the parties hereto and their respective heirs, executors, administrators and successors.

9. Inconsistent Provisions

The shares of Restricted Stock covered hereby are subject to the provisions of the Plan. If any provision of this Agreement conflicts with a provision of the Plan, the Plan provision shall control.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this Agreement to be executed as of the day and year first above written.

 

IBERIABANK CORPORATION
By:  

 

  A duly authorized member of the Committee
 

 

  Award Recipient

 

Attest:  

 

 

-3-


STOCK POWER

PURSUANT TO

IBERIABANK CORPORATION

2001 INCENTIVE COMPENSATION PLAN

 

State of Louisiana

   )   
   )    ss:

Parish of                                                               

   )   

Know all men by these presents that I,                                          (name of Award Recipient), do hereby make, constitute and appoint the members of the Compensation Committee of the IBERIABANK Corporation Board of Directors, or any of the them, as appointed by such Board of Directors from time to time, for my benefit as the recipient of an award under the 2001 Incentive Compensation Plan (as evidenced by the attached Agreement dated as of                      , 200_, which is incorporated herein by reference), and in my name, place and stead, my true and lawful attorney-in-fact:

To retain the stock certificates evidencing the Restricted Stock issued to me pursuant to such Agreement until the termination of the applicable Restricted Period and the lapse of restrictions under the terms of such Agreement and, for that purpose, to make, execute and deliver all assignments or other instruments of transfer deemed necessary or appropriate, to give a receipt or receipts for the same and generally to do all lawful acts necessary or appropriate to secure for me the Restricted Stock issued under such Agreement.

 

Dated:

 

 

   

 

     

Signature of Award Recipient

Exhibit 10.19

INCENTIVE STOCK OPTION AGREEMENT

UNDER THE

IBERIABANK CORPORATION

2001 INCENTIVE COMPENSATION PLAN

THIS AGREEMENT entered into as of                                          , between IBERIABANK Corporation (“IBKC”) and                                           (“Optionee”).

1. Grant of Option

1.1 IBKC hereby grants to Optionee effective              (the “Date of Grant”), the option to purchase up to              shares of Common Stock (the “Option”) at an exercise price of              per share (the “Exercise Price”). The Option shall vest, become exercisable and expire as provided in Section 2 below.

1.2 The Option is intended to be treated as an incentive stock option under Section 422 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended. If all or any portion of the option is not eligible for such treatment, the ineligible portion shall be treated as a non-qualified stock option.

2. Time of Exercise

2.1 Subject to the provisions of the Plan and this Agreement, the Optionee shall be entitled to exercise the Option as follows:

 

Years of Continuous Employment After

Date of Grant of Option

  

Percentage of Total
Shares

Of Common Stock
Subject to Option Which
May be Exercised

 

After 1 year

   14.286 (1)

After 2 years

   28.572  

After 3 years

   42.858  

After 4 years

   57.144  

After 5 years

   71.430  

After 6 years

   85.716  

After 7 years

   100.000  

(1) Option can be exercised to receive stock beginning one year from grant; however, you must hold the stock for two years from the date of the grant of the option and for one year after exercise of such option in order to receive most favorable tax treatment. Optionees should consult their own tax advisor in determining individual tax consequences.

2.2 The Option shall expire and may not be exercised later than ten years following the Date of Grant.


2.3 Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Option shall become accelerated and immediately exercisable: (i) in the event of Optionee’s termination of employment as a result of death, disability or retirement and (ii) pursuant to the provisions of Section 8.12(b) of the IBERIABANK Corporation 2001 Incentive Compensation Plan (the “Plan”).

3. Conditions for Exercise of Option

During Optionee’s lifetime, the Option may be exercised only by the Optionee or by the Optionee’s guardian or legal representative. The Option must be exercised while Optionee is employed by IBKC, or, to the extent exercisable at the time of termination of employment, but not later than three months after the date on which the Optionee ceases to be an employee, except that if the Optionee ceases to be an employee because of death, retirement or disability, the vested Options may be exercised within one year from the earlier of the Optionee’s death, retirement or disability provided, however, that no Option may be exercised later than 10 years after the Date of Grant.

4. Additional Conditions

a. Anything in this Agreement to the contrary notwithstanding, if at any time IBKC further determines, in its sole discretion, that the listing, registration or qualification (or any updating of any such document) of the shares of Common Stock issuable pursuant to the exercise of an Option is necessary on any securities exchange or under any federal or state securities or blue sky law, or that the consent or approval of any governmental regulatory body is necessary or desirable as a condition of, or in connection with the issuance of shares of Common Stock pursuant thereto, or the removal of any restrictions imposed on such shares, such shares of Common Stock shall not be issued, in whole or in part, unless such listing, registration, qualification, consent or approval shall have been effected or obtained free of any conditions not acceptable to IBKC.

b. The Board or the Committee may by resolution immediately revoke, rescind and terminate any Option, or portion thereof, to the extent not yet vested, if Optionee is discharged from the employ of IBKC or a subsidiary company for cause, which, for purposes hereof, shall mean termination because of the Optionee’s personal dishonesty, incompetence, willful misconduct, breach of fiduciary duty involving personal profit, intentional failure to perform stated duties, willful violation of any law, rule, or regulation (other than traffic violations or similar offenses) or final cease-and-desist order.

5. Taxes

IBKC may make such provisions as it may deem appropriate for the withholding of any federal, state and local taxes that it determines are required to be withheld on the exercise of the Option.

6. Binding Effect

This Agreement shall inure to the benefit of and be binding upon the parties hereto and their respective heirs, executors, administrators and successors.

 

2


7. Inconsistent Provisions

The Option granted hereby is subject to the provisions of the Plan. If any provision of this Agreement conflicts with a provision of the Plan, the Plan provision shall control.

8. Adjustments to Option

Appropriate adjustments shall be made to the number and class of shares of Common Stock subject to the Option and to the exercise price in certain situations described in the Plan.

9. Termination of Option

The Committee, in its sole discretion, may terminate the Option. However, no termination may adversely affect the rights of Optionee to the extent that the Option is currently vested on the date of such termination.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF the parties hereto have caused this Agreement to be executed as of the day and year first above written.

 

IBERIABANK CORPORATION
By:  

 

  A duly authorized member
  of the Committee

 

Optionee

 

Attest:  

 

 

3


IBERIABANK CORPORATION

Form for Exercise Of Stock Options

IBERIABANK Corporation

200 West Congress Street, 12 th Floor

Lafayette, Louisiana 70501

Dear Sir or Madam:

The undersigned elects to exercise his/her Incentive/Non-Incentive Stock Option (the “Stock Option”) to purchase              shares of Common Stock of IBERIABANK Corporation (the “Company”) under and pursuant to a Stock Option Agreement dated as of              . The Stock Option was granted under and subject to the terms and conditions of the following plan (check appropriate plan):

¨   1996 Stock Option Plan

¨   1999 Stock Option Plan

¨   Supplemental Stock Option Plan

¨   2001 Incentive Compensation Plan

¨   2005 Stock Incentive Plan

1. ¨   Delivered herewith is a certified or bank cashier’s or teller’s check and/or shares of Common Stock held by the undersigned for at least six months*, valued at the closing sale price of the Common Stock on the business day of, or prior business day to, the date of exercise (as specified in the plan), as follows:

 

$                 in cash or check
$                 in the form of              shares of Common Stock, valued at $              per share
$    Total
    

2. ¨   Delivered herewith are irrevocable instructions to a broker approved by the Company to deliver promptly to the Company the amount of sale or loan proceeds to pay the exercise price.**

If method 1 is chosen, the name or names to be on the stock certificate or certificates and the address and Social Security Number of such person(s) is as follows:

 

Name:      
Address:      
Social Security Number      

 

  Very truly yours,
___________  

 

        Date   Optionee

* The six months requirement may be waived by the Compensation Committee.
** This method must be approved in advance by the Compensation Committee.

 

4

EXHIBIT 12

STATEMENTS: COMPUTATION OF RATIOS

The following is a computation of Non-GAAP financial ratios. This information is presented because management believes traditional ROE measures penalize companies, such as IBERIABANK Corporation, that historically completed acquisitions using only purchase accounting treatment and not pooling of interests treatment. An alternative measure that the Company believes “levels the playing field” between purchase and pooling of interests accounting treatments is return on average tangible equity, which excludes the effects of intangible assets and related amortization expenses.

 

       Years Ended December 31,  

(dollars in thousands)

   2005     2004     2003     2002     2001  

Net Interest Income

   $ 84,798     $ 74,628     $ 67,633     $ 59,594     $ 54,350  

Effect of Tax Benefit on Interest Income

     3,283       2,862       2,603       1,469       427  
                                        

Net Interest Income (TE) (1)

     88,081       77,490       70,236       61,063       54,777  
                                        

Noninterest Income

     26,141       23,217       23,064       17,866       15,144  

Effect of Tax Benefit on Noninterest Income

     1,066       896       820       652       149  
                                        

Noninterest Income (TE) (1)

     27,207       24,113       23,884       18,518       15,293  
                                        

Total Revenues (TE) (1)

   $ 115,288     $ 101,603     $ 94,120     $ 79,581     $ 70,070  
                                        

Total Noninterest Expense

   $ 64,438     $ 54,897     $ 50,629     $ 44,032     $ 41,711  

Less Intangible Amortization Expense

     (1,207 )     (885 )     (781 )     (243 )     (3,151 )
                                        

Tangible Operating Expense (2)

   $ 63,231     $ 54,012     $ 49,848     $ 43,789     $ 38,560  
                                        

Return on Average Equity

     8.41 %     12.98 %     13.05 %     13.12 %     10.83 %

Effect of Intangibles (2)

     5.55       6.54       6.52       4.66       6.68  
                                        

Return on Average Tangible Equity (2)

     13.96 %     19.52 %     19.57 %     17.78 %     17.51 %
                                        

Efficiency Ratio

     58.1 %     56.1 %     55.8 %     56.8 %     60.0 %

Effect of Tax Benefit Related to Tax Exempt Income

     (2.2 )     (2.1 )     (2.0 )     (1.5 )     (0.5 )
                                        

Efficiency Ratio (TE) (1)

     55.9 %     54.0 %     53.8 %     55.3 %     59.5 %

Effect of Amortization of Intangibles

     (1.1 )     (0.8 )     (0.8 )     (0.3 )     (4.5 )
                                        

Tangible Efficiency Ratio (TE) (1) (2)

     54.8 %     53.2 %     53.0 %     55.0 %     55.0 %
                                        

 

(1) Fully taxable equivalent (TE) calculations include the tax benefit associated with related income sources that are tax-exempt using a marginal tax rate of 35%.

 

(2) Tangible calculations eliminate the effect of goodwill and acquisition related intangible assets and the corresponding amortization expense on a tax-effected basis where applicable.

Exhibit 13

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

The following discussion and analysis is intended to assist readers in understanding the consolidated financial condition and results of operations of IBERIABANK Corporation (the “Company”) and its subsidiary as of December 31, 2004 and 2005 and for the years ended December 31, 2003 through 2005. This review should be read in conjunction with the audited consolidated financial statements, accompanying footnotes and supplemental financial data included herein.

The Company’s performance during 2005 was significantly impacted by two key factors:

 

    The acquisition of American Horizons Bancorp, Inc. (“American Horizons”) on January 31, 2005. This acquisition significantly increased the Company’s presence in Northeast Louisiana, positioning the Company as the second largest bank in the Monroe, West Monroe, Ruston and Bastrop market based on deposits. The Company recorded $650,000 of one-time expenses associated with the integration and conversion of American Horizons during the first quarter of 2005.

 

    The impact of Hurricanes Katrina and Rita, which struck south Louisiana in August and September, respectively. One-time charges associated with the storms included a loan loss provision of $14.4 million and expenses of $401,000 related primarily to facilities damage and employee relocation and assistance. The Company also estimates that fee income was reduced by approximately $66,000 as a result of the storms.

OVERVIEW

The Company’s net income for 2005 totaled $22.0 million, or $2.24 per share on a diluted basis. This is a 25.4% decrease compared to the $3.01 per share, or $27.3 million earned for 2004. In addition to the American Horizons acquisition and Hurricanes Katrina and Rita, earnings performance for 2005 was influenced by the acquisition of Alliance Bank of Baton Rouge (“Alliance”) in the first quarter of 2004 and other factors, the key components of which are summarized below.

 

    Total assets at December 31, 2005 were $2.9 billion, up $404.0 million, or 16.5%, from $2.4 billion at December 31, 2004. This growth level resulted from the $252.2 million asset base obtained through the American Horizons acquisition and strong organic growth totaling $151.8 million. Shareholders’ equity increased by $43.4 million, or 19.7%, from $220.2 million at December 31, 2004 to $263.6 million at December 31, 2005.

 

    Total loans at December 31, 2005 were $1.9 billion, an increase of $267.9 million, or 16.2%, from $1.7 billion at December 31, 2004. The increase from year end 2004 includes the $199.6 million loan base attributable to the American Horizons acquisition and internally generated growth of $68.3 million. At year-end, the commercial loan pipeline was strong with activity throughout the markets served by the Company.

 

    Total customer deposits increased $469.5 million, or 26.5%, from $1.8 billion at December 31, 2004 to $2.2 billion at December 31, 2005. The increase from year end 2004 resulted from excellent organic growth of $276.8 million and $192.7 million in customer deposits attributable to the American Horizons acquisition. The Company demonstrated strong deposit growth throughout most of 2005. This growth was boosted during the third and fourth quarters by the increased economic activity resulting from the commencement of clean up and rebuilding efforts throughout south Louisiana.

 

    Net interest income for the year increased $10.2 million, or 13.6%, in 2005 versus 2004. This increase is largely attributable to a $78.1 million increase in average net earning assets. The corresponding net interest margin ratio on a tax-equivalent basis declined six basis points to 3.54% from 3.60% for the years ended December 31, 2005 and 2004, respectively, due to the re-pricing mix of the Company’s assets and liabilities.

 

1


    Noninterest income increased $2.9 million, or 12.6%, for 2005 as compared to 2004. The increase was driven by higher service charge revenues on deposit accounts, ATM/debit card fees, broker-dealer commissions and gains on the sale of excess properties. These increases were partially offset by reduced gains on the sale of investments and loans.

 

    Noninterest expense increased by $9.5 million, or 17.4%, for 2005 as compared to 2004. The largest components of the increase were higher compensation expense as a result of additional staff related to the American Horizons acquisition and strategic hires, higher occupancy and equipment costs due to the Company’s expansion, one-time expenses associated with the integration and conversion of American Horizons and one-time expenses associated with damages and other costs resulting from Hurricanes Katrina and Rita.

 

    The Company provided $17.1 million for possible loan losses during 2005, compared to $4.0 million in 2004. Of the $17.1 million provision, $14.4 million relates to the additional credit risk resulting from Hurricanes Katrina and Rita. As of December 31, 2005, the allowance for loan losses as a percent of total loans was 1.98%, compared to 1.22% at December 31, 2004. Net charge-offs for 2005 were $3.6 million, or 0.20%, of average loans on an annualized basis, compared to $2.7 million, or 0.18%, a year earlier. The Company incurred $1.1 million in net charge-offs associated with Hurricane Katrina. No charge-offs were associated with Hurricane Rita during the year. The coverage of net charge-offs by the provision for loan losses was 4.68 times for 2005 and 1.47 times for 2004. The coverage of nonperforming assets by the allowance for loan losses was 6.31 times at the end of 2005, as compared to 3.27 times at December 31, 2004.

 

    In September 2005, the Company announced a significant branch expansion initiative in response to client needs and opportunities presented by Hurricanes Katrina and Rita. Based on the expansion initiative, the Company initially planned to open twelve new banking facilities in existing markets and other Louisiana locations not previously served by the Company. The Company achieved progress toward that goal during 2005 and expanded the initiative further than previously planned, including expansion plans for two new offices in the Shreveport/Bossier City market.

 

    In July 2005, the Company’s Board of Directors declared a five-for-four stock split in the form of a 25% stock dividend. The dividend was paid on August 15, 2005 to shareholders of record as of August 1, 2005. As a result of the stock split, shareholders received one additional share for every four shares held. Unless otherwise indicated, all share and per share amounts have been restated to reflect the stock split.

 

    During 2005, the Company’s Board of Directors declared cash dividends totaling $1.00 per common share, an 18% increase compared to 2004.

Given the unprecedented devastation caused by Hurricanes Katrina and Rita, the Company faced unique obstacles in 2005. Compared to many of our competitors, the Company was spared the brunt of these two events. Accordingly, the Company quickly focused on the opportunities presented by the massive rebuilding efforts ahead of the region. The Company’s branch expansion initiative is focused on capturing market share in the areas most significantly impacted by the storms and further expansion of existing markets.

Exclusive of the storms, the Company continued its successful expansion into new Louisiana markets and penetration of existing markets in 2005. The American Horizons acquisition vaulted the Company to the #2 position in deposit share in the Monroe, West Monroe, Ruston and Bastrop market. The Company’s de novo branch in Shreveport, Louisiana and new loan production offices (“LPOs”) met management’s expectations throughout the year. Given the success of the Company’s expansion efforts, the Company analyzes the potential for growth in new and existing markets continually.

The Company’s focus is that of a high performing institution. Management believes that improvement in core earnings drives shareholder value and has adopted a mission statement that is designed to provide guidance for management, our associates and Board of Directors regarding the sense of purpose and direction of the Company. We are very shareholder and client focused, expect high performance from our associates, believe in a strong sense of community and strive to make the Company a great place to work. Earnings guidance, based on expectations of the Company, is provided during the year through press releases, which are available on our website at

 

2


www.iberiabank.com and also disclosed through Form 8-K current event filings with the Securities and Exchange Commission (“SEC”) at www.sec.gov.

Inherent in any organization are risks associated with the industry in which it operates. The most important risk factors affecting the success of the Company are believed to be the management of loan credit risk and interest rate risk, which are discussed under their respective sections entitled “Asset Quality and Allowance for Loan Losses” and “Asset/ Liability Management and Market Risk” later in this discussion. Other key risks include, but are not limited to, operating risk, legal risk and acquisition risk. Operating risk is the risk of loss resulting from inadequate or failed internal processes, people or systems or from external events. Legal risk is the risk of legal proceedings against the Company and regulatory reviews that arise in the course of business. Acquisition risk is the risk that the Company may not realize expected revenue increases, cost savings, increases in geographic or product presence, and/or other projected benefits from an acquisition.

APPLICATION OF CRITICAL ACCOUNTING POLICIES

In preparing financial reports, management is required to apply significant judgment to various accounting, reporting and disclosure matters. Management must use assumptions and estimates to apply these principles where actual measurement is not possible or practical. The accounting principles and methods used by the Company conform with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States and general banking practices. Estimates and assumptions most significant to the Company relate primarily to the allowance for loan losses, valuation of goodwill, intangible assets and other purchase accounting adjustments and stock based compensation. These significant estimates and assumptions are summarized in the following discussion and are further analyzed in the footnotes to the consolidated financial statements.

Allowance for Loan Losses

The determination of the allowance for loan losses, which represents management’s estimate of probable losses inherent in the Company’s credit portfolio, involves a high degree of judgment and complexity. The Company’s policy is to establish reserves for estimated losses on delinquent and other problem loans when it is determined that losses are expected to be incurred on such loans. Management’s determination of the adequacy of the allowance is based on various factors, including an evaluation of the portfolio, past loss experience, current economic conditions, the volume and type of lending conducted by the Company, composition of the portfolio, the amount of the Company’s classified assets, seasoning of the loan portfolio, the status of past due principal and interest payments, and other relevant factors. Changes in such estimates may have a significant impact on the financial statements. For further discussion of the allowance for loan losses, see the Asset Quality and Allowance for Loan Losses section of this analysis and Note 1 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

Valuation of Goodwill, Intangible Assets and Other Purchase Accounting Adjustments

The Company accounts for acquisitions in accordance with Statement of Financial Accounting Standards (“SFAS”) No. 141, “Business Combinations,” which requires the use of the purchase method of accounting. For purchase acquisitions, the Company is required to record the assets acquired, including identified intangible assets, and liabilities assumed at their fair value, which in many instances involves estimates based on third party valuations, such as appraisals, or internal valuations based on discounted cash flow analyses or other valuation techniques. The determination of the useful lives of intangible assets is subjective as is the appropriate amortization period for such intangible assets. In addition, purchase acquisitions typically result in recording goodwill. The Company performs a goodwill valuation at least annually. Impairment testing of goodwill is a two step process that first compares the fair value of goodwill with its carrying amount, and second measures impairment loss by comparing the implied fair value of goodwill with the carrying amount of that goodwill. Based on management’s goodwill impairment tests, there was no impairment of goodwill at December 31, 2004 or 2005. For additional information on goodwill and intangible assets, see Note 7 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

3


Stock-based Compensation

The Company has historically accounted for its stock option plans under the intrinsic value method of Accounting Principles Board (APB) Opinion No. 25, Accounting for Stock Issued to Employees . In accordance with APB Opinion No. 25, compensation expense relating to stock options has not been reflected in net income as the exercise price of the stock options granted equaled or exceeded the market value of the underlying common stock at the date of grant. Given the Company’s election to apply the accounting methodology in APB Opinion No. 25, management is required to provide proforma disclosures of net income and earnings per share and other disclosures, as if the fair value based method of accounting had been applied. Management utilizes the Black-Scholes option valuation model to estimate the fair value of stock options. The option valuation model requires the input of highly subjective assumptions, including the expected stock price volatility. These subjective input assumptions materially affect the fair value estimate.

In December 2004, the Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) issued SFAS No. 123(R), Share-Based Payment. SFAS No. 123(R) revises SFAS No. 123 and calls for companies to expense the fair value of employee stock options and other forms of stock-based compensation. The Company adopted SFAS No. 123(R) as of January 1, 2006. This represents a significant change in practice for the Company.

SFAS No. 123(R) requires companies to (1) use fair value to measure stock-based compensation awards and (2) cease using the “intrinsic value” method of accounting, which APB Opinion No. 25 allowed and resulted in no expense for many awards of stock options for which the exercise price of the option equaled the price of the underlying stock at the grant date. Under SFAS No. 123(R), the fair value of a stock-based compensation award is recognized over the employee’s service period.

On December 30, 2005, the Board of Directors approved the immediate acceleration of vesting of all outstanding stock options awarded to employees, officers and directors. As a result of the acceleration, the Company recorded $470,000 of compensation expense in 2005. By accelerating the vesting of these options, the Company estimates that approximately $6.5 million of pre-tax future compensation expense will be eliminated.

For additional discussion of the Company’s stock options plans, see Note 15 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

FINANCIAL CONDITION

Earning Assets

Earning assets are composed of interest or dividend-bearing assets, including loans, securities, short-term investments and loans held for sale. Interest income associated with earning assets is the Company’s primary source of income. Earning assets averaged $2.5 billion during 2005, a $333.5 million, or 15.6%, increase compared to $2.1 billion during 2004. This is primarily the result of the American Horizons acquisition and moderate organic loan growth.

 

4


The year-end mix of earning assets shown in the following chart reflects the mix between investment securities and the major loan groups.

LOGO

Loans and Leases – The loan portfolio increased $267.9 million, or 16.2%, to $1.9 billion at December 31, 2005, compared to $1.7 billion at December 31, 2004. This increase includes the $199.6 million loan base attributable to the American Horizons acquisition. Loan growth during 2005 was tempered by the Company’s portfolio management process associated with the American Horizons acquisition and anticipated pay downs during the first nine months of the year. The commercial loan portfolio was most significantly impacted by these factors.

The Company’s loan to deposit ratio at December 31, 2005 and December 31, 2004 was 85.5% and 93.1%, respectively. The percentage of fixed rate loans within the total loan portfolio increased from 65% at the end of 2004 to 70% as of December 31, 2005.

The following table sets forth the composition of the Company’s loan portfolio as of December 31 for the years indicated.

TABLE 1 – LOAN AND LEASE PORTFOLIO COMPOSITION

 

     December 31,  

(dollars in thousands)

   2005     2004     2003     2002     2001  

Commercial loans:

                         

Real estate

   $ 545,868    29 %   $ 419,427    25 %   $ 352,031    25 %   $ 254,688    25 %   $ 228,284    24 %

Business

     376,966    19       307,614    19       201,020    14       159,339    15       117,530    12  
                                                                 

Total commercial loans

     922,834    48       727,041    44       553,051    39       414,027    40       345,814    36  
                                                                 

Mortgage loans:

                         

Residential 1-4 family

     430,111    22       387,079    23       338,965    24       207,130    20       198,403    21  

Construction

     30,611    2       33,031    2       50,295    4       16,470    1       5,915    1  
                                                                 

Total mortgage loans

     460,722    24       420,110    25       389,260    28       223,600    21       204,318    22  
                                                                 

Loans to individuals:

                         

Indirect automobile

     229,646    12       222,480    14       229,636    16       219,280    21       220,698    23  

Home equity

     230,363    12       213,533    13       174,740    12       122,799    12       114,056    12  

Other

     74,951    4       67,462    4       65,662    5       64,786    6       71,129    7  
                                                                 

Total consumer loans

     534,960    28       503,475    31       470,038    33       406,865    39       405,883    42  
                                                                 

Total loans receivable

   $ 1,918,516    100 %   $ 1,650,626    100 %   $ 1,412,349    100 %   $ 1,044,492    100 %   $ 956,015    100 %
                                                                 

 

5


Commercial Loans. Commercial real estate and commercial business loans generally have shorter repayment periods and more frequent repricing opportunities than residential 1-4 family loans. Commercial loans increased $195.8 million during 2005. The Company acquired $156.3 million in commercial loans as a result of the American Horizons acquisition. Commercial loans as a percentage of total loans have increased from 44% as of December 31, 2004 to 48% as of December 31, 2005. During the third quarter of 2005, the Company sold a pool of $3.7 million of nonperforming loans to an unrelated third party. Most of the $3.7 million balance related to commercial loans.

The Company has increased its investment in commercial real estate loans from $419.4 million, or 25.4% of the total loan portfolio, as of December 31, 2004, to $545.9 million, or 28.5% of the total loan portfolio, as of December 31, 2005. The vast majority of properties securing the Company’s commercial real estate loans are located in the Company’s market area, and include owner-occupied, multi-family, strip shopping centers, professional office buildings, small retail establishments and warehouses. The Company’s underwriting standards generally provide for loan terms of three to five years, with amortization schedules of no more than twenty years. Low loan-to-value ratios are maintained and usually limited to no more than 80%. As a rule, the Company obtains personal guarantees of the principals as additional security for most commercial real estate loans.

As of December 31, 2005, the Company’s commercial business loans amounted to $377.0 million, or 19.6% of the Company’s gross loan portfolio. This represents a $69.4 million, or 22.5% increase from December 31, 2004. The Company originates commercial business loans on a secured and, to a lesser extent, unsecured basis. The Company’s commercial business loans may be structured as term loans or revolving lines of credit. Term loans are generally structured with terms of no more than three to five years, with amortization schedules of no more than seven years. The Company’s commercial business term loans are generally secured by equipment, machinery or other corporate assets. The Company also provides for revolving lines of credit generally structured as advances upon perfected security interests in accounts receivable and inventory. Revolving lines of credit generally have an annual maturity. As a rule, the Company obtains personal guarantees of the principals as additional security for commercial business loans.

The commercial loan pipeline was strong at December 31, 2005 with activity throughout the markets served by the Company.

Mortgage Loans. Residential 1-4 family loans comprise substantially all of the Company’s mortgage loans. The vast majority of the Company’s residential 1-4 family mortgage loan portfolio is secured by properties located in its market area and originated under terms and documentation which permit their sale in the secondary market. Larger mortgage loans of private banking clients and prospects are generally retained to enhance relationships, and also due to the expected shorter durations and relatively lower servicing costs associated with loans of this size.

The Company continues to sell the majority of conforming mortgage loan originations in the secondary market and recognize the associated fee income rather than assume the rate risk associated with these longer term assets. The Company also releases the servicing of these loans. Excluding $3.5 million in mortgage loans attributable to the American Horizons acquisition, total residential mortgage loans increased $37.1 million compared to December 31, 2004. This growth is primarily related to credit extended to high net worth individuals through the private banking area. At December 31, 2005, $331.8 million, or 72%, of the Company’s residential 1-4 family mortgage and construction loans were fixed rate loans and $128.9 million, or 28%, were adjustable rate loans.

Consumer Loans. The Company offers consumer loans in order to provide a full range of retail financial services to its customers. The Company originates substantially all of such loans in its primary market area. At December 31, 2005, $535.0 million, or 27.9% of the Company’s total loan portfolio, was comprised of consumer loans, compared to $503.5 million, or 30.5% at the end of 2004. Excluding $39.8 million in consumer loans attributable to the American Horizons acquisition, total consumer loans decreased $8.3 million compared to December 31, 2004.

Home equity loans comprised the largest component of the Company’s consumer loan portfolio at December 31, 2005. The balance of home equity loans increased $16.8 million, or 7.9% from $213.5 million at December 31, 2004 to $230.4 million at December 31, 2005. The Company acquired $23.9 million in home equity loans as a result of the American Horizons acquisition.

 

6


Indirect automobile loans comprised the second largest component of the Company’s consumer loan portfolio. Independent automobile dealerships originate these loans and forward applications to Company personnel for approval or denial. The Company relies on the dealerships, in part, for loan qualifying information. To that extent, there is risk inherent in indirect automobile loans associated with fraud or negligence by the automobile dealership. To limit this risk, an emphasis is placed on established dealerships that have demonstrated reputable behavior, both within the communities we serve and through long-term relationships with the Company. The balance of indirect automobile loans increased from $222.5 million, or 13.5% of the Company’s total loan portfolio to $229.6 million, or 12.0% at December 31, 2004 and 2005, respectively, as the Company retained its focus on prime, or low risk, paper.

The remainder of the consumer loan portfolio at December 31, 2005 was composed of direct automobile loans, credit card loans and other consumer loans. At December 31, 2005, the Company’s direct automobile loans amounted to $23.4 million, or 1.2% of the Company’s total loan portfolio. The Company’s VISA and MasterCard credit card loans totaled $8.4 million, or 0.4% of the Company’s total loan portfolio at such date. The Company’s other personal consumer loans amounted to $43.1 million, or 2.2% of the Company’s total loan portfolio, at December 31, 2005.

Loan Maturities. The following table sets forth the scheduled contractual maturities of the Company’s loan portfolio at December 31, 2005, unadjusted for scheduled principal reductions, prepayments or repricing opportunities. Demand loans, loans having no stated schedule of repayments and no stated maturity and overdraft loans are reported as due in one year or less. The average life of a loan may be substantially less than the contractual terms because of prepayments. As a result, scheduled contractual amortization of loans is not reflective of the expected term of the Company’s loan portfolio. Of the loans with maturities greater than one year, approximately 83% of the value of these loans bears a fixed rate of interest.

TABLE 2 – LOAN MATURITIES BY TYPE

 

(dollars in thousands)

  

One Year

Or Less

  

One
Through

Five Years

  

After

Five Years

   Total

Commercial real estate

   $ 144,050    $ 286,638    $ 115,180    $ 545,868

Commercial business

     155,108      136,871      84,987      376,966

Mortgage

     13,018      26,161      421,543      460,722

Consumer

     131,675      245,430      157,855      534,960
                           

Total

   $ 443,851    $ 695,100    $ 779,565    $ 1,918,516
                           

Asset Quality and Allowance for Loan Losses – Over time, the loan portfolio has transitioned to be more representative of a commercial bank. Accordingly, there is the potential for a higher level of return for investors, but also of the potential for higher charge-off and nonperforming levels. In recognition of this, management has tightened underwriting guidelines and procedures, adopted more conservative loan charge-off and nonaccrual guidelines, rewritten the loan policy, developed an internal loan review function and significantly increased the allowance for loan losses. As a result of management’s enhancements to underwriting risk/return dynamics within the loan portfolio over time, the credit quality of the Company’s assets has remained strong. Management believes that historically it has recognized and disclosed significant problem loans quickly and taken prompt action in addressing material weaknesses in those credits. The Company will continue to monitor the risk adjusted level of return within the loan portfolio.

Written underwriting standards established by the Board of Directors and management govern the lending activities of the Company. The commercial credit department, in conjunction with senior lending personnel, underwrites all commercial business and commercial real estate loans. The Company provides centralized underwriting of all residential mortgage, construction and consumer loans. Established loan origination procedures require appropriate documentation including financial data and credit reports. For loans secured by real property, the Company generally requires property appraisals, title insurance or a title opinion, hazard insurance and flood insurance, where appropriate.

 

7


Loan payment performance is monitored and late charges are assessed on past due accounts. A centralized department collects delinquent loans. Every effort is made to minimize any potential loss, including instituting legal proceedings, as necessary. Commercial loans of the Company are periodically reviewed through a loan review process. All other loans are also subject to loan review through a periodic sampling process.

The Company utilizes an asset risk classification system in compliance with guidelines established by the Federal Reserve Board as part of its efforts to improve commercial asset quality. In connection with examinations of insured institutions, both federal and state examiners also have the authority to identify problem assets and, if appropriate, classify them. There are three classifications for problem assets: “substandard,” “doubtful” and “loss.” Substandard assets have one or more defined weaknesses and are characterized by the distinct possibility that the insured institution will sustain some loss if the deficiencies are not corrected. Doubtful assets have the weaknesses of substandard assets with the additional characteristic that the weaknesses make collection or liquidation in full questionable and there is a high probability of loss based on currently existing facts, conditions and values. An asset classified as loss is not considered collectable and of such little value that continuance as an asset of the Company is not warranted. Commercial loans with adverse classifications are reviewed by the Loan Committee of the Board of Directors at least monthly. Loans are placed on nonaccrual status when, in the judgment of management, the probability of collection of interest is deemed to be insufficient to warrant further accrual. When a loan is placed on nonaccrual status, previously accrued but unpaid interest for the current year is deducted from interest income. Prior year interest is charged-off to the allowance for loan losses.

At December 31, 2005, the Company had $24.0 million of assets classified as substandard, $804,000 of assets classified as doubtful, and no assets classified as loss. At such date, the aggregate of the Company’s classified assets amounted to 0.87% of total assets.

Real estate acquired by the Company as a result of foreclosure or by deed-in-lieu of foreclosure is classified as real estate owned until sold, and is carried at the balance of the loan at the time of acquisition or at estimated fair value less estimated costs to sell, whichever is less.

Under Generally Accepted Accounting Principles, the Company is required to account for certain loan modifications or restructurings as “troubled debt restructurings.” In general, the modification or restructuring of a debt constitutes a troubled debt restructuring if the Company for economic or legal reasons related to the borrower’s financial difficulties grants a concession to the borrower that the Company would not otherwise consider under current market conditions. Debt restructurings or loan modifications for a borrower do not necessarily always constitute troubled debt restructurings, however, and troubled debt restructurings do not necessarily result in nonaccrual loans. The Company had no troubled debt restructurings as of December 31, 2005.

Nonperforming loans, defined for these purposes as nonaccrual loans plus accruing loans past due 90 days or more, totaled $5.8 million and $5.7 million at December 31, 2005 and 2004, respectively. The Company’s foreclosed property amounted to $257,000 and $492,000 at December 31, 2005 and 2004, respectively. Nonperforming assets, which consist of nonperforming loans plus foreclosed property, were $6.0 million, or 0.21% of total assets at December 31, 2005, compared to $6.2 million, or 0.25% of total assets at December 31, 2004.

During the third quarter of 2005, the Company offered a 90-day payment deferral program on mortgage, consumer and small business loans in an effort to assist its loan customers in the areas most significantly impacted by the hurricanes. This program was extended beyond the initial 90-day period for selected borrowers. The deferral program could have the effect of reducing past due, charge offs and nonperforming loans at December 31, 2005.

The Company has shown continuing improvement in asset quality despite significant loan growth over the past five years. The following table sets forth the composition of the Company’s nonperforming assets, including accruing loans past due 90 or more days, as of the dates indicated.

 

8


TABLE 3 – NONPERFORMING ASSETS AND TROUBLED DEBT RESTRUCTURINGS

 

     December 31,  

(dollars in thousands)

   2005     2004     2003     2002     2001  

Nonaccrual loans:

          

Commercial, financial and agricultural

   $ 2,377     $ 1,936     $ 1,838     $ 1,693     $ 4,088  

Mortgage

     384       735       552       334       122  

Loans to individuals

     2,012       1,784       1,512       1,230       1,053  
                                        

Total nonaccrual loans

     4,773       4,455       3,902       3,257       5,263  

Accruing loans 90 days or more past due

     1,003       1,209       1,220       1,086       1,691  
                                        

Total nonperforming loans (1)

     5,776       5,664       5,122       4,343       6,954  

Foreclosed property

     257       492       2,134       2,267       6,009  
                                        

Total nonperforming assets (1)

     6,033       6,156       7,256       6,610       12,963  

Performing troubled debt restructurings

     —         —         —         —         —    
                                        

Total nonperforming assets and troubled debt restructurings (1)

   $ 6,033     $ 6,156     $ 7,256     $ 6,610     $ 12,963  
                                        

Nonperforming loans to total loans (1)

     0.30 %     0.34 %     0.36 %     0.42 %     0.73 %

Nonperforming assets to total assets (1)

     0.21 %     0.25 %     0.34 %     0.42 %     0.91 %

Nonperforming assets and troubled debt restructurings to total assets (1)

     0.21 %     0.25 %     0.34 %     0.42 %     0.91 %

 

(1) Nonperforming loans and assets include accruing loans 90 days or more past due

Allowance For Loan Losses. Based on facts and circumstances available, management of the Company believes that the allowance for loan losses was adequate at December 31, 2005 to cover any potential losses in the Company’s loan portfolio. However, future adjustments to this allowance may be necessary, and the Company’s results of operations could be adversely affected if circumstances differ substantially from the assumptions used by management in determining the allowance for loan losses. Losses in the loan portfolio, net of recoveries, are charged-off against the allowance and reduce the balance. Provisions for loan losses, which are charged against income, increase the allowance.

In determining the amount of the allowance for loan losses, management uses information from its portfolio management process, relationship managers and ongoing loan review efforts to stratify the loan portfolio into asset risk classifications. Based on this information, management assigns a general or specific reserve allocation. The foundation for the allowance is a detailed review of the overall loan portfolio and its performance. The portfolio is segmented into homogenous pools (i.e., commercial, business banking, consumer, mortgage, indirect, and credit card), which are analyzed based on risk factors, current and historical performance and specific loan reviews (for significant loans). Consideration is given to the specific risk within these segments, the maturity of these segments (e.g., rapid growth versus fully seasoned), the Company’s strategy for each segment (e.g., growth versus maintain), and the historical loss rate for these segments both at the Company and its peers. Consideration is also given to the impact of a number of relevant external factors that influence components of the loan portfolio or the portfolio as a whole, including current and projected economic conditions.

Loan portfolios tied to acquisitions made during the year are incorporated into the Company’s allowance process. If the acquisition has an impact on the level of exposure to a particular segment, industry or geographic market, this increase in exposure is factored into the allowance determination process. Generally, acquisitions have higher levels of risk of loss based on differences in credit culture, portfolio management practices and the Company’s emphasis on early detection and management of deteriorating loans. The Company added $4.9 million to the allowance for loan losses as a result of the application of the Company’s allowance methodology on the American Horizons’ loan portfolio.

 

9


General reserve estimated loss percentages are based on the current and historical loss experience of each loan category, regulatory guidelines for losses, the status of past due payments, and management’s judgment of economic conditions and the related level of risk assumed. Relative to homogenous loan pools such as mortgage, consumer, indirect and credits cards, the Company has established a general reserve level using information such as actual loan losses, the seasoning of the pool, identified loan impairment, acquisitions, and current and projected economic conditions. General reserves for these pools are adjusted for loans that are considered past due, based on the correlation between historical losses and the payment performance of a loan pool.

The commercial segment of the Company’s loan portfolio is initially assigned a general reserve also based on performance of that portion of the loan portfolio and other general factors discussed earlier. The commercial portion of the portfolio is further segmented by collateral type, which based on experience has a direct relationship to the level of loss experienced if a problem develops. Reserves are set based on management’s assessment of this risk of loss. As commercial loans deteriorate, the Company reviews each for impairment and proper loan grading. Loans on the Company’s Watch List carry higher levels of reserve based largely on a higher level of loss experience for these loans. Loss experience for Watch List loans is reviewed periodically during the year.

Specific reserves are determined for commercial loans individually based on management’s evaluation of loss exposure for each credit, given current payment status of the loan and the value of any underlying collateral. Loans for which specific reserves are provided are excluded from the general reserve calculations described above to prevent duplicate reserves. Additionally, an unallocated reserve for the total loan portfolio is established to address the imprecision and estimation risk inherent in the calculations of general and specific reserves, and management’s evaluation of various conditions that are not directly measured by any other component of the allowance. Such components would include current economic conditions affecting key lending areas, credit quality trends, collateral values, loan volumes and concentrations, seasoning of the loan portfolio and the findings of internal credit examinations.

Based on the allowance determination process, the Company determines the current potential risk of loss that exists in the portfolio, even if not fully reflected in current credit statistics, such as nonperforming assets or nonperforming loans. To determine risk of loss, and in turn the appropriateness of the allowance, the Company extends its analysis to a number of other factors, including the level of delinquencies and delinquency trends; the level and mix of Criticized, Classified and Pass/Watch loans; reserve levels relative to nonperforming assets, nonperforming loans, and net charge-offs; the level and trend in consumer and commercial bankruptcies; and financial performance trends in specific businesses and industries to which the Company lends. In response to rapid growth and changes in the mix of the loan portfolio, the Company has increased its required allowance over time and feels that the allowance adequately reflects the current level of risk and incurred losses within the loan portfolio.

Due to the unprecedented devastation caused by Hurricanes Katrina and Rita in August and September 2005, respectively, the Company performed an extensive review of the loan portfolios impacted by these storms. Immediately after each of these storms passed, the Company’s credit team began intense analysis of affected portfolios, client flood and property and casualty insurance coverage, impacts on sources of repayment and underlying collateral, and client payment probability. This analysis was aided by flood mapping technology, physical inspection, and client contact.

The framework for the analysis involved first determining which clients were in the affected areas. Second, clients were grouped by segment type (e.g., commercial, private banking, mortgage, indirect automobile, etc.). Third, segmented clients were analyzed in detail and divided into three risk categories (i.e., low, medium and high). Low risk clients had no impact, or relatively insignificant impact, as a result of the storm. Medium risk clients had an impact on their primary or secondary sources of repayment, but had adequate liquidity to satisfy their obligations. Finally, high risk clients had potentially significant problems that affected both primary and secondary sources of repayment. Reserve levels were then placed against particular loans based on estimated default levels and loss expectations. For example, for residential mortgage loans, a 50% default rate was assumed for high risk clients on the gross loan balance outstanding (not net of estimated insurance proceeds), and a 40% loss rate was assumed. Medium risk residential mortgage clients were assumed to have a 35% default rate and a loss rate of 20%. Low risk clients were assumed to have a 20% default rate and a 10% loss rate. Similar methodologies were used for other

 

10


segments and risk categories, though default rates and loss expectation levels differed between various segments and categories. No material consideration was given for any federal assistance or private mortgage insurance, and only minimal land values were assumed. Additional federal and/or state assistance may be forthcoming, but the outcome is uncertain at this time. Private mortgage insurance exists for 6% and 11% of residential mortgage loans affected by Hurricanes Katrina and Rita, respectively. Given limited real estate transaction closings since the hurricanes, no reliable determination can be made regarding land values at this stage. The risk classifications and reserve allocation methodology are subject to change as particular situations continue to evolve.

As a result of this analysis, the Company recorded hurricane-related loan loss provisions of $12.8 million and $1.6 million for Hurricanes Katrina and Rita, respectively.

The following table presents the allocation of the allowance for loan losses and the percentage of the total amount of loans in each loan category listed as of the dates indicated.

TABLE 4 – ALLOCATION OF THE ALLOWANCE FOR LOAN LOSSES

 

     December 31,  
     2005     2004     2003     2002     2001  
     Reserve
%
    % of
Loans
    Reserve
%
    % of
Loans
    Reserve
%
    % of
Loans
    Reserve
%
    % of
Loans
    Reserve
%
    % of
Loans
 

Commercial, financial and agricultural

   50 %   48 %   55 %   44 %   51 %   39 %   48 %   40 %   46 %   36 %

Real estate – mortgage

   14     22     5     23     5     24     4     20     5     21  

Real estate – construction

   1     2     —       2     1     4     —       1     —       1  

Loans to individuals

   28     28     30     31     31     33     38     39     45     42  

Unallocated

   7     —       10     —       12     —       10     —       4     —    
                                                            

Total allowance for loan losses

   100 %   100 %   100 %   100 %   100 %   100 %   100 %   100 %   100 %   100 %
                                                            

The allowance for loan losses amounted to $38.1 million, or 1.98% and 659.3% of total loans and total nonperforming loans, respectively, at December 31, 2005 compared to 1.22% and 355.2%, respectively, at December 31, 2004. The allowance for loan losses increased $18.0 million, or 89.3%, from $20.1 million at December 31, 2004. The increase included a $17.1 million provision for loan losses and $4.9 million assigned to loans acquired as part of the American Horizons acquisition. Net charge-offs for 2005 were $3.6 million, or 0.20% of total average loans, up from $2.7 million, or 0.18% in 2004. The increase in net charge offs was due to the $1.1 million in net charge-offs recorded as a result of Hurricane Katrina. The following table sets forth the activity in the Company’s allowance for loan losses during the periods indicated.

 

11


TABLE 5 – SUMMARY OF ACTIVITY IN THE ALLOWANCE FOR LOAN LOSSES

 

     Years Ended December 31,  

(dollars in thousands)

   2005     2004     2003     2002     2001  

Allowance at beginning of period

   $ 20,116     $ 18,230     $ 13,101     $ 11,117     $ 10,239  

Addition due to purchase transaction

     4,893       587       2,439       —         —    

Adjustment for loans transferred to held for sale

     (350 )     —         —         —         —    

Provision charged to operations

     17,069       4,041       6,300       6,197       5,046  

Charge-offs:

          

Commercial, financial and agricultural

     1,432       986       1,617       1,331       1,861  

Mortgage

     471       91       37       60       15  

Loans to individuals

     3,638       3,035       3,128       3,391       2,797  
                                        

Total charge-offs

     5,541       4,112       4,782       4,782       4,673  
                                        

Recoveries:

          

Commercial, financial and agricultural

     539       272       504       68       110  

Mortgage

     3       1       21       35       17  

Loans to individuals

     1,353       1,097       647       466       378  
                                        

Total recoveries

     1,895       1,370       1,172       569       505  
                                        

Net charge-offs

     3,646       2,742       3,610       4,213       4,168  
                                        

Allowance at end of period

   $ 38,082     $ 20,116     $ 18,230     $ 13,101     $ 11,117  
                                        

Allowance for loan losses to nonperforming assets (1)

     631.2 %     326.8 %     251.2 %     198.2 %     85.8 %

Allowance for loan losses to total loans at end of period

     1.98 %     1.22 %     1.29 %     1.25 %     1.16 %

Net charge-offs to average loans

     0.20 %     0.18 %     0.28 %     0.43 %     0.44 %

 

(1) Nonperforming loans and assets include accruing loans 90 days or more past due

Investment Securities The Company’s investment securities consist primarily of securities issued by the U.S. Government and federal agency obligations, obligations of state and political subdivisions and mortgage-backed securities. As of December 31, 2005, the Company’s investment securities available for sale amounted to $543.5 million, which includes a pre-tax net unrealized loss of $9.8 million, and its investment securities held to maturity amounted to $29.1 million with a pre-tax net unrealized gain of $250,000. At such date, investment securities available for sale consisted of $406.3 million of mortgage-backed securities, $39.7 million of obligations of state and political subdivisions, and $97.4 million of U.S. Government and federal agency obligations. At December 31, 2005, investment securities held to maturity consisted of $7.7 million of mortgage-backed securities, $13.3 million of obligations of state and political subdivisions, and $8.1 million of U.S. Government and federal agency obligations.

Investment securities increased by an aggregate of $5.6 million, or 1.0%, to $572.6 million at December 31, 2005. This is compared to $567.0 million at December 31, 2004. This increase was due to investment securities of $11.5 million obtained through the acquisition of American Horizons and purchases of investment securities amounting to $137.5 million, both of which were partially offset by $106.7 million from maturities, prepayments and calls, $24.0 million from sales of investment securities, $1.9 million from the amortization of premiums and accretion of discounts, and a decrease of $10.8 million in the market value of investment securities available for sale. Funds generated as a result of sales and prepayments were used to fund loan growth and purchase other securities. The Company continues to monitor market conditions and take advantage of market opportunities with appropriate rate and risk return elements. Note 3 of the Consolidated Financial Statements provides further information on the Company’s investment securities.

Short-term Investments Short-term investments result from excess funds that fluctuate daily depending on the funding needs of the Company and are currently invested overnight in an interest-bearing deposit account at the Federal Home Loan Bank (“FHLB”) of Dallas, the total balance of which earns interest at the current FHLB discount rate. The balance in interest-bearing deposits at other institutions increased $40.8 million, or 211.0%, from $19.3

 

12


million at December 31, 2004 to $60.1 million at December 31, 2005. The average rate on these funds during 2005 was 3.20%, compared to 1.46% during 2004.

Mortgage Loans Held for Sale Loans held for sale increased $2.4 million, or 29.7%, to $10.5 million at December 31, 2005 compared to $8.1 million at December 31, 2004. Loans held for sale have primarily been fixed rate single-family residential mortgage loans under contract to be sold in the secondary market. In most cases, loans in this category are sold within thirty days. Buyers generally have recourse to return a purchased loan to the Company under limited circumstances. Recourse conditions may include early payment default, breach of representations or warranties, and documentation deficiencies. During 2005, approximately 81% of total single-family mortgage originations of the Company were sold in the secondary market as compared to 89% in 2004.

Other Assets The following table details the changes in other assets at the dates indicated.

TABLE 6 – OTHER ASSETS COMPOSITION

 

     December 31,

(dollars in thousands)

   2005    2004    2003    2002    2001

Cash and due from banks

   $ 66,697    $ 33,940    $ 49,273    $ 37,022    $ 35,945

Premises and equipment

     55,010      39,557      31,992      18,161      19,455

Goodwill

     93,167      64,732      59,523      35,401      35,644

Bank-owned life insurance

     44,620      37,640      29,623      21,540      15,276

Other

     69,464      47,834      45,350      23,693      22,097
                                  

Total

   $ 328,958    $ 223,703    $ 215,761    $ 135,817    $ 128,417
                                  

The $32.8 million increase in cash and due from banks was primarily due to the high level of deposit growth experienced during 2005.

The $15.5 million increase in premises and equipment was primarily the result of the $7.2 million of fixed assets obtained through the American Horizons acquisition and land and building purchases associated with the Company’s expansion initiative announced in September 2005.

The $28.4 million increase in goodwill related to the American Horizons acquisition. The $7.0 million increase in bank-owned life insurance related primarily to a $5.0 million policy purchase, coupled with earnings on policies.

Other assets increased $21.6 million. The largest component of the increase is the result of the core deposit intangible ($4.6 million amortized value as of December 31, 2005) related to the American Horizons acquisition.

Funding Sources

Deposits obtained from clients in its primary market areas are the Company’s principal source of funds for use in lending and other business purposes. The Company attracts local deposit accounts by offering a wide variety of accounts, competitive interest rates and convenient branch office locations and service hours. Increasing core deposits through the development of client relationships is a continuing focus of the Company. Borrowings have become an increasingly important funding source as the Company has grown. Other funding sources include short-term and long-term borrowings, subordinated debt and shareholders’ equity. The following discussion highlights the major changes in the mix of deposits and other funding sources during 2005.

Deposits – The Company has been successful in raising deposits in the markets in which it has a presence and believes the increase to be the result of several factors including the development of customer relationships and opportunities in the public funds arena. The following table sets forth the composition of the Company’s deposits at the dates indicated.

 

13


TABLE 7 – DEPOSIT COMPOSITION

 

     December 31,  

(dollars in thousands)

   2005     2004     2003     2002     2001  

Noninterest-bearing DDA

   $ 350,065    15 %   $ 218,859    12 %   $ 189,786    12 %   $ 159,005    13 %   $ 154,580    12 %

NOW accounts

     575,379    26       532,584    30       449,938    28       281,825    23       243,685    20  

Savings and money market

     554,731    25       393,772    22       350,295    22       319,495    25       305,059    25  

Certificates of deposit

     762,781    34       628,274    36       599,087    38       481,907    39       534,070    43  
                                                                 

Total deposits

   $ 2,242,956    100 %   $ 1,773,489    100 %   $ 1,589,106    100 %   $ 1,242,232    100 %   $ 1,237,394    100 %
                                                                 

Deposits at December 31, 2005 reflected an increase of $469.5 million, or 26.5%, to $2.2 billion as compared to $1.8 billion at December 31, 2004. The growth in deposits included $192.7 million of deposits acquired from the acquisition of American Horizons. Since the end of 2004, noninterest-bearing checking accounts increased $131.2 million, or 59.9%, interest-bearing checking account deposits increased $42.8 million, or 8.0%, savings and money market accounts increased $161.0 million, or 40.9%, and certificate of deposit accounts increased $134.5 million, or 21.4%. Excluding the effect of American Horizons, noninterest-bearing checking accounts increased $91.6 million, or 41.9%, interest-bearing checking account deposits increased $2.4 million, or 0.5%, savings and money market accounts increased $138.0 million, or 35.0%, and certificate of deposit accounts increased $44.8 million, or 7.1%. At December 31, 2005, $350.1 million, or 15.6%, of the Company’s total deposits were noninterest-bearing, compared to $218.9 million, or 12.3%, at December 31, 2004.

Certificates of deposit $100,000 and over increased $75.7 million, or 32.1%, from $235.7 million at December 31, 2004 to $311.5 million at December 31, 2005. The following table shows large-denomination certificates of deposit by remaining maturities. Additional information regarding deposits is provided in Note 8 of the Consolidated Financial Statements.

TABLE 8 – REMAINING MATURITY OF CDS $100,000 AND OVER

 

     December 31,

(dollars in thousands)

   2005    2004    2003

3 months or less

   $ 87,411    $ 53,355    $ 67,555

Over 3 - 12 months

     120,966      81,908      87,869

Over 12 - 36 months

     90,681      72,126      35,906

More than 36 months

     12,412      28,335      24,329
                    

Total

   $ 311,470    $ 235,724    $ 215,659
                    

Borrowings and Debt – Advances from the FHLB of Dallas may be obtained by the Company upon the security of the common stock it owns in that bank and certain of its real estate loans and investment securities, provided certain standards related to creditworthiness have been met. Such advances are made pursuant to several credit programs, each of which has its own interest rate and range of maturities. The level of short-term borrowings can fluctuate significantly on a daily basis depending on funding needs and the source of funds chosen to satisfy those needs. Total short-term borrowings decreased $167.6 million, or 70.9%, to $68.8 million at December 31, 2005 compared to $236.5 million at December 31, 2004. The Company’s short-term borrowings at December 31, 2005 were comprised of $745,000 of advances from the FHLB of Dallas and $68.1 million of securities sold under agreements to repurchase. The average amount of short-term borrowings in 2005 was $143.1 million, compared to $188.6 million in 2004.

The Company’s short-term borrowings at December 31, 2004 were comprised of $192.0 million of advances from the FHLB of Dallas and $44.5 million of securities sold under agreements to repurchase. The average amount of short-term borrowings in 2004 was $188.6 million. The weighted average rate on short-term borrowings was 1.83% at December 31, 2005, compared to 2.01% at December 31, 2004. For additional information regarding short-term borrowings, see Note 9 of the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

14


The Company’s long-term borrowings increased $44.1 million, or 21.4%, to $250.2 million at December 31, 2005, compared to $206.1 million at December 31, 2004. The primary reason for the increase was due to $34.2 million in long term debt assumed as a result of the American Horizons acquisition. The majority of the Company’s long-term borrowings, $153.7 million, were comprised of fixed-rate advances from the FHLB of Dallas which cannot be paid off without incurring substantial prepayment penalties. Remaining FHLB advances of $55.0 million consist of variable rate advances based on three-month LIBOR.

The Company’s remaining debt of $37.3 million consists of junior subordinated deferrable interest debentures of the Company issued to statutory trusts that were funded by the issuance of floating rate capital securities of the trusts. The debentures qualify as Tier 1 Capital for regulatory purposes. Interest is payable quarterly and may be deferred at any time at the election of the Company for up to 20 consecutive quarterly periods. During any deferral period the Company is subject to certain restrictions, including being prohibited from declaring dividends to its common shareholders. The following table summarizes each outstanding issue of junior subordinated debt. For additional information, see Note 10 of the Consolidated Financial Statements.

TABLE 9 – JUNIOR SUBORDINATED DEBT COMPOSITION

 

Date Issued (dollars in thousands)

  

Term

  

Callable After

  

Interest Rate

   Amount
November 2002    30 years    5 years (2)    LIBOR plus 3.25%    $ 10,310
June 2003    30 years    5 years (2)    LIBOR plus 3.15%      10,310
September 2004    30 years    5 years (2)    LIBOR plus 2.00%      10,310
March 2003 (1)    30 years    5 years (2)    LIBOR plus 3.15%      6,351
               
Balance, December 31, 2005             $ 37,281
               

 

(1) Obtained via the American Horizons acquisition.

 

(2) Subject to regulatory requirements.

Shareholders’ Equity – Shareholders’ equity provides a source of permanent funding, allows for future growth and provides the Company with a cushion to withstand unforeseen adverse developments. At December 31, 2005, shareholders’ equity totaled $263.6 million, an increase of $43.4 million, or 19.7%, compared to $220.2 million at December 31, 2004. The following table details the changes in shareholders’ equity during 2005.

TABLE 10 – CHANGES IN SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY

 

(dollars in thousands)

   Amount  

Balance, December 31, 2004

   $ 220,162  

Common stock issued for acquisition

     47,737  

Net income

     22,000  

Common stock released by the Company’s ESOP trust

     622  

Common stock earned by participants in the Company’s RRP trust

     2,118  

Sale of treasury stock for stock options exercised

     3,565  

Cash dividends declared

     (9,582 )

Repurchases of common stock placed into treasury

     (17,504 )

Decrease in other comprehensive income

     (6,019 )

Stock based compensation cost

     470  
        

Balance, December 31, 2005

   $ 263,569  
        

On April 20, 2005, the Company announced a new Stock Repurchase Program authorizing the repurchase of up to 375,000 common shares. During the year ended December 31, 2005, the Company repurchased a total of 365,488 shares of its Common Stock under publicly announced Stock Repurchase Programs. The following table details these purchases during 2005.

 

15


TABLE 11 – STOCK REPURCHASES

 

Period

  

Number

of Shares
Purchased

  

Average
Price Paid

per Share

   Number of Shares
Purchased as Part
of Publicly
Announced
Repurchase Plans
   Maximum Number of
Shares that May Yet
Be Purchased Under
Repurchase Plans

January

   52,125    $ 48.48    52,125    93,666

February

   61,875    $ 48.69    61,875    31,791

April

   31,250    $ 49.14    31,250    541

May

   159,250    $ 47.07    159,250    216,291

June

   50,988    $ 47.70    50,988    165,303

September

   10,000    $ 50.15    10,000    155,303
                   

Total

   365,488    $ 47.89    365,488   
                   

No shares were repurchased during March, July, August, October, November, and December 2005. No shares were repurchased during the year ended December 31, 2005, other than through publicly announced plans.

On July 21, 2005, the Company announced the declaration of a five-for-four stock split in the form of a 25% stock dividend. The dividend was paid August 15, 2005 to shareholders of record as of August 1, 2005. All share and per share amounts have been restated to reflect the stock split.

RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

The Company reported net income of $22.0 million, $27.3 million and $23.6 million for the years ended December 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003, respectively. Earnings per share (“EPS”) on a diluted basis was $2.24 for 2005, $3.01 for 2004 and $2.74 for 2003. During 2005, interest income increased $26.7 million, interest expense increased $16.5 million, the provision for loan losses increased $13.0 million, noninterest income increased $2.9 million, noninterest expense increased $9.5 million and income tax expense decreased $4.1 million. Cash earnings, defined as net income before the amortization of acquisition intangibles, amounted to $22.8 million, $27.9 million and $24.1 million for the years ended December 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003, respectively. Included in earnings are the results of operations of American Horizons from the acquisition date of January 31, 2005, Alliance from the acquisition date of February 28, 2004 and Acadiana Bancshares, Inc. from the acquisition date of February 28, 2003 forward.

Net Interest Income Net interest income is the difference between interest realized on earning assets and interest paid on interest-bearing liabilities and is also the driver of core earnings. As such, it is subject to constant scrutiny by management. The rate of return and relative risk associated with earning assets are weighed to determine the appropriateness and mix of earning assets. Additionally, the need for lower cost funding sources is weighed against relationships with clients and future growth requirements. The Company’s average interest rate spread, which is the difference between the yields earned on earning assets and the rates paid on interest-bearing liabilities, was 3.23%, 3.40% and 3.67% during the years ended December 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003, respectively. The Company’s net interest margin on a taxable equivalent (TE) basis, which is net interest income (TE) as a percentage of average earning assets, was 3.54%, 3.60% and 3.89% during the years ended December 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003, respectively.

 

16


LOGO

Net interest income increased $10.2 million, or 13.6%, in 2005 to $84.8 million compared to $74.6 million in 2004. This increase was due to a $26.7 million, or 24.6%, increase in interest income, which was partially offset by a $16.5 million, or 48.7%, increase in interest expense. The improvement in net interest income was the result of increased volumes and an improved mix of earning assets and deposits. Although earnings improved through increased net interest income, the related net interest spread and margin ratios compressed, driven in part by the rise in short-term interest rates and the associated repricing of the Company’s assets and liabilities.

In 2004, net interest income increased $7.0 million, or 10.3%, to $74.6 million compared to $67.6 million in 2003. This increase was due to a $12.0 million, or 12.5%, increase in interest income, which was partially offset by a $5.1 million, or 17.5%, increase in interest expense.

The Company will continue to monitor investment opportunities and weigh the associated risk/return. Volume increases in earning assets and improvements in the mix of earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities are expected to improve net interest income, but may negatively impact the net interest margin ratio. The Company has engaged in interest rate swap transactions, which are a form of derivative financial instrument, to modify the net interest sensitivity to levels deemed to be appropriate. Through this instrument, interest rate risk is managed by hedging with an interest rate swap contract designed to pay fixed and receive floating interest. The interest rate swaps of the Company were executed to modify net interest sensitivity to levels deemed appropriate. Average loans made up 74.3% of average earning assets as of December 31, 2005 as compared to 71.4% at December 31, 2004. Overall, average loans increased 20.2% in 2005. The increase in average loans was funded by increased customer deposits. Average investment securities made up 23.2% of average earning assets at December 31, 2005 compared to 26.3% at December 31, 2004. Average interest-bearing deposits made up 82.0% of average interest-bearing liabilities at December 31, 2005 compared to 81.0% at December 31, 2004. Average borrowings made up 18.0% of average interest-bearing liabilities at December 31, 2005 compared to 19.0% at December 31, 2004. Tables 12 and 13 further explain the changes in net interest income.

The following table sets forth, for the periods indicated, information regarding (i) the total dollar amount of interest income of the Company from earning assets and the resultant average yields; (ii) the total dollar amount of interest expense on interest-bearing liabilities and the resultant average rate; (iii) net interest income; (iv) net interest spread; and (v) net interest margin. Information is based on average daily balances during the indicated periods. Investment security market value adjustments and trade-date accounting adjustments are not considered to be earning assets and, as such, the net effect is included in nonearning assets. Tax equivalent (TE) yields are calculated using a marginal tax rate of 35%.

 

17


TABLE 12 – AVERAGE BALANCES, NET INTEREST INCOME AND INTEREST YIELDS / RATES

 

      Years Ended December 31,  
    2005     2004     2003  

(dollars in thousands)

  Average
Balance
    Interest   Average
Yield/
Rate
    Average
Balance
    Interest   Average
Yield/
Rate
    Average
Balance
    Interest   Average
Yield/
Rate
 

Earning assets:

                 

Loans receivable:

                 

Mortgage loans

  $ 438,515     $ 23,536   5.37 %   $ 399,681     $ 21,861   5.47 %   $ 340,738     $ 20,628   6.05 %

Commercial loans (TE)

    862,799       48,287   5.74       636,359       29,882   4.85       511,634       25,987   5.26  

Consumer and other loans

    538,761       36,669   6.81       494,348       32,488   6.57       456,766       32,602   7.14  
                                                           

Total loans

    1,840,075       108,492   5.96       1,530,388       84,231   5.57       1,309,138       79,217   6.12  
                                                           

Loans held for sale

    12,866       709   5.51       10,391       520   5.00       14,172       893   6.30  

Investment securities (TE)

    574,832       24,192   4.44       563,271       22,974   4.32       434,767       15,667   3.91  

Other earning assets

    49,773       1,936   3.89       39,986       885   2.21       39,440       785   1.99  
                                                           

Total earning assets

    2,477,546       135,329   5.57       2,144,036       108,610   5.18       1,797,517       96,562   5.50  
                                                           

Allowance for loan losses

    (27,908 )         (19,488 )         (16,491 )    

Nonearning assets

    267,425           213,598           183,669      
                                   

Total assets

  $ 2,717,063         $ 2,338,146         $ 1,964,695      
                                   

Interest-bearing liabilities:

                 

Deposits:

                 

NOW accounts

  $ 558,705     $ 9,239   1.65 %   $ 510,187     $ 5,613   1.10 %   $ 358,327     $ 3,245   0.91 %

Savings and money market accounts

    480,836       6,171   1.28       403,331       3,116   0.77       354,997       2,924   0.82  

Certificates of deposit

    727,666       21,187   2.91       624,959       15,108   2.42       601,339       14,865   2.47  
                                                           

Total interest-bearing deposits

    1,767,207       36,597   2.07       1,538,477       23,837   1.55       1,314,663       21,034   1.60  
                                                           

Short-term borrowings

    143,100       3,395   2.34       188,589       2,644   1.38       115,014       1,428   1.22  

Long-term debt

    245,561       10,539   4.23       173,386       7,501   4.26       148,841       6,467   4.29  
                                                           

Total interest-bearing liabilities

    2,155,868       50,531   2.34       1,900,452       33,982   1.78       1,578,518       28,929   1.83  
                                                           

Noninterest-bearing demand deposits

    283,396           208,887           183,478      

Noninterest-bearing liabilities

    16,170           18,121           22,282      
                                   

Total liabilities

    2,455,434           2,127,460           1,784,278      

Shareholders’ equity

    261,629           210,686           180,417      
                                   

Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity

  $ 2,717,063         $ 2,338,146         $ 1,964,695      
                                   

Net earning assets

  $ 321,678         $ 243,584         $ 218,999      

Net interest spread

    $ 84,798   3.23 %     $ 74,628   3.40 %     $ 67,633   3.67 %

Net interest income (TE) / Net interest margin (TE)

    $ 88,081   3.54 %     $ 77,490   3.60 %     $ 70,236   3.89 %

The following table analyzes the dollar amount of changes in interest income and interest expense for major components of earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities. The table distinguishes between (i) changes attributable to volume (changes in average volume between periods times the average yield/rate for the two periods), (ii) changes attributable to rate (changes in average rate between periods times the average volume for the two periods), and (iii) total increase (decrease).

 

18


TABLE 13 – SUMMARY OF CHANGES IN NET INTEREST INCOME

 

      

2005 / 2004

Change Attributable To

  

2004 / 2003

Change Attributable To

 

(dollars in thousands)

   Volume    Rate     Total
Increase
(Decrease)
   Volume     Rate     Total
Increase
(Decrease)
 

Earning assets:

              

Loans:

              

Mortgage loans

   $ 2,104    $ (429 )   $ 1,675    $ 3,396     $ (2,163 )   $ 1,233  

Commercial loans

     11,553      6,852       18,405      6,096       (2,201 )     3,895  

Consumer and other loans

     3,038      1,143       4,181      2,576       (2,690 )     (114 )

Loans held for sale

     130      59       189      (214 )     (159 )     (373 )

Investment securities

     445      773       1,218      4,936       2,371       7,307  

Other earning assets

     290      761       1,051      11       89       100  
                                              

Total net change in income on earning assets

     17,560      9,159       26,719      16,801       (4,753 )     12,048  
                                              

Interest-bearing liabilities:

              

Deposits:

              

NOW accounts

     645      2,981       3,626      1,523       845       2,368  

Savings and money market accounts

     1,425      1,630       3,055      386       (194 )     192  

Certificates of deposit

     2,686      3,393       6,079      577       (334 )     243  

Borrowings

     1,953      1,836       3,789      2,843       (593 )     2,250  
                                              

Total net change in expense on interest- bearing liabilities

     6,709      9,840       16,549      5,329       (276 )     5,053  
                                              

Change in net interest income

   $ 10,851    $ (681 )   $ 10,170    $ 11,472     $ (4,477 )   $ 6,995  
                                              

Interest income includes interest income earned on earning assets as well as applicable loan fees earned. Interest income that would have been earned on nonaccrual loans had they been on accrual status is not included in the data reported above.

Provision for Loan Losses Management of the Company assesses the allowance for loan losses quarterly and will make provisions for loan losses as deemed appropriate in order to maintain the adequacy of the allowance for loan losses. Increases to the allowance for loan losses are achieved through provisions for loan losses that are charged against income. Adjustments to the allowance may also result from purchase accounting adjustments associated with loans acquired in mergers.

As a result of the significant impact of Hurricanes Katrina and Rita, the Company recorded a one-time loan loss provision of $14.4 million during the third quarter of 2005. Overall, the Company increased the provision for loan losses by 322.4% from $4.0 million in 2004 to $17.1 million in 2005. The provision for loan losses was $6.3 million in 2003. Net loan charge-offs were $3.6 million for 2005 compared to $2.7 million for 2004. The allowance for loan losses as a percentage of outstanding loans, net of unearned income, was 1.98% at December 31, 2005, compared to 1.22% at year-end 2004. A discussion of credit quality can be found in the section on “Asset Quality and Allowance for Loan Losses” in this analysis.

 

19


Noninterest Income – The Company reported noninterest income of $26.1 million in 2005 compared to $23.2 million for 2004. The following table illustrates the primary components of noninterest income for the years indicated.

TABLE 14 – NONINTEREST INCOME

 

(dollars in thousands)

   2005     2004    Percent
Increase
(Decrease)
    2003    Percent
Increase
(Decrease)
 

Service charges on deposit accounts

   $ 13,427     $ 12,317    9.0 %   $ 11,683    5.4 %

ATM/debit card fee income

     2,709       2,012    34.6       1,810    11.2  

Income from bank owned life insurance

     1,979       1,663    19.0       1,521    9.3  

Gain on sale of loans, net

     2,497       2,794    (10.6 )     4,199    (33.5 )

Gain on sale of assets

     826       220    275.5       334    (34.1 )

Gain (loss) on sale of investments, net

     (39 )     698    (105.6 )     267    161.4  

Other income

     4,742       3,513    35.0       3,250    8.1  
                                  

Total noninterest income

   $ 26,141     $ 23,217    12.6 %   $ 23,064    0.7 %
                                  

Service charges on deposit accounts increased $1.1 million in 2005 primarily due to increased volume related to the American Horizons acquisition and revenue enhancement initiatives.

ATM/debit card fee income increased $697,000 in 2005 due to the expanded cardholder base attributable to the American Horizons acquisition and increased usage.

Income from bank owned life insurance increased $316,000 in 2005 as the Company increased its average investment in bank owned life insurance from $34.1 million in 2004 to $42.7 million in 2005.

Gain on sale of loans decreased $297,000 in 2005 as a result of reduced demand for mortgage refinancings and associated sales of these loans into the secondary market. During the third quarter of 2005, the Company sold $3.7 million of nonperforming loans to a third party resulting in an aggregate gain of $290,000.

Gain on sale of assets increased $606,000 in 2005. This increase is primarily the result of the sale of three excess properties. One of the properties was located in New Orleans, while the other two were located in Northeast Louisiana.

Other noninterest income increased $1.2 million in 2005. The increase is due to a $577,000 rise in broker sales commissions, $259,000 in payments received as a result of the conversion of the Company’s ownership interest in the PULSE EFT Association (“PULSE”) as a result of PULSE’s merger with Discover Financial Services and modest increases in several other fee categories.

Noninterest income increased $153,000 from 2003 to 2004 primarily due to a $634,000 increase in service charges on deposit accounts as a result of the implementation of revenue enhancement strategies, a $202,000 increase in ATM/debit card fees from increased usage and a $431,000 increase in gains on the sale of investment securities. Noninterest income was adversely impacted by a $1.4 million decrease in gains on the sale of mortgage loans in the secondary market as refinance activity slowed from 2003’s record level and a $114,000 decrease in gains on the sales of assets.

 

20


Noninterest Expense – Ongoing attention to expense control is part of the Company’s corporate culture. The Company reported noninterest expense of $64.4 million in 2005 compared to $54.9 million for 2004. The following table illustrates the primary components of noninterest expense for the years indicated.

TABLE 15 – NONINTEREST EXPENSE

 

(dollars in thousands)

   2005    2004    Percent
Increase
    2003    Percent
Increase
(Decrease)
 

Salaries and employee benefits

   $ 33,973    $ 29,846    13.8 %   $ 26,585    12.3 %

Occupancy and equipment

     8,319      6,834    21.7       6,273    8.9  

Franchise and shares tax

     3,161      2,607    21.2       2,086    25.0  

Communication and delivery

     3,107      2,814    10.4       2,762    1.9  

Marketing and business development

     1,766      1,582    11.7       1,255    26.1  

Data processing

     1,837      1,492    23.1       1,663    (10.3 )

Printing, stationery and supplies

     992      845    17.4       845    —    

Amortization of acquisition intangibles

     1,207      885    36.3       781    13.3  

Professional services

     2,339      1,802    29.8       2,267    (20.5 )

Other expenses

     7,737      6,190    25.0       6,112    1.3  
                                 

Total noninterest expense

   $ 64,438    $ 54,897    17.4 %   $ 50,629    8.4 %
                                 

Salaries and employee benefits increased $4.1 million in 2005 due to increased staffing associated with the American Horizons acquisition and the Company’s branch expansion initiative, as well as several strategic hires made during 2004 and 2005. The Company also recorded $470,000 of compensation expense due to the immediate vesting of all outstanding unvested stock options on December 30, 2005. Due to the completion of funding of the Company’s ESOP at the end of the first quarter of 2005, the Company realized savings of $1.7 million compared to 2004.

Occupancy and equipment, communication and delivery and data processing increased $1.5 million, $294,000 and $345,000, respectively, in 2005 primarily due to infrastructure expansion and improvements.

Franchise and shares tax increased $553,000 million in 2005 due to growth in capital and income. Both capital and income levels are key components of the Louisiana shares tax calculation.

Marketing and business development expense increased $184,000 in 2005 as the Company expanded advertising and business development programs in selected markets.

Amortization of acquisition intangibles increased $322,000 in 2005 due to the amortization of the American Horizons core deposit intangible.

Other noninterest expenses increased $2.1 million in 2005. The largest components of the increase were $650,000 of one-time expenses associated with the integration and conversion of American Horizons, $401,000 of one-time expenses associated with damages and other costs resulting from Hurricanes Katrina and Rita, a $537,000 increase in professional service expenses and a $389,000 increase in ATM/debit card expenses. One-time hurricane expenses consist primarily of costs to repair damaged facilities and relocate displaced employees.

Noninterest expense increased $4.3 million from 2003 to 2004 primarily due to increased salaries and benefits as a result of the Acadiana and Alliance acquisitions, several strategic hires and the rising cost associated with the increased market value of the Company’s common stock as it relates to the Company’s ESOP. Other significant increases included a $561,000 increase in occupancy and equipment costs associated with infrastructure improvements, a $521,000 increase in franchise and shares tax and a $327,000 increase in marketing and business development expenses.

 

21


Income Taxes For the years ended December 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003 the Company incurred income tax expense of $7.4 million, $11.6 million and $10.2 million, respectively. The Company’s effective tax rate amounted to 25.3%, 29.7% and 30.3% during 2005, 2004 and 2003, respectively. The difference between the effective tax rate and the statutory tax rate primarily relates to variances in items that are non-taxable or non-deductible, primarily the effect of tax-exempt income, the non-deductibility of part of the amortization of acquisition intangibles, and the non-deductible portion of the ESOP compensation expense. The decrease in the Company’s effective tax rates for 2005 is attributable to the effect of the third quarter net loss and the decrease in ESOP compensation expense, a large portion of which was not deductible for tax purposes, along with increases in the proportional levels of tax-exempt income. For more information, see Note 12 of the Consolidated Financial Statements.

CAPITAL RESOURCES

Federal regulations impose minimum regulatory capital requirements on all institutions with deposits insured by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation. The Federal Reserve Board (“FRB”) imposes similar capital regulations on bank holding companies. Compliance with bank and bank holding company regulatory capital requirements, which include leverage and risk-based capital guidelines, are monitored by the Company on an ongoing basis. Under the risk-based capital method, a risk weight is assigned to balance sheet and off-balance sheet items based on regulatory guidelines. At December 31, 2005, the Company exceeded all regulatory capital ratio requirements with a Tier 1 leverage capital ratio of 7.65%, a Tier 1 risk-based capital ratio of 10.70% and a total risk-based capital ratio of 11.96%. At December 31, 2005, the Bank also exceeded all regulatory capital ratio requirements with a Tier 1 leverage capital ratio of 7.03%, a Tier 1 risk-based capital ratio of 9.81% and a total risk-based capital ratio of 11.07%.

LOGO

In addition, the Company has junior subordinated debt totaling $37.3 million, which may be included in Tier 1 capital up to 25% of the total of the Company’s core capital elements, including the junior subordinated debt. For additional information, see Note 10 of the Consolidated Financial Statements.

LIQUIDITY

The Company’s liquidity, represented by cash and cash equivalents, is a product of its operating, investing and financing activities. The Company manages its liquidity with the objective of maintaining sufficient funds to respond to the needs of depositors and borrowers and to take advantage of earnings enhancement opportunities. The primary sources of funds for the Company are deposits, borrowings, repayments and maturities of loans and investment

 

22


securities, securities sold under agreements to repurchase, as well as funds provided from operations. Certificates of deposit scheduled to mature in one year or less at December 31, 2005 totaled $459.5 million. Based on past experience, management believes that a significant portion of maturing deposits will remain with the Company. Additionally, the majority of the investment security portfolio is classified by the Company as available-for-sale which provides the ability to liquidate securities as needed. Due to the relatively short planned duration of the investment security portfolio, the Company continues to experience significant cash flows on a normal basis.

While scheduled cash flows from the amortization and maturities of loans and securities are relatively predictable sources of funds, deposit flows and prepayments of loan and investment securities are greatly influenced by general interest rates, economic conditions and competition. The FHLB of Dallas provides an additional source of liquidity to make funds available for general requirements and also to assist with the variability of less predictable funding sources. At December 31, 2005, the Company had $209.5 million of outstanding advances from the FHLB of Dallas. Additional advances available at December 31, 2005 from the FHLB of Dallas amounted to $440.7 million. The Company and the Bank also have various funding arrangements with commercial banks providing up to $75 million in the form of federal funds and other lines of credit. At December 31, 2005, there was no balance outstanding on these lines and all of the funding was available to the Company.

Liquidity management is both a daily and long-term function of business management. Excess liquidity is generally invested in short-term investments such as overnight deposits. On a longer-term basis, the Company maintains a strategy of investing in various lending and investment security products. The Company uses its sources of funds primarily to meet its ongoing commitments and fund loan commitments. The Company has been able to generate sufficient cash through its deposits as well as borrowings and anticipates it will continue to have sufficient funds to meet its liquidity requirements.

ASSET/ LIABILITY MANAGEMENT AND MARKET RISK

The principal objective of the Company’s asset and liability management function is to evaluate the interest rate risk included in certain balance sheet accounts, determine the appropriate level of risk given the Company’s business focus, operating environment, capital and liquidity requirements and performance objectives, establish prudent asset concentration guidelines and manage the risk consistent with Board approved guidelines. Through such management, the Company seeks to reduce the vulnerability of its operations to changes in interest rates. The Company’s actions in this regard are taken under the guidance of the Senior Management Planning Committee. The Senior Management Planning Committee normally meets monthly to review, among other things, the sensitivity of the Company’s assets and liabilities to interest rate changes, local and national market conditions and interest rates. In connection therewith, the Senior Management Planning Committee generally reviews the Company’s liquidity, cash flow needs, maturities of investments, deposits, borrowings and capital position.

The objective of interest rate risk management is to control the effects that interest rate fluctuations have on net interest income and on the net present value of the Company’s earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities. Management and the Board are responsible for managing interest rate risk and employing risk management policies that monitor and limit this exposure. Interest rate risk is measured using net interest income simulation and asset/liability net present value sensitivity analyses. The Company uses financial modeling to measure the impact of changes in interest rates on the net interest margin and predict market risk. Estimates are based upon numerous assumptions including the nature and timing of interest rate levels including yield curve shape, prepayments on loans and securities, deposit decay rates, pricing decisions on loans and deposits, reinvestment/replacement of asset and liability cash flows and others. These analyses provide a range of potential impacts on net interest income and portfolio equity caused by interest rate movements.

Included in the modeling are instantaneous parallel rate shifts scenarios, which are utilized to establish exposure limits. These scenarios are known as “rate shocks” because all rates are modeled to change instantaneously by the indicated shock amount, rather than a gradual rate shift over a period of time that has traditionally been more realistic. As of December 31, 2005, the simulation of these shocks indicated that an instantaneous and sustained 200 basis point rise in rates would increase net interest income over the following 12 months by approximately 4.3%,

 

23


while a 200 point decline in rates would decrease net interest income over the following 12 months by approximately 1.4% from an unchanged rate environment. For the same period, the model indicated that an instantaneous and sustained 100 basis point rise in rates would increase net interest income over the following 12 months by approximately 3.0%, while a 100 point decline in rates would increase net interest income over the following 12 months by approximately 0.9% from an unchanged rate environment. Computations of interest rate risk under these scenarios do not necessarily include certain actions that management may undertake to manage this risk in response to anticipated changes in interest rates.

The rate environment is a function of the monetary policy of the FRB. The principal tools of the FRB for implementing monetary policy are open market operations, or the purchases and sales of U.S. Treasury and federal agency securities. The FRB’s objective for open market operations has varied over the years, but the focus has gradually shifted toward attaining a specified level of the federal funds rate to achieve the long-run goals of price stability and sustainable economic growth. The federal funds rate is the basis for overnight funding and drives the short end of the yield curve. Longer maturities are influenced by FRB purchases and sales and also expectations of monetary policy going forward. The FRB began to increase the targeted level for the federal funds rate in June 2004 after reaching an all-time low of 1.00% in mid-2003. The targeted fed funds rate has increased at each Federal Open Market Committee meeting by 25 basis points and ended the year at 4.25%. Although each FRB rate increase becomes more challenging to offset, the ability to delay deposit rate increases and less aggressive repricing of the maturing certificate of deposit portfolio has allowed the Company to offset the negative impact of recent FRB rate movements. Although management believes that the Company is not significantly affected by changes in interest rates over an extended period of time, the continued flattening of the yield curve will exert downward pressure on the net interest margin and net interest income. Under traditional measures of interest rate gap positions, the Company is slightly asset sensitive in the short-term. There was no significant shift in the Bank’s interest rate position as a result of the acquisition of American Horizons in January 2005.

As part of its asset/liability management strategy, the Company has emphasized the origination of commercial and consumer loans, which typically have shorter terms than residential mortgage loans and/or adjustable or variable rates of interest. The majority of fixed-rate, long-term residential loans were sold in the secondary market during the last three years to avoid assumption of the rate risk associated with longer duration assets in the current low rate environment. As of December 31, 2005, $567.9 million, or 29.6%, of the Company’s total loan portfolio had adjustable interest rates. The Bank has no significant concentration to any single loan component or industry segment.

The Company’s strategy with respect to liabilities in recent periods has been to emphasize transaction accounts, particularly noninterest bearing transaction accounts, which are not sensitive to changes in interest rates. At December 31, 2005, 66.0% of the Company’s deposits were in transaction and limited-transaction accounts, compared to 64.6% at December 31, 2004. Noninterest bearing transaction accounts totaled 15.6% of total deposits at December 31, 2005, compared to 12.3% of total deposits at December 31, 2004.

As part of an overall interest rate risk management strategy, off-balance sheet derivatives may also be used as an efficient way to modify the repricing or maturity characteristics of on-balance sheet assets and liabilities. Management may from time to time engage in interest rate swaps to effectively manage interest rate risk. As of December 31, 2005, the Company had no derivatives other than interest-rate swaps accounted for as cash-flow hedges, all of which met the criteria to be classified as effective hedges. The interest rate swaps of the Company were executed to modify net interest sensitivity to levels deemed appropriate.

OTHER OFF-BALANCE SHEET ACTIVITIES

In the normal course of business, the Company is a party to a number of activities that contain credit, market and operational risk that are not reflected in whole or in part in the Company’s consolidated financial statements. Such activities include traditional off-balance sheet credit-related financial instruments, commitments under operating leases and long-term debt. The Company provides customers with off-balance sheet credit support through loan commitments, lines of credit and standby letters of credit. Many of the unused commitments are expected to expire

 

24


unused or be only partially used; therefore, the total amount of unused commitments does not necessarily represent future cash requirements. The Company anticipates it will continue to have sufficient funds together with available borrowings to meet its current commitments. At December 31, 2005, the total approved loan commitments outstanding amounted to $48.5 million. At the same date, commitments under unused lines of credit, including credit card lines, amounted to $397.6 million. Included in these totals are commercial commitments amounting to $305.1 million as shown in the following table.

TABLE 16 – COMMERCIAL COMMITMENT EXPIRATION PER PERIOD

 

(dollars in thousands)

  

Less Than

1 Year

  

1 – 3

Years

  

4 – 5

Years

  

Over

5 Years

   Total

Unused commercial lines of credit

   $ 216,234    $ 22,165    $ 4,900    $ 3,620    $ 246,919

Unused loan commitments

     44,922      —        —        —        44,922

Standby letters of credit

     11,979      1,262      —        —        13,241
                                  

Total

   $ 273,135    $ 23,427    $ 4,900    $ 3,620    $ 305,082
                                  

The Company has entered into a number of long-term leasing arrangements to support the ongoing activities of the Company. The required payments under such commitments and other debt commitments at December 31, 2005 are shown in the following table.

TABLE 17 – CONTRACTUAL OBLIGATIONS AND OTHER DEBT COMMITMENTS

 

(dollars in thousands)

   2006    2007    2008    2009    2010   

2011

and After

   Total

Operating leases

   $ 967    $ 717    $ 492    $ 439    $ 342    $ 1,473    $ 4,430

Certificates of deposit

     459,533      198,186      70,733      13,639      16,108      4,582      762,781

Short-term borrowings

     68,849      —        —        —        —        —        68,849

Long-term debt

     24,082      35,969      34,642      78,054      37,167      40,298      250,212
                                                

Total

   $ 553,431    $ 234,872    $ 105,867    $ 92,132    $ 53,617    $ 46,353    $ 1,086,272
                                                

As of December 31, 2005, the Company had committed to purchasing $1.8 million in land associated with its branch expansion initiative. These purchases are scheduled to close during the first half of 2006.

IMPACT OF INFLATION AND CHANGING PRICES

The consolidated financial statements and related financial data presented herein have been prepared in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, which generally require the measurement of financial position and operating results in terms of historical dollars, without considering changes in relative purchasing power over time due to inflation. Unlike most industrial companies, virtually all of the Company’s assets and liabilities are monetary in nature. As a result, interest rates generally have a more significant impact on the Company’s performance than does the effect of inflation. Although fluctuations in interest rates are neither completely predictable nor controllable, the Company regularly monitors its interest rate position and oversees its financial risk management by establishing policies and operating limits. Interest rates do not necessarily move in the same direction or in the same magnitude as the prices of goods and services, since such prices are affected by inflation to a larger extent than interest rates. Although not as critical to the banking industry as to other industries, inflationary factors may have some impact on the Company’s growth, earnings, total assets and capital levels. Management does not expect inflation to be a significant factor in 2006.

 

25


ACQUISITION ACTIVITIES

On February 28, 2003, the Company completed its acquisition of Acadiana Bancshares, Inc., in exchange for 1,227,276 shares valued at $38.6 million and $9.8 million in cash. The transaction is accounted for under the purchase method of accounting. The consolidated statement of income includes the results of operations for Acadiana from the acquisition date. The transaction resulted in $24.1 million of goodwill, $4.0 million of core deposit intangibles and $313,000 of other intangibles. The amount allocated to the core deposit intangible was determined by an independent valuation and is being amortized over the estimated useful life of eight years using the double declining method. The amount allocated to other intangibles represents the estimated value assigned to mortgage servicing rights and is being amortized over an estimated useful life of seven years using the interest method. For further information, see Note 2 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

On February 29, 2004, the Company completed its acquisition of Alliance Bank of Baton Rouge in exchange for 359,106 shares of the Company’s common stock valued at $15.5 million. The transaction is accounted for under the purchase method of accounting. The consolidated statement of income includes the results of operations for Alliance from the acquisition date. The transaction resulted in $5.2 million of goodwill and $1.2 million of core deposit intangibles. The amount allocated to the core deposit intangible was determined by an independent valuation and is being amortized over the estimated useful life of seven years using the straight line method. For further information, see Note 2 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

On January 31, 2005, the Company completed its acquisition of American Horizons in exchange for 990,435 shares of the Company’s common stock valued at $47,744,000 and $653,000 in cash. The transaction is accounted for under the purchase method of accounting. The acquisition expanded the Company’s presence in North Louisiana. The consolidated statement of income includes the results of operations for American Horizons from the acquisition date. The transaction resulted in $28.5 million of goodwill and $5.0 million of core deposit intangibles. The amount allocated to the core deposit intangible was determined by an independent valuation and is being amortized over the estimated useful life of ten years using the straight line method. For further information, see Note 2 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

26


SELECTED CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL AND OTHER DATA

 

     Years Ended December 31,

(dollars in thousands, except per share data)

   2005    2004    2003    2002    2001
Balance Sheet Data               

Total assets

   $ 2,852,592    $ 2,448,602    $ 2,115,811    $ 1,570,588    $ 1,426,825

Cash and cash equivalents

     126,800      53,265      69,521      63,775      51,681

Loans receivable

     1,918,516      1,650,626      1,412,349      1,044,492      956,015

Investment securities

     572,582      566,955      479,622      368,122      321,907

Goodwill and acquisition intangibles

     100,576      68,310      62,786      35,401      35,644

Deposit accounts

     2,242,956      1,773,489      1,589,106      1,242,232      1,237,394

Borrowings

     319,061      442,542      318,881      172,261      43,776

Shareholders’ equity

     263,569      220,162      195,169      139,598      134,417

Book value per share (1)

   $ 27.60    $ 25.62    $ 23.43    $ 19.90    $ 18.42

Tangible book value per share (1) (2)

     17.07      17.67      15.89      14.86      13.54

 

     Years Ended December 31,

(dollars in thousands, except per share data)

   2005    2004    2003    2002    2001
Income Statement Data               

Interest income

   $ 135,329    $ 108,610    $ 96,562    $ 87,552    $ 100,368

Interest expense

     50,531      33,982      28,929      27,958      46,018
                                  

Net interest income

     84,798      74,628      67,633      59,594      54,350

Provision for loan losses

     17,069      4,041      6,300      6,197      5,046
                                  

Net interest income after provision for loan losses

     67,729      70,587      61,333      53,397      49,304

Noninterest income

     26,141      23,217      23,064      17,866      15,144

Noninterest expense

     64,438      54,897      50,629      44,032      41,711
                                  

Income before income taxes

     29,432      38,907      33,768      27,231      22,737

Income taxes

     7,432      11,568      10,216      8,778      8,229
                                  

Net income

   $ 22,000    $ 27,339    $ 23,552    $ 18,453    $ 14,508
                                  

Earnings per share – basic

   $ 2.40    $ 3.26    $ 2.97    $ 2.61    $ 1.98

Earnings per share – diluted

     2.24      3.01      2.74      2.42      1.89

Cash earnings per share – diluted

     2.32      3.07      2.79      2.45      2.21

Cash dividends per share

     1.00      0.85      0.72      0.61      0.56

 

27


     At or For the Years Ended December 31,  
     2005     2004     2003     2002     2001  

Key Ratios (3)

          

Return on average assets

   0.81 %   1.17 %   1.20 %   1.26 %   1.02 %

Return on average equity

   8.41     12.98     13.05     13.12     10.83  

Return on average tangible equity (2)

   13.96     19.52     19.57     17.78     17.51  

Equity to assets at end of period

   9.24     8.99     9.22     8.89     9.42  

Earning assets to interest-bearing liabilities

   114.92     112.82     113.87     116.35     116.83  

Interest rate spread (4)

   3.23     3.40     3.67     4.19     3.54  

Net interest margin (TE) (4) (5)

   3.54     3.60     3.89     4.53     4.12  

Noninterest expense to average assets

   2.37     2.35     2.58     3.01     2.94  

Efficiency ratio (6)

   58.08     56.11     55.82     56.85     60.02  

Tangible efficiency ratio (TE) (2) (5)

   54.85     53.16     52.96     55.03     55.03  

Dividend payout ratio

   43.56     26.55     25.37     23.68     28.71  

Asset Quality Data

          

Nonperforming assets to total assets at end of period (7)

   0.21 %   0.25 %   0.34 %   0.42 %   0.91 %

Allowance for loan losses to nonperforming loans at end of period (7)

   659.29     355.17     355.92     301.64     159.86  

Allowance for loan losses to total loans at end of period

   1.98     1.22     1.29     1.25     1.16  

Consolidated Capital Ratios

          

Tier 1 leverage capital ratio

   7.65 %   7.63 %   7.50 %   7.62 %   6.95 %

Tier 1 risk-based capital ratio

   10.70     11.13     10.94     10.66     9.96  

Total risk-based capital ratio

   11.96     12.36     12.20     11.89     11.09  

 

(1) Shares used for book value purposes exclude shares held in treasury and unreleased shares held by the Employee Stock Ownership Plan at the end of the period.

 

(2) Tangible calculations eliminate the effect of goodwill and acquisition related intangible assets and the corresponding amortization expense on a tax-effected basis where applicable.

 

(3) With the exception of end-of-period ratios, all ratios are based on average daily balances during the respective periods.

 

(4) Interest rate spread represents the difference between the weighted average yield on earning assets and the weighted average cost of interest-bearing liabilities. Net interest margin represents net interest income as a percentage of average earning assets.

 

(5) Fully taxable equivalent (TE) calculations include the tax benefit associated with related income sources that are tax-exempt using a marginal tax rate of 35%.

 

(6) The efficiency ratio represents noninterest expense as a percentage of total revenues. Total revenues is the sum of net interest income and noninterest income.

 

(7) Nonperforming loans consist of nonaccruing loans and loans 90 days or more past due. Nonperforming assets consist of nonperforming loans and repossessed assets.

 

28


MANAGEMENT REPORT ON INTERNAL CONTROL OVER FINANCIAL REPORTING

To the Board of Directors of

IBERIABANK Corporation

The management of IBERIABANK Corporation (the “Company”) is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate internal control over financial reporting. The Company’s internal control system was designed to provide reasonable assurance to the Company’s management and board of directors regarding the preparation and fair presentation of published financial statements.

All internal control systems, no matter how well designed, have inherent limitations. Therefore, even those systems determined to be effective can provide only reasonable assurance with respect to financial statement preparation and presentation.

The Company’s management assessed the effectiveness of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2005. In making this assessment, it used the criteria set forth by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (COSO) in Internal Control – Integrated Framework. Based on our assessment, Management believes that, as of December 31, 2005, the Company’s internal control over financial reporting is effective based on those criteria.

The Company’s independent auditors have issued an audit report on Management’s assessment of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting.

 

/s/ Daryl G. Byrd     /s/ Anthony J. Restel
Daryl G. Byrd     Anthony J. Restel
President and Chief Executive Officer     Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer

 

29


REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

To the Board of Directors and Shareholders of

IBERIABANK Corporation

We have audited management’s assessment, included in the accompanying Management Report on Internal Control over Financial Reporting , that IBERIABANK Corporation maintained effective internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2005, based on criteria established in Internal Control – Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (COSO). IBERIABANK Corporation’s management is responsible for maintaining effective internal control over financial reporting and for its assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on management’s assessment and an opinion on the effectiveness of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting based on our audit.

We conducted our audit in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether effective internal control over financial reporting was maintained in all material respects. Our audit included obtaining an understanding of internal control over financial reporting, evaluating management’s assessment, testing and evaluating the design and operating effectiveness of internal control, and performing such other procedures as we considered necessary in the circumstances. We believe that our audit provides a reasonable basis for our opinion.

A company’s internal control over financial reporting is a process designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. A company’s internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that (1) pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the company; (2) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and that receipts and expenditures of the company are being made only in accordance with authorizations of management and directors of the company; and (3) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorized acquisition, use, or disposition of the company’s assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.

Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting may not prevent or detect misstatements. Also, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.

In our opinion, management’s assessment that IBERIABANK Corporation maintained effective internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2005, is fairly stated, in all material respects, based on criteria established in Internal Control – Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (COSO). Also in our opinion, IBERIABANK Corporation maintained, in all material respects, effective internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2005, based on criteria established in Internal Control – Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (COSO).

We have also audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States), the consolidated balance sheets and the related consolidated statements of income, shareholders’ equity and cash flows of IBERIABANK Corporation and Subsidiary, and our report dated February 15, 2006 expressed an unqualified opinion.

/s/ Castaing, Hussey & Lolan, LLC

New Iberia, Louisiana

February 15, 2006

 

30


REPORT OF CASTAING, HUSSEY & LOLAN, LLC

INDEPENDENT REGISTERED ACCOUNTING FIRM

To the Board of Directors and Shareholders of

IBERIABANK Corporation

We have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of IBERIABANK Corporation and Subsidiary as of December 31, 2005 and 2004, and the related consolidated statements of income, shareholders’ equity, and cash flows for each of the years in the three-year period ended December 31, 2005. These consolidated financial statements are the responsibility of the Company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these consolidated financial statements based on our audits.

We conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit also includes assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.

In our opinion, the consolidated financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of IBERIABANK Corporation and Subsidiary as of December 31, 2005 and 2004, and the results of its operations and its cash flows for each of the years in the three-year period ended December 31, 2005, in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America.

We also have audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States), the effectiveness of IBERIABANK Corporation’s internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2005, based on criteria established in Internal Control – Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (COSO), and our report dated February 15, 2006 expressed an unqualified opinion of management’s assessment of internal control over financial reporting and an unqualified opinion on the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting.

/s/ Castaing, Hussey & Lolan, LLC

New Iberia, Louisiana

February 15, 2006

 

31


IBERIABANK CORPORATION AND SUBSIDIARY

Consolidated Balance Sheets

December 31, 2005 and 2004

 

(dollars in thousands, except share data)    2005     2004  

Assets

    

Cash and due from banks

   $ 66,697     $ 33,940  

Interest-bearing deposits in banks

     60,103       19,325  
                

Total cash and cash equivalents

     126,800       53,265  

Securities available for sale, at fair value

     543,495       526,933  

Securities held to maturity, fair values of $29,337 and $41,061, respectively

     29,087       40,022  

Mortgage loans held for sale

     10,515       8,109  

Loans, net of unearned income

     1,918,516       1,650,626  

Allowance for loan losses

     (38,082 )     (20,116 )
                

Loans, net

     1,880,434       1,630,510  

Premises and equipment, net

     55,010       39,557  

Goodwill

     93,167       64,732  

Other assets

     114,084       85,474  
                

Total Assets

   $ 2,852,592     $ 2,448,602  
                

Liabilities

    

Deposits:

    

Noninterest-bearing

   $ 350,065     $ 218,859  

Interest-bearing

     1,892,891       1,554,630  
                

Total deposits

     2,242,956       1,773,489  

Short-term borrowings

     68,849       236,453  

Long-term debt

     250,212       206,089  

Other liabilities

     27,006       12,409  
                

Total Liabilities

     2,589,023       2,228,440  
                

Shareholders’ Equity

    

Preferred stock, $1 par value - 5,000,000 shares authorized

     —         —    

Common stock, $1 par value - 25,000,000 shares authorized; 11,801,979 and 10,812,221 shares issued, respectively (1)

     11,802       10,812  

Additional paid-in capital

     190,655       136,841  

Retained earnings

     150,107       137,887  

Unearned compensation

     (9,594 )     (5,581 )

Accumulated other comprehensive income

     (5,629 )     390  

Treasury stock at cost - 2,253,167 and 2,206,650 shares, respectively (1)

     (73,772 )     (60,187 )
                

Total Shareholders’ Equity

     263,569       220,162  
                

Total Liabilities and Shareholders’ Equity

   $ 2,852,592     $ 2,448,602  
                

 

(1) All share amounts have been restated to reflect the five-for-four stock split, paid August 15, 2005 to shareholders of record as of August 1, 2005.

The accompanying Notes are an integral part of these Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

32


IBERIABANK CORPORATION AND SUBSIDIARY

Consolidated Statements of Income

Years Ended December 31, 2005, 2004, and 2003

 

(dollars in thousands, except per share data)

   2005     2004    2003

Interest and Dividend Income

       

Loans, including fees

   $ 108,492     $ 84,231    $ 79,217

Mortgage loans held for sale, including fees

     709       520      893

Investment securities:

       

Taxable interest

     21,698       20,425      13,201

Tax-exempt interest

     2,494       2,549      2,466

Other

     1,936       885      785
                     

Total interest and dividend income

     135,329       108,610      96,562
                     

Interest Expense

       

Deposits

     36,597       23,837      21,034

Short-term borrowings

     3,395       2,644      1,428

Long-term debt

     10,539       7,501      6,467
                     

Total interest expense

     50,531       33,982      28,929
                     

Net interest income

     84,798       74,628      67,633

Provision for loan losses

     17,069       4,041      6,300
                     

Net interest income after provision for loan losses

     67,729       70,587      61,333
                     

Noninterest Income

       

Service charges on deposit accounts

     13,427       12,317      11,683

ATM/debit card fee income

     2,709       2,012      1,810

Income from bank owned life insurance

     1,979       1,663      1,521

Gain on sale of loans, net

     2,497       2,794      4,199

Gain on sale of assets

     826       220      334

Gain (loss) on sale of investments, net

     (39 )     698      267

Other income

     4,742       3,513      3,250
                     

Total noninterest income

     26,141       23,217      23,064
                     

Noninterest Expense

       

Salaries and employee benefits

     33,973       29,846      26,585

Occupancy and equipment

     8,319       6,834      6,273

Franchise and shares tax

     3,161       2,607      2,086

Communication and delivery

     3,107       2,814      2,762

Marketing and business development

     1,766       1,582      1,255

Data processing

     1,837       1,492      1,663

Printing, stationery and supplies

     992       845      845

Amortization of acquisition intangibles

     1,207       885      781

Professional services

     2,339       1,802      2,267

Other expenses

     7,737       6,190      6,112
                     

Total noninterest expense

     64,438       54,897      50,629
                     

Income before income tax expense

     29,432       38,907      33,768

Income tax expense

     7,432       11,568      10,216
                     

Net Income

   $ 22,000     $ 27,339    $ 23,552
                     

Earnings per share - basic (1)

   $ 2.40     $ 3.26    $ 2.97

Earnings per share - diluted (1)

   $ 2.24     $ 3.01    $ 2.74

 

(1) All share amounts have been restated to reflect the five-for-four stock split, paid August 15, 2005 to shareholders of record as of August 1, 2005.

The accompanying Notes are an integral part of these Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

33


IBERIABANK CORPORATION AND SUBSIDIARY

Consolidated Statements of Shareholders’ Equity

Years Ended December 31, 2005, 2004, and 2003

 

(dollars in thousands,

except share and per share data)

   Common
Stock
   Additional
Paid-In
Capital
   Retained
Earnings
    Unearned
Compensation
    Accumulated
Other
Comprehensive
Income
    Treasury
Stock
    Total  

Balance, December 31, 2002 (1)

   $ 9,226    $ 72,769    $ 100,545     $ (2,690 )   $ 712     $ (40,964 )   $ 139,598  

Comprehensive income:

                

Net income

           23,552             23,552  

Change in unrealized gain on securities available for sale, net of deferred taxes

               (993 )       (993 )

Change in fair value of derivatives used for cash flow hedges, net of tax effect

               464         464  
                      

Total comprehensive income

                   23,023  

Cash dividends declared, $0.72 per share

           (5,975 )           (5,975 )

Reissuance of treasury stock under stock option plan, net of shares surrendered in payment, including tax benefit, 158,835 shares

        1,653            1,340       2,993  

Common stock released by ESOP trust

        1,768        473           2,241  

Common stock earned by participants of recognition and retention plan trust, including tax benefit

        458        613           1,071  

Common stock issued for recognition and retention plan

        612        (1,064 )       452       —    

Common stock issued for acquisition

     1,227      37,414      (246 )           38,395  

Treasury stock acquired at cost, 159,250 shares

                 (6,177 )     (6,177 )
                                                      

Balance, December 31, 2003

     10,453      114,674      117,876       (2,668 )     183       (45,349 )     195,169  

Comprehensive income:

                

Net income

           27,339             27,339  

Change in unrealized gain on securities available for sale, net of deferred taxes

               (214 )       (214 )

Change in fair value of derivatives used for cash flow hedges, net of tax effect

               421         421  
                      

Total comprehensive income

                   27,546  

Cash dividends declared, $0.85 per share

           (7,257 )           (7,257 )

Reissuance of treasury stock under stock option plan, net of shares surrendered in payment, including tax benefit, 170,619 shares

        1,114            3,005       4,119  

Common stock released by ESOP trust

        2,135        435           2,570  

Common stock earned by participants of recognition and retention plan trust, including tax benefit

        745        636           1,381  

Common stock issued for recognition and retention plan

        2,965        (3,984 )       1,019       —    

Common stock issued for acquisition

     359      15,208      (71 )           15,496  

Treasury stock acquired at cost, 408,334 shares

                 (18,862 )     (18,862 )
                                                      

Balance, December 31, 2004

     10,812      136,841      137,887       (5,581 )     390       (60,187 )     220,162  

Comprehensive income:

                

Net income

           22,000             22,000  

Change in unrealized gain on securities available for sale, net of deferred taxes

               (7,030 )       (7,030 )

Change in fair value of derivatives used for cash flow hedges, net of tax effect

               1,011         1,011  
                      

Total comprehensive income

                   15,981  

Cash dividends declared, $1.00 per share

           (9,582 )           (9,582 )

Reissuance of treasury stock under stock option plan, net of shares surrendered in payment, including tax benefit, 203,813 shares

        1,539            2,026       3,565  

Common stock released by ESOP trust

        519        103           622  

Common stock earned by participants of recognition and retention plan trust, including tax benefit

        564        1,554           2,118  

Common stock issued for recognition and retention plan

        3,777        (5,670 )       1,893       —    

Common stock issued for acquisition

     990      46,945      (198 )           47,737  

Stock based compensation cost

        470              470  

Treasury stock acquired at cost, 365,488 shares

                 (17,504 )     (17,504 )
                                                      

Balance, December 31, 2005

   $ 11,802    $ 190,655    $ 150,107     $ (9,594 )   $ (5,629 )   $ (73,772 )   $ 263,569  
                                                      

 

(1) All share amounts have been restated to reflect the five-for-four stock split, paid August 15, 2005 to shareholders of record as of August 1, 2005.

The accompanying Notes are an integral part of these Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

34


IBERIABANK CORPORATION AND SUBSIDIARY

Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows

Years Ended December 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003

 

(dollars in thousands)

   2005     2004     2003  

Cash Flows from Operating Activities

      

Net income

   $ 22,000     $ 27,339     $ 23,552  

Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided by operating activities:

      

Depreciation and amortization

     5,245       4,326       4,112  

Provision for loan losses

     17,069       4,041       6,300  

Noncash compensation expense

     2,824       3,334       2,710  

Gain on sale of assets

     (1,081 )     (221 )     (414 )

Loss (Gain) on sale of investments

     39       (698 )     (267 )

Loss on abandonment of fixed assets

     129       —         —    

Amortization of premium/discount on investments

     1,909       2,807       5,790  

Current (benefit) provision for deferred income taxes

     (3,236 )     1,816       216  

Net change in loans held for sale

     (2,406 )     (2,328 )     6,475  

Other operating activities, net

     (627 )     (7,034 )     (10,581 )
                        

Net Cash Provided by Operating Activities

     41,865       33,382       37,893  
                        

Cash Flows from Investing Activities

      

Proceeds from sales of securities available for sale

     23,737       42,762       100,452  

Proceeds from maturities, prepayments and calls of securities available for sale

     96,071       134,582       145,731  

Purchases of securities available for sale

     (137,529 )     (269,134 )     (328,222 )

Proceeds from sales of securities held to maturity

     231       227       —    

Proceeds from maturities, prepayments and calls of securities held to maturity

     10,605       13,010       30,529  

Purchases of securities held to maturity

     —         —         (8,119 )

Proceeds from sale of loans

     3,172       —         26,913  

Increase in loans receivable, net

     (78,414 )     (190,959 )     (209,959 )

Proceeds from sale of premises and equipment

     3,296       76       880  

Purchases of premises and equipment

     (14,686 )     (9,430 )     (8,381 )

Proceeds from disposition of real estate owned

     2,038       3,533       1,881  

Cash received in excess of cash paid in acquisition

     20,736       4,320       21,120  

Other investing activities, net

     6,277       (3,510 )     (5,030 )
                        

Net Cash Used in Investing Activities

     (64,466 )     (274,523 )     (232,205 )
                        

Cash Flows from Financing Activities

      

Increase in deposits

     277,461       123,303       137,915  

Net change in short-term borrowings

     (167,604 )     73,863       64,461  

Proceeds from long-term debt

     34,255       51,100       20,000  

Repayments of long-term debt

     (23,037 )     (462 )     (12,535 )

Dividends paid to shareholders

     (8,836 )     (6,606 )     (5,185 )

Proceeds from sale of treasury stock for stock options exercised

     1,407       2,549       1,770  

Costs of issuance of common stock in acquisition

     (6 )     —         (191 )

Payments to repurchase common stock

     (17,504 )     (18,862 )     (6,177 )
                        

Net Cash Provided by Financing Activities

     96,136       224,885       200,058  
                        

Net Increase (Decrease) In Cash and Cash Equivalents

     73,535       (16,256 )     5,746  

Cash and Cash Equivalents at Beginning of Period

     53,265       69,521       63,775  
                        

Cash and Cash Equivalents at End of Period

   $ 126,800     $ 53,265     $ 69,521  
                        

Supplemental Schedule of Noncash Activities

      

Acquisition of real estate in settlement of loans

   $ 1,553     $ 1,792     $ 1,702  

Common stock issued in acquisition

   $ 47,744     $ 15,496     $ 38,586  

Exercise of stock options with payment in company stock

   $ 2,075     $ 134     $ 798  

2,359,854 shares issued in stock split, par value of shares issued

   $ 2,360     $ —       $ —    

Supplemental Disclosures

      

Cash paid for:

      

Interest on deposits and borrowings

   $ 49,687     $ 33,420     $ 30,023  

Income taxes, net

   $ 5,029     $ 5,478     $ 8,665  

The accompanying Notes are an integral part of these Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

35


NOTE 1 – SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES:

PRINCIPLES OF CONSOLIDATION: The consolidated financial statements include the accounts of IBERIABANK Corporation (the “Company”) and its wholly owned subsidiary, IBERIABANK (the “Bank”), as well as all of the Bank’s subsidiaries, Iberia Financial Services LLC, Acadiana Holdings LLC, Jefferson Insurance Corporation, Finesco LLC and IBERIABANK Insurance Services LLC. All significant intercompany balances and transactions have been eliminated in consolidation.

NATURE OF OPERATIONS: The Company is a Louisiana corporation that serves as the bank holding company for the Bank, a Louisiana chartered state commercial bank. Through the Bank, the Company offers commercial and retail products and services to customers throughout the state, including New Orleans, Baton Rouge, Shreveport, Monroe, and the Acadiana region of Louisiana. Management of the Company monitors the revenue streams of the various products, services and markets; however, operations are managed and financial performance is evaluated on a company-wide basis. Accordingly, all of the Company’s banking operations are considered by management to be aggregated in one reportable operating segment.

USE OF ESTIMATES: The preparation of financial statements in conformity with generally accepted accounting principles in the United States requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the amounts reported in the consolidated financial statements and accompanying notes. Actual results could differ from those estimates. Material estimates that are susceptible to significant change in the near term are the allowance for loan losses, valuation of goodwill, intangible assets and other purchase accounting adjustments and stock based compensation.

CONCENTRATION OF CREDIT RISKS: Most of the Company’s business activity is with customers located within the State of Louisiana. The Company’s lending activity is concentrated in the Company’s five primary market areas in Louisiana. The Company in recent years has emphasized originations of commercial loans, private banking and mortgage loans. Repayment of loans is expected to come from cash flows of the borrower. Losses are limited by the value of the collateral upon default of the borrowers. The Company does not have any significant concentrations to any one industry or customer.

CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS: For purposes of presentation in the consolidated statements of cash flows, cash and cash equivalents are defined as cash, interest-bearing deposits and noninterest-bearing demand deposits at other financial institutions with maturities less than one year. The Bank may be required to maintain average balances on hand or with the Federal Reserve Bank. At December 31, 2005 and 2004, the Bank had no required reserve balance.

INVESTMENT SECURITIES: Debt securities that management has the ability and intent to hold to maturity are classified as held to maturity and carried at cost, adjusted for amortization of premiums and accretion of discounts using methods approximating the interest method. Securities not classified as held to maturity or trading, including equity securities with readily determinable fair values, are classified as available for sale and recorded at fair value, with unrealized gains and losses excluded from earnings and reported in other comprehensive income. Declines in the value of individual held to maturity and available for sale securities below their cost that are other than temporary are included in earnings as realized losses. In estimating other than temporary impairment losses, management considers 1) the length of time and the extent to which the fair value has been less than cost, 2) the financial condition and near-term prospects of the issuer, and 3) the intent and ability of the Company to retain its investment in the issuer for a period of time sufficient to allow for any anticipated recovery in fair value. Gains/losses on securities sold are recorded on the trade date, using the specific identification method.

MORTGAGE LOANS HELD FOR SALE: Mortgage loans originated and intended for sale in the secondary market are carried at the lower of cost or estimated fair value in the aggregate. Net unrealized losses, if any, are recognized through a valuation allowance by charges to income. Loans held for sale have primarily been fixed rate single-family residential mortgage loans under contract to be sold in the secondary market. In most cases, loans in this category are sold within thirty days. These loans are generally sold with the mortgage servicing rights released. Buyers generally have recourse to return a purchased loan to the Company under limited circumstances. Recourse conditions may include early payment default, breach of representations or warranties, and documentation deficiencies.

 

36


LOANS: The Company grants mortgage, commercial and consumer loans to customers. Loans receivable that management has the intent and ability to hold for the foreseeable future or until maturity or payoff are stated at the unpaid principal balances, less the allowance for loan losses and net deferred loan origination fees and unearned discounts. Interest income on loans is accrued over the term of the loans based on the principal balance outstanding. Loan origination fees, net of certain direct origination costs, are deferred and recognized as an adjustment of the related loan yield, using the interest method.

The accrual of interest on commercial loans is discontinued at the time the loan is 90 days delinquent unless the credit is well-secured and in process of collection. Mortgage, credit card and other personal loans are typically charged off to net collateral value, less cost to sell, no later than 180 days past due. Past due status is based on the contractual terms of loans. In all cases, loans are placed on nonaccrual or charged off at an earlier date if collection of principal or interest is considered doubtful.

In general, all interest accrued but not collected for loans that are placed on nonaccrual or charged off is reversed against interest income. The interest on these loans is accounted for on the cash-basis method or cost-recovery method, until qualifying for return to accrual. Loans are returned to accrual status when all principal and interest amounts contractually due are brought current and future payments are reasonably assured.

ALLOWANCE FOR LOAN LOSSES: The allowance for loan losses is established as losses are estimated to have occurred through a provision charged to earnings. Loan losses are charged against the allowance when management believes the uncollectibility of a loan balance is confirmed. Subsequent recoveries, if any, are credited to the allowance. Allowances for impaired loans are generally determined based on collateral values or the present value of estimated cash flows. Changes in the allowance related to impaired loans are charged or credited to the provision for loan losses.

The allowance for loan losses is maintained at a level which, in management’s opinion, is adequate to absorb credit losses inherent in the portfolio. In determining the amount of the allowance for loan losses, management uses information from its portfolio management process, relationship managers and ongoing loan review efforts to stratify the loan portfolio into asset risk classifications. Based on this information, management assigns a general or specific reserve allocation. The foundation for the allowance is a detailed review of the overall loan portfolio and its performance. The portfolio is segmented into homogenous pools (i.e., commercial, business banking, consumer, mortgage, indirect, and credit card), which are analyzed based on risk factors, current and historical performance and specific loan reviews (for significant loans). Consideration is given to the specific risk within these segments, the maturity of these segments (e.g., rapid growth versus fully seasoned), the Company’s strategy for each segment (e.g., growth versus maintain), and the historical loss rate for these segments both at the Company and its peers. Consideration is also given to the impact of a number of relevant external factors that influence components of the loan portfolio or the portfolio as a whole, including current and projected economic conditions.

Loan portfolios tied to acquisitions made during the year are incorporated into the Company’s allowance process. If the acquisition has an impact on the level of exposure to a particular segment, industry or geographic market, this increase in exposure is factored into the allowance determination process. Generally, acquisitions have higher levels of risk of loss based on differences in credit culture, portfolio management practices and the Company’s emphasis on early detection and management of deteriorating loans.

General reserve estimated loss percentages are based on the current and historical loss experience of each loan category, regulatory guidelines for losses, the status of past due payments, and management’s judgment of economic conditions and the related level of risk assumed. Relative to homogenous loan pools such as mortgage, consumer, indirect and credit cards, the Company has established a general reserve level using information such as actual loan losses, the seasoning of the pool, identified loan impairment, acquisitions, and current and projected economic conditions. General reserves for these pools are adjusted for loans that are considered past due, based on the correlation between historical losses and the payment performance of a loan pool.

 

37


The commercial segment of the Company’s loan portfolio is initially assigned a general reserve also based on performance of that portion of the loan portfolio and other general factors discussed earlier. The commercial portion of the portfolio is further segmented by collateral type, which based on experience has a direct relationship to the level of loss experienced if a problem develops. Reserves are set based on management’s assessment of this risk of loss. As commercial loans deteriorate, the Company reviews each for impairment and proper loan grading. Loans on the Company’s Watch List carry higher levels of reserve based largely on a higher level of loss experience for these loans. Loss experience for Watch List loans is reviewed periodically during the year.

Specific reserves are determined for commercial loans individually based on management’s evaluation of loss exposure for each credit, given current payment status of the loan and the value of any underlying collateral. Loans for which specific reserves are provided are excluded from the general reserve calculations described above to prevent duplicate reserves. Additionally, an unallocated reserve for the total loan portfolio is established to address the imprecision and estimation risk inherent in the calculations of general and specific reserves, and management’s evaluation of various conditions that are not directly measured by any other component of the allowance. Such components would include current economic conditions affecting key lending areas, credit quality trends, collateral values, loan volumes and concentrations, seasoning of the loan portfolio and the findings of internal credit examinations.

Based on the allowance determination process, the Company determines the current potential risk of loss that exists in the portfolio, even if not fully reflected in current credit statistics, such as nonperforming assets or nonperforming loans. To determine risk of loss, and in turn the appropriateness of the allowance, the Company extends its analysis to a number of other factors, including the level of delinquencies and delinquency trends; the level and mix of Criticized, Classified and Pass/Watch loans; reserve levels relative to nonperforming assets, nonperforming loans, and net charge-offs; the level and trend in consumer and commercial bankruptcies; and financial performance trends in specific businesses and industries to which the Company lends. In response to rapid growth and changes in the mix of the loan portfolio, the Company has increased its required allowance over time and feels that the allowance adequately reflects the current level of risk and incurred losses within the loan portfolio.

The allowance also includes an unallocated component. The unallocated component is maintained to cover uncertainties that could affect management’s estimate of probable losses. The unallocated component of the allowance reflects the margin of imprecision inherent in the underlying assumptions used in the methodologies for estimating specific and general losses in the portfolio.

A loan is considered impaired when, based on current information and events, it is probable that the Company will be unable to collect the scheduled payments of principal or interest when due according to the contractual terms of the loan agreement. Factors considered by management in determining impairment include payment status, collateral value, and the probability of collecting scheduled principal and interest payments when due. Loans that experience insignificant payment delays and payment shortfalls generally are not classified as impaired. The impairment loss is measured on a loan by loan basis for commercial and construction loans by either the present value of expected future cash flows discounted at the loan’s effective interest rate, the loan’s obtainable market price, or the fair value of the collateral if the loan is collateral dependent.

Large groups of smaller balance homogeneous loans are collectively evaluated for impairment. Accordingly, the Company does not separately identify individual consumer, residential and small business loans for impairment disclosures.

LOAN SERVICING: Mortgage servicing rights are recognized on loans sold where the institution retains the servicing rights. Capitalized mortgage servicing rights are reported in other assets and are amortized into noninterest income. Impairment of mortgage servicing rights is assessed based on the fair value of those rights. Fair values are estimated using discounted cash flows based on a current market interest rate.

OFF-BALANCE SHEET CREDIT RELATED FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS: In the ordinary course of business, the Company has entered into commitments to extend credit, including commitments under credit card arrangements, commercial letters of credit and standby letters of credit. Such financial instruments are recorded when they are funded.

 

38


DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS: On January 1, 2001, the Company adopted Statement of Financial Accounting Standards (“SFAS”) No. 133, Accounting for Derivative Instruments and Hedging Activities , as amended. This Statement requires that all derivatives be recognized as assets or liabilities in the balance sheet at fair value.

The Company may enter into derivative contracts to manage exposure to interest rate risk or to meet the financing needs of its customers.

Interest Rate Swap Agreements

The Company utilizes interest rate swap agreements to convert a portion of its variable-rate debt to a fixed rate (cash flow hedge). Interest rate swaps are contracts in which a series of interest rate flows are exchanged over a prescribed period. The notional amount on which the interest payments are based is not exchanged.

For derivatives designated as hedging the exposure to changes in the fair value of an asset or liability (fair value hedge), the gain or loss is recognized in earnings in the period of change together with the offsetting gain or loss to the hedged item attributable to the risk being hedged. Earnings will be affected to the extent to which the hedge is not effective in achieving offsetting changes in fair value. For derivatives designated as hedging exposure to variable cash flows of a forecasted transaction (cash flow hedge), the effective portion of the derivative’s gain or loss is initially reported as a component of other comprehensive income and subsequently reclassified into earnings when the forecasted transaction affects earnings or when the hedge is terminated. The ineffective portion of the gain or loss is reported in earnings immediately. For derivatives that are not designated as hedging instruments, changes in the fair value of the derivatives are recognized in earnings immediately.

In applying hedge accounting for derivatives, the Company establishes a method for assessing the effectiveness of the hedging derivative and a measurement approach for determining the ineffective aspect of the hedge upon the inception of the hedge. These methods are consistent with the Company’s approach to managing risk.

Rate Lock Commitments

The Company enters into commitments to originate loans whereby the interest rate on the prospective loan is determined prior to funding (“rate lock commitments”). Rate lock commitments on mortgage loans that are intended to be sold are considered to be derivatives. Accordingly, such commitments, along with any related fees received from potential borrowers, are recorded at fair value as derivative assets or liabilities, with changes in fair value recorded in net gain or loss on sale of mortgage loans. The fair value of rate lock commitments was immaterial in 2005 and 2004.

FORECLOSED PROPERTY: Real estate and other assets acquired in settlement of loans are recorded at the balance of the loan or at estimated fair value less estimated selling costs, whichever is less, at the date acquired. Subsequent to foreclosure, management periodically performs valuations and the assets are carried at the lower of cost or fair value less estimated selling costs. Revenue and expenses from operations, gain or loss on sale and changes in the valuation allowance are included in net expenses from foreclosed assets. There was no allowance for losses on foreclosed property at December 31, 2005 and 2004.

PREMISES AND EQUIPMENT: Land is carried at cost. Buildings and equipment are carried at cost, less accumulated depreciation computed on a straight line basis over the estimated useful lives of 10 to 40 years for buildings and 5 to 15 years for furniture, fixtures and equipment.

GOODWILL: Goodwill is accounted for in accordance with SFAS No. 142, Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets , and accordingly is not amortized but is evaluated at least annually for impairment.

TRANSFERS OF FINANCIAL ASSETS: Transfers of financial assets are accounted for as sales when control over the assets has been surrendered. Control over transferred assets is deemed to be surrendered when 1) the assets have been isolated from the Company, 2) the transferee obtains the right, free of conditions that constrain it from taking advantage of that right, to pledge or exchange the transferred assets, and 3) the Company does not maintain effective control over the transferred assets through an agreement to repurchase them before their maturity.

 

39


INCOME TAXES: The Company and all subsidiaries file a consolidated federal income tax return on a calendar year basis. Deferred income tax assets and liabilities are determined using the liability (or balance sheet) method. Under this method, the net deferred tax asset or liability is determined based on the tax effects of the temporary differences between the book and tax bases of the various balance sheet assets and liabilities and gives current recognition to changes in tax rates and laws. The measurement of deferred tax assets is reduced, if necessary, by the amount of any tax benefits that, based on available evidence, are not expected to be realized.

STOCK COMPENSATION PLANS: The Company issues stock options under various plans to directors, officers and other key employees (see Note 15). SFAS No. 123, Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation, encourages all entities to adopt a fair value based method of accounting for employee stock compensation plans, whereby compensation cost is measured at the grant date based on the value of the award and is recognized over the service period, which is usually the vesting period. It also allows an entity to continue to measure compensation cost for those plans using the intrinsic value based method of accounting prescribed by Accounting Principles Board Opinion (“APB”) No. 25, Accounting for Stock Issued to Employees, whereby compensation cost is the excess, if any, of the quoted market price of the stock at the grant date (or other measurement date) over the amount an employee must pay to acquire the stock. Stock options issued under the Company’s stock option plans generally have no intrinsic value at the grant date, and under Opinion No. 25 no compensation cost is recognized for them. The Company has accounted for stock options in accordance with the methodology in APB No. 25. As a result, compensation expense relating to stock options is not reflected in net income provided the exercise price of the stock options granted equals or exceeds the market value of the underlying common stock at the grant date. The Company’s practice has been to grant options at no less than the fair market value of the stock at the grant date. The following table illustrates the effect on net income and earnings per share if the Company had applied the fair value recognition provisions of SFAS No. 123 for stock options.

 

     Years Ended December 31,

(dollars in thousands, except per share data)

   2005    2004    2003

Reported net income

   $ 22,000    $ 27,339    $ 23,552

Deduct: Stock option compensation expense under the fair value method, net of related tax effect

     4,968      1,340      1,110
                    

Pro forma net income

   $ 17,032    $ 25,999    $ 22,442
                    

Reported net income per common share

   $ 2.40    $ 3.26    $ 2.97
                    

Pro forma net income per common share

     1.86      3.10      2.83
                    

Reported net income per common share–assuming dilution

     2.24      3.01      2.74
                    

Pro forma net income per common share–assuming dilution

     1.74      2.88      2.64
                    

See Note 15 for additional information on the Company’s stock compensation plans.

On December 16, 2004, the Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) issued SFAS No. 123(R), Share-Based Payment. SFAS No. 123(R) revises SFAS No. 123 and calls for companies to expense the fair value of employee stock options and other forms of stock-based compensation. The Company is required to adopt SFAS No. 123(R) as of January 1, 2006. This requirement will represent a significant change in practice for the Company.

SFAS No. 123(R) requires companies to (1) use fair value to measure stock-based compensation awards and (2) cease using the “intrinsic value” method of accounting, which APB No. 25 allowed and resulted in no expense for many awards of stock options for which the exercise price of the option equaled the price of the underlying stock at the grant date. Under SFAS No. 123(R), the fair value of a stock-based compensation award is recognized over the employee’s service period.

EARNINGS PER COMMON SHARE: Basic earnings per share represents income available to common shareholders divided by the weighted average number of common shares outstanding during the period. Diluted earnings per share reflects additional common shares that would have been outstanding if dilutive potential common shares had been issued, as well as any adjustment to income that would result from the assumed issuance. Potential common shares that may be issued by the Company relate to outstanding stock options and unvested restricted stock, and are determined using the treasury stock method.

 

40


COMPREHENSIVE INCOME: Accounting principles generally require that recognized revenue, expenses, gains and losses be included in net income. Although certain changes in assets and liabilities, such as unrealized gains and losses on available for sale securities, are reported as a separate component of the equity section of the balance sheet, such items, along with net income, are components of comprehensive income.

SEGMENT INFORMATION: SFAS No. 131, Disclosures about Segments of an Enterprise and Related Information , requires the reporting of information about a company’s operating segments using a “management approach.” The Statement requires that reportable segments be identified based upon those revenue-producing components for which separate financial information is produced internally and are subject to evaluation by the chief operating decision maker in deciding how to allocate resources to segments.

The Company has evaluated its potential operating segments against the criteria specified in the Statement and has determined that no operating segment disclosures are required in 2005, 2004 or 2003.

EFFECTS OF NEW ACCOUNTING PRONOUNCEMENTS:

In December 2003, the Accounting Standards Executive Committee issued Statement of Position 03-3, Accounting for Certain Loans or Debt Securities Acquired in a Transfer (“SOP 03-3”). SOP 03-3 addressed accounting for differences between contractual cash flows and cash flows expected to be collected from an investor’s initial investment in loans or debt securities (loans) acquired in a transfer if those differences are attributable, at least in part, to credit quality. SOP 03-3 includes loans acquired in purchase business combinations, but does not apply to loans originated by the entity. SOP 03-3 is effective for loans acquired in fiscal years beginning after December 15, 2004. The impact of the adoption of SOP 03-3 on the Company’s financial statements is discussed in Note 4.

In December 2004, the FASB issued SFAS No. 123(R). On March 25, 2005, the Securities and Exchange Commission (“SEC”) issued Staff Accounting Bulletin No. 107 (SAB 107). SAB 107 provides guidance regarding the valuation of share-based payment arrangements, the classification of compensation expense, non-GAAP financial measures, first-time adoption of SFAS No. 123(R) in an interim period, capitalization of compensation cost related to share-based payment arrangements, the accounting for income tax effects of share-based payment arrangements upon adoption of SFAS No. 123(R), the modification of employee share options prior to adoption of SFAS No. 123(R) and disclosures in Management’s Discussion and Analysis subsequent to adoption of SFAS No. 123(R). The impact of the adoption of SFAS No. 123(R) and SAB 107 on the Company’s financial statements is discussed in the Stock Compensation Plans section of Note 1.

In December 2004, the FASB issued SFAS No. 153, Exchanges of Nonmonetary Assets—an amendment of APB Opinion No. 29 (“SFAS No. 153”). SFAS No. 153 requires that exchanges of nonmonetary assets be accounted for at fair value unless the exchange lacks commercial substance. A nonmonetary exchange has commercial substance when the future cash flows of an entity are expected to change significantly as a result of the exchange. SFAS No. 153 also eliminates a provision in APB Opinion No. 29 that exempted nonmonetary exchanges of similar productive assets from fair value accounting. SFAS No. 153 is effective for nonmonetary asset exchanges occurring in periods beginning after June 15, 2005. The Company anticipates that the adoption of SFAS No. 153 will not have a material impact on the Company’s financial position or results of operations.

In March 2005, the FASB issued FASB Interpretation No. 47, Accounting for Conditional Asset Retirement Obligations (“FIN 47”). This Interpretation clarifies that the term “conditional asset retirement obligation” as used in SFAS No. 143, Accounting for Asset Retirement Obligations, refers to a legal obligation to perform an asset retirement activity in which the timing and/or method of settlement are conditional on a future event that may or may not be within the control of the entity. According to FIN 47, an entity is required to recognize a liability for the fair value of a conditional asset retirement obligation when incurred if the liability’s fair value can be reasonably estimated. The provisions of FIN 47 are effective for fiscal years ending after December 15, 2005. The Company anticipates that the adoption of FIN 47 will not have a material impact on the Company’s financial position or results of operations.

 

41


In May 2005, the FASB issued SFAS No. 154, Accounting Changes and Error Corrections (“SFAS No. 154”), which requires retrospective application for reporting a voluntary change in accounting principle, unless it is impracticable to do so. SFAS No. 154 provides guidance for determining whether retrospective application of a change in accounting principle is impracticable and also addresses the reporting of a correction of error by restating previously issued financial statements. SFAS No. 154 is effective for accounting changes and corrections of errors made in fiscal years beginning after December 15, 2005. The Company anticipates that the adoption of SFAS No. 153 will not have a material impact on the Company’s financial position or results of operations.

In February 2006, the FASB issued SFAS No. 155, Accounting for Certain Hybrid Financial Instruments-an amendment of FASB Statements No. 133 and 140, (“SFAS No. 155”). SFAS No. 155 amends FASB Statements No. 133, Accounting for Derivative Instruments and Hedging Activities, (“SFAS No. 133”) and No. 140, Accounting for Transfers and Servicing of Financial Assets and Extinguishments of Liabilities, (“SFAS No. 140”) . SFAS No. 155 resolves issues addressed in SFAS No. 133 Implementation Issue No. D1, “Application of Statement 133 to Beneficial Interests in Securitized Financial Assets.” SFAS No. 155 permits fair value remeasurement for any hybrid financial instrument that contains an embedded derivative that otherwise would require bifurcation, clarifies which interest-only strips and principal-only strips are not subject to the requirements of SFAS No. 133, establishes a requirement to evaluate interests in securitized financial assets to identify interests that are freestanding derivatives or that are hybrid financial instruments that contain an embedded derivative requiring bifurcation, clarifies that concentrations of credit risk in the form of subordination are not embedded derivatives, and amends SFAS No. 140 to eliminate the prohibition on a qualifying special-purpose entity from holding a derivative financial instrument that pertains to a beneficial interest other than another derivative financial instrument. SFAS No. 155 is effective for all financial instruments acquired or issued after the beginning of an entity’s first fiscal year that begins after September 15, 2006. The Company anticipates that the adoption of SFAS No. 155 will not have a material impact on the Company’s financial position or results of operations.

In November 2005, the FASB issued FASB Staff Position 115-1 and 124-1, The Meaning of Other-Than-Temporary Impairment and Its Application to Certain Investments (FSP 115-1/124-1). FSP 115-1/124-1 addresses the determination as to when an investment is considered impaired, whether that impairment is other than temporary, and the measurement of an impairment loss. This FSP also includes accounting considerations subsequent to the recognition of an other-than-temporary impairment and requires certain disclosures about unrealized losses that have not been recognized as other-than-temporary impairments. The guidance in this FSP amends FASB Statements No. 115, Accounting for Certain Investments in Debt and Equity Securities , and No. 124, Accounting for Certain Investments Held by Not-for-Profit Organizations , and APB Opinion No. 18, The Equity Method of Accounting for Investments in Common Stock . FSP 115-1/124-1 is effective for reporting periods beginning after December 15, 2005. The Company anticipates that the adoption of FSP 115-1/124-1 will not have a material impact on the Company’s financial position or results of operations.

In December 2005, the FASB issued FSP 94-6-1, Terms of Loan Products That May Give Rise to a Concentration of Credit Risk . FSP defines in what circumstances the terms of loan products give rise to a concentration of credit risk and provides disclosure guidance and accounting considerations for entities that originate, hold, guarantee, service, or invest in loan products whose terms may give rise to a concentration of credit risk. Adoption of FSP 94-6-1 had no impact on the Company’s financial position or results of operations.

RECLASSIFICATIONS: Certain reclassifications have been made to the 2003 and 2004 consolidated financial statements in order to conform to the classifications adopted for reporting in 2005.

NOTE 2 – ACQUISITION ACTIVITY:

Acadiana Bancshares, Inc.

The Company completed the acquisition of 100% of the outstanding stock of Acadiana Bancshares, Inc. (“Acadiana”) at the close of business on February 28, 2003, in exchange for 1,227,276 shares valued at $38.6 million and $9.8 million in cash. The shares were valued by using the closing price of the Company’s stock for the three days immediately prior to, and after, February 14, 2003, the earliest date that the number of shares to be issued was known. This acquisition enhanced the Company’s position as a leading financial services provider in its primary market base area and in the state of Louisiana.

 

42


The Acadiana transaction resulted in $24.1 million of goodwill, $4.0 million of core deposit intangibles and $313,000 of other intangibles. The goodwill acquired is not tax deductible. The amount allocated to the core deposit intangible was determined by an independent valuation and is being amortized over the estimated useful life of eight years using a double declining method. The amount allocated to other intangibles represents the estimated value assigned to mortgage servicing rights and is being amortized over an estimated useful life of seven years using an interest method.

In the acquisition, shareholders of Acadiana received total consideration of $39.38 per outstanding share of Acadiana common stock in a combination of the Company’s common stock and cash. The combination was accounted for as a purchase with the purchase price allocated as follows:

 

(dollars in thousands)

   Amount  

Cash and due from banks

   $ 30,901  

Investment securities

     58,912  

Loans held for sale

     3,573  

Loans, net

     189,570  

Premises and equipment

     8,719  

Goodwill

     24,122  

Core deposit and other intangibles

     4,357  

Other assets

     16,390  

Deposits

     (209,972 )

Short-term borrowings

     (1,326 )

Long-term debt

     (73,707 )

Other liabilities

     (3,173 )
        

Total purchase price

   $ 48,366  
        

The results of operations of the Company subsequent to the acquisition date are included in the Company’s consolidated statements of income.

Alliance Bank of Baton Rouge

The Company completed the acquisition of 100% of the outstanding stock of Alliance Bank of Baton Rouge (“Alliance”) on February 29, 2004, in exchange for 359,106 shares of the Company’s common stock valued at $15,496,000. The shares were valued by using the average of the closing prices of the Company’s stock for the three trading days immediately prior to and after the date of the definitive agreement. This acquisition expanded the Company’s presence into Baton Rouge, Louisiana.

The Alliance transaction resulted in $5.2 million of goodwill and $1.2 million of core deposit intangibles. The goodwill acquired is not tax deductible. The amount allocated to the core deposit intangible was determined by an independent valuation and is being amortized over the estimated useful life of seven years using the straight line method.

In the acquisition, shareholders of Alliance received total consideration of $16.18 per outstanding share of Alliance common stock in exchange for the Company’s common stock. The combination was accounted for as a purchase with the purchase price allocated as follows:

 

(dollars in thousands)

   Amount  

Cash and due from banks

   $ 4,320  

Investment securities

     11,218  

Loans, net

     53,125  

Premises and equipment, net

     1,125  

Goodwill

     5,169  

Core deposit and other intangibles

     1,200  

Other assets

     1,970  

Deposits

     (61,772 )

Other liabilities

     (859 )
        

Total purchase price

   $ 15,496  
        

 

43


The results of operations of the Company subsequent to the acquisition date are included in the Company’s consolidated statements of income.

American Horizons Bancorp, Inc.

The Company completed the acquisition of 100% of the outstanding stock of American Horizons Bancorp, Inc. of Monroe (“American Horizons”) on January 31, 2005 in exchange for 990,435 shares of the Company’s common stock valued at $47,744,000 and $653,000 in cash. The shares were valued by using the average of the closing prices of the Company’s stock for the ten trading days five days prior to the definitive agreement. The acquisition expanded the Company’s presence in North Louisiana.

The American Horizons transaction resulted in $28.5 million of goodwill and $5.0 million of core deposit intangibles. The goodwill acquired is not tax deductible. The amount allocated to the core deposit intangible was determined by an independent valuation and is being amortized over the estimated useful life of ten years using the straight line method.

In the acquisition, shareholders of American Horizons received total consideration of $22.35 per outstanding share of American Horizons common stock in exchange for a combination of the Company’s common stock and cash. The combination was accounted for as a purchase with the purchase price allocated as follows:

 

(dollars in thousands)

   Amount  

Cash and due from banks

   $ 21,389  

Investment securities

     11,504  

Loans, net

     194,698  

Premises and equipment, net

     7,238  

Goodwill

     28,475  

Core deposit and other intangibles

     5,039  

Other assets

     8,988  

Deposits

     (192,653 )

Borrowings

     (34,207 )

Other liabilities

     (2,074 )
        

Total purchase price

   $ 48,397  
        

The results of operations of the Company subsequent to the acquisition date are included in the Company’s consolidated statements of income. The following pro forma information for the years ended December 31, 2005 and 2004 reflects the Company’s estimated consolidated results of operations as if the acquisition of American Horizons occurred at January 1 of the respective period, unadjusted for potential cost savings.

 

(dollars in thousands, except per share data)

   2005    2004

Interest and noninterest income

   $ 163,054    $ 150,893

Net Income

     22,161      30,139

Earnings per share – basic

   $ 2.40    $ 3.22

Earnings per share – diluted

   $ 2.24    $ 2.99

 

44


NOTE 3 – INVESTMENT SECURITIES:

The amortized cost and fair values of investment securities, with gross unrealized gains and losses, consist of the following:

 

(dollars in thousands)

   Amortized
Cost
   Gross
Unrealized
Gains
   Gross
Unrealized
Losses
   

Fair

Value

December 31, 2005

          

Securities available for sale:

          

U.S. Government and federal agency obligations

   $ 98,839    $ 12    $ (1,408 )   $ 97,443

Obligations of state and political subdivisions

     39,191      827      (287 )     39,731

Mortgage backed securities

     415,219      49      (8,947 )     406,321
                            

Total securities available for sale

   $ 553,249    $ 888    $ (10,642 )   $ 543,495
                            

Securities held to maturity:

          

U.S. Government and federal agency obligations

   $ 8,075    $ —      $ (180 )   $ 7,895

Obligations of state and political subdivisions

     13,285      271      (9 )     13,547

Mortgage backed securities

     7,727      202      (34 )     7,895
                            

Total securities held to maturity

   $ 29,087    $ 473    $ (223 )   $ 29,337
                            

December 31, 2004

          

Securities available for sale:

          

U.S. Government and federal agency obligations

   $ 53,715    $ 11    $ (490 )   $ 53,236

Obligations of state and political subdivisions

     46,815      1,577      (13 )     48,379

Mortgage backed securities

     425,342      2,338      (2,362 )     425,318
                            

Total securities available for sale

   $ 525,872    $ 3,926    $ (2,865 )   $ 526,933
                            

Securities held to maturity:

          

U.S. Government and federal agency obligations

   $ 13,088    $ 76    $ (27 )   $ 13,137

Obligations of state and political subdivisions

     14,053      546      —         14,599

Mortgage backed securities

     12,881      457      (13 )     13,325
                            

Total securities held to maturity

   $ 40,022    $ 1,079    $ (40 )   $ 41,061
                            

Securities with carrying values of $409,668,000 and $360,767,000 were pledged to secure public deposits and other borrowings at December 31, 2005 and 2004, respectively.

The amortized cost and estimated fair value by maturity of investment securities at December 31, 2005 are shown in the following table. Securities are classified according to their contractual maturities without consideration of principal amortization, potential prepayments or call options. Accordingly, actual maturities may differ from contractual maturities.

 

45


           Securities Available for Sale   

Securities

Held to Maturity

(dollars in thousands)

   Weighted
Average
Yield
    Amortized
Cost
  

Fair

Value

   Amortized
Cost
   Fair
Value

Within one year or less

   4.01 %   $ 17,881    $ 17,794    $ —      $ —  

One through five years

   4.04       119,890      117,837      9,523      9,314

After five through ten years

   4.35       109,141      107,768      10,309      10,530

Over ten years

   4.43       306,337      300,096      9,255      9,493
                                 

Totals

   4.32 %   $ 553,249    $ 543,495    $ 29,087    $ 29,337
                                 

Management evaluates securities for other-than-temporary impairment at least quarterly, and more frequently when economic or market concerns warrant such evaluation. Consideration is given to 1) the length of time and the extent to which the fair value has been less than cost, 2) the financial condition and near-term prospects of the issuer, and 3) the intent and ability of the Company to retain its investment in the issuer for a period of time sufficient to allow for any anticipated recovery in fair value. In analyzing an issuer’s financial condition, management considers whether the securities are issued by the federal government or its agencies, whether downgrades by bond rating agencies have occurred, and industry analysts’ reports. As of December 31, 2005, management’s assessment concluded that no declines are deemed to be other than temporary.

Information pertaining to securities with gross unrealized losses at December 31, 2005, aggregated by investment category and length of time that individual securities have been in a continuous loss position, follows:

 

    

Less Than

Twelve Months

  

Over

Twelve Months

   Total

(dollars in thousands)

   Gross
Unrealized
Losses
   

Fair

Value

   Gross
Unrealized
Losses
   

Fair

Value

   Gross
Unrealized
Losses
   

Fair

Value

December 31, 2005

              

Securities available for sale:

              

U.S. Government and federal agency obligations

   $ (226 )   $ 35,656    $ (1,182 )   $ 40,504    $ (1,408 )   $ 76,160

Obligations of state and political subdivisions

     (234 )     17,446      (53 )     2,525      (287 )     19,971

Mortgage backed securities

     (3,294 )     226,571      (5,653 )     164,497      (8,947 )     391,068
                                            

Total securities available for sale

   $ (3,754 )   $ 279,673    $ (6,888 )   $ 207,526    $ (10,642 )   $ 487,199
                                            

Securities held to maturity:

              

U.S. Government and federal agency obligations

   $ (92 )   $ 4,998    $ (88 )   $ 2,898    $ (180 )   $ 7,896

Obligations of state and political subdivisions

     (9 )     1,001      —         —        (9 )     1,001

Mortgage backed securities

     —         —        (34 )     1,839      (34 )     1,839
                                            

Total securities held to maturity

   $ (101 )   $ 5,999    $ (122 )   $ 4,737    $ (223 )   $ 10,736
                                            

December 31, 2004

              

Securities available for sale:

              

U.S. Government and federal agency obligations

   $ (490 )   $ 52,226    $ —       $ —      $ (490 )   $ 52,226

Obligations of state and political subdivisions

     (13 )     3,922      —         —        (13 )     3,922

Mortgage backed securities

     (978 )     155,906      (1,384 )     56,425      (2,362 )     212,331
                                            

Total securities available for sale

   $ (1,481 )   $ 212,054    $ (1,384 )   $ 56,425    $ (2,865 )   $ 268,479
                                            

Securities held to maturity:

              

U.S. Government and federal agency obligations

   $ (27 )   $ 2,952    $ —       $ —      $ (27 )   $ 2,952

Mortgage backed securities

     (4 )     2,705      (9 )     822      (13 )     3,527
                                            

Total securities held to maturity

   $ (31 )   $ 5,657    $ (9 )   $ 822    $ (40 )   $ 6,479
                                            

 

46


At December 31, 2005, one hundred ninety-eight debt securities have unrealized losses of 2.1% of the Company’s amortized cost basis. The unrealized losses for each of the one hundred ninety-eight securities relate principally to market interest rate changes. Seventy-two of the one hundred ninety-eight securities have been in a continuous loss position for over twelve months. The seventy-two securities were primarily issued by either Federal National Mortgage Association (Fannie Mae), Federal Home Loan Mortgage Corporation (Freddie Mac) or Government National Mortgage Association (Ginnie Mae) and are rated AAA or Aaa by Standard and Poor’s or Moody’s, respectively. The seventy-two securities have an aggregate amortized cost basis and unrealized loss of $219,273,000 and $7,010,000, respectively. As management has the ability to hold debt securities until maturity, or for the foreseeable future if classified as available for sale, no declines are deemed to be other than temporary.

At December 31, 2004, ninety-three debt securities have unrealized losses of 1.0% from the Company’s amortized cost basis. The unrealized losses for each of the ninety-three securities relate principally to market interest rate changes. Twenty-six of the ninety-three securities have been in a continuous loss position for over twelve months. The twenty-six securities were issued by either Fannie Mae, Freddie Mac or Ginnie Mae and are rated AAA or Aaa by Standard and Poor’s or Moody’s, respectively. The twenty-six securities have an aggregate amortized cost basis and unrealized loss of $58,640,000 and $1,393,000, respectively. As management has the ability to hold debt securities until maturity, or for the foreseeable future if classified as available for sale, no declines are deemed to be other than temporary.

The following is a summary of realized gains and losses from the sale of securities classified as available for sale, the tax benefit (provision) of which is calculated at the federal income tax rate of 35%.

 

     Years Ended December 31,  

(dollars in thousands)

   2005     2004     2003  

Realized gains

   $ 386     $ 748     $ 648  

Realized losses

     (425 )     (50 )     (381 )
                        

Net realized gains (losses)

   $ (39 )   $ 698     $ 267  
                        

At December 31, 2005, the Company’s exposure to three investment security issuers exceeded 10% of shareholders’ equity:

 

(dollars in thousands)

   Amortized
Cost
   Market
Value

Federal National Mortgage Association (Fannie Mae)

   $ 249,937    $ 244,613

Federal Home Loan Mortgage Corporation (Freddie Mac)

     170,311      166,468

Federal Home Loan Bank (FHLB)

     57,396      56,681
             

Balance, end of year

   $ 477,644    $ 467,762
             

 

47


NOTE 4 – LOANS RECEIVABLE:

Loans receivable at December 31, 2005 and 2004 consists of the following:

 

(dollars in thousands)

   2005    2004

Residential mortgage loans:

     

Residential 1-4 family

   $ 430,111    $ 387,079

Construction

     30,611      33,031
             

Total residential mortgage loans

     460,722      420,110
             

Commercial loans:

     

Real estate

     545,868      419,427

Business

     376,966      307,614
             

Total commercial loans

     922,834      727,041
             

Consumer loans:

     

Indirect automobile

     229,646      222,480

Home equity

     230,363      213,533

Other

     74,951      67,462
             

Total consumer loans

     534,960      503,475
             

Total loans receivable

   $ 1,918,516    $ 1,650,626
             

Loans receivable includes approximately $567,881,000 and $585,804,000 of adjustable rate loans and $1,350,635,000 and $1,064,822,000 of fixed rate loans at December 31, 2005 and 2004, respectively. The amount of loans for which the accrual of interest has been discontinued totaled approximately $4,773,000 and $4,455,000 at December 31, 2005 and 2004, respectively. The amount of interest income that would have been recorded in 2005, 2004 and 2003 if these loans had been current in accordance with their original terms was approximately $289,000, $322,000 and $276,000, respectively. Accruing loans past due 90 days or more total $1,003,000 and $1,209,000 as of December 31, 2005 and 2004, respectively.

A summary of changes in the allowance for loan losses for the years ended December 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003 is as follows:

 

(dollars in thousands)

   2005     2004     2003  

Balance, beginning of year

   $ 20,116     $ 18,230     $ 13,101  

Addition due to purchase transaction

     4,893       587       2,439  

Adjustment for loans transferred to held for sale

     (350 )     —         —    

Provision charged to operations

     17,069       4,041       6,300  

Loans charged-off

     (5,541 )     (4,112 )     (4,782 )

Recoveries

     1,895       1,370       1,172  
                        

Balance, end of year

   $ 38,082     $ 20,116     $ 18,230  
                        

The following is a summary of information pertaining to impaired loans as of December 31:

 

(dollars in thousands)

   2005    2004

Impaired loans without a valuation allowance

   $ —      $ 16

Impaired loans with a valuation allowance

     9,180      9,163
             

Total impaired loans

   $ 9,180    $ 9,179
             

Valuation allowance related to impaired loans

   $ 2,001    $ 1,788
             

 

48


(dollars in thousands)

   2005    2004    2003

Average investment in impaired loans

   $ 10,713    $ 4,128    $ 3,534

Interest income recognized on impaired loans

     74      149      211

Interest income recognized on a cash basis on impaired loans

     41      175      170

As of December 31, 2005, the Company was not committed to lend additional funds to any customer whose loan was classified as impaired.

The Company acquires loans individually and in groups or portfolios. For certain acquired loans that have experienced deterioration of credit quality between origination and the Company’s acquisition of the loans, the amount paid for a loan reflects the Company’s determination that it is probable the Company will be unable to collect all amounts due according to the loan’s contractual terms. At acquisition, the Company reviews each loan to determine whether there is evidence of deterioration of credit quality since origination and if it is probable that the Company will be unable to collect all amounts due according to loan’s contractual terms. If both conditions exist, the Company determines whether each such loan is to be accounted for individually or whether such loans will be assembled into pools of loans based on common risk characteristics. The Company considers expected prepayments and estimates the amount and timing of undiscounted expected principal, interest and other cash flows for each loan and subsequently aggregated pool of loans. The Company determines the excess of the loan’s or pool’s scheduled contractual principal and contractual interest payments over all cash flows expected at acquisition as an amount that should not be accreted (nonaccretable difference). The remaining amount, representing the excess of the loan’s or pool’s cash flows expected to be collected over the amount paid, is accreted into interest income over the remaining life of the loan or pool (accretable yield).

Over the life of the loan or pool, the Company continues to estimate cash flows expected to be collected. The Company evaluates at the balance sheet date whether the present value of its loans determined using the effective interest rates has decreased and if so, recognizes a loss. For any remaining increases in cash flows expected to be collected, the Company adjusts the amount of accretable yield recognized on a prospective basis over the loan’s or pool’s remaining life.

During 2005, the Company acquired certain impaired loans through the American Horizons acquisition which are subject to SOP 03-3. The Company’s valuation allowances for all acquired loans subject to SOP 03-3 would reflect only those losses incurred after acquisition. As of December 31, 2005, there was no valuation allowance associated with loans subject to SOP 03-3. The carrying value of these loans is included in the balance sheet amounts of loans receivable as December 31. The carrying value of these loans was $1,222,000 at December 31, 2005.

 

(dollars in thousands)

   2005

Contractually required principal and interest at acquisition

   $ 8,489

Nonaccretable difference (expected losses and foregone interest)

     1,673
      

Cash flows expected to be collected at acquisition

     6,816

Accretable yield

     2,326
      

Basis in acquired loans at acquisition

   $ 4,490
      

 

49


(dollars in thousands)

   Accretable
Yield
 

Balance, December 31, 2004

   $ —    

Additions

     2,326  

Accretion

     (68 )

Transfers from nonaccretable difference to accretable yield

     353  

Disposals

     (1,082 )
        

Balance, December 31, 2005

   $ 1,529  
        

NOTE 5 – LOAN SERVICING:

Loans serviced for others are not included in the accompanying consolidated balance sheets. The unpaid principal balances of loans serviced for others were $36,007,000 and $19,153,000 at December 31, 2005 and 2004, respectively. Custodial escrow balances maintained in connection with the foregoing portfolio of loans serviced for others, and included in demand deposits, were approximately $60,000 and $47,000 at December 31, 2005 and 2004, respectively.

The balance of mortgage servicing rights was $96,000 and $176,000 at December 31, 2005 and 2004, respectively.

NOTE 6 – PREMISES AND EQUIPMENT:

Premises and equipment at December 31, 2005 and 2004 consists of the following:

 

(dollars in thousands)

   2005    2004

Land

   $ 14,932    $ 6,387

Buildings

     35,292      29,219

Furniture, fixtures and equipment

     27,298      23,970
             

Total premises and equipment

     77,522      59,576

Less accumulated depreciation

     22,512      20,019
             

Total premises and equipment, net

   $ 55,010    $ 39,557
             

Depreciation expense was $3,833,000, $2,971,000 and $2,544,000 for the years ended December 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003, respectively.

The Company actively engages in leasing office space it has available. Leases have different terms ranging from monthly rental to five-year leases. At December 31, 2005, monthly lease income was $99,000 per month. Total lease income for 2005, 2004 and 2003 was $1,148,000 $1,023,000 and $884,000, respectively. Income from leases is reported as a reduction in occupancy and equipment expense. The total allocated cost of the portion of the buildings held for lease at December 31, 2005 and 2004 was $7,416,000 and $6,839,000, respectively, with related accumulated depreciation of $1,647,000 and $1,429,000, respectively.

The Company leases certain branch offices, land and ATM facilities through non-cancelable operating leases with terms that range from one to fifteen years, with renewal options thereafter. Certain of the leases have escalation clauses and renewal options ranging from three to ten years. Total rent expense for the years ended December 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003 amounted to $1,017,000, $963,000 and $914,000, respectively.

 

50


Minimum future annual rent commitments under these agreements for the indicated periods follow:

 

(dollars in thousands)

   Amount

Year Ending December 31,

  

2006

   $ 967

2007

     717

2008

     492

2009

     439

2010

     342

2011 and thereafter

     1,473
      

Total

   $ 4,430
      

NOTE 7 – GOODWILL AND OTHER INTANGIBLE ASSETS:

Effective January 1, 2002, the Company adopted the requirements of SFAS No. 142, Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets . Under SFAS No. 142, goodwill and intangible assets deemed to have indefinite lives are no longer amortized but are subject to annual impairment tests in accordance with the provisions of SFAS No. 142. Other intangible assets continue to be amortized over their useful lives.

The Company performed the required annual impairment tests of goodwill as of October 1, 2005 and 2004. The results of these tests did not indicate impairment of the Company’s recorded goodwill. Changes to the carrying amount of goodwill not subject to amortization for the years ended December 31, 2005 and 2004 follows:

 

(dollars in thousands)

   Amount  

Balance, December 31, 2003

   $ 59,523  

Goodwill acquired during year

     5,209  

Impairment losses

     —    
        

Balance, December 31, 2004

   $ 64,732  

Goodwill acquired during year

     28,475  

Other goodwill adjustments

     (40 )

Impairment losses

     —    
        

Balance, December 31, 2005

   $ 93,167  
        

The Company’s purchase accounting intangible assets from prior acquisitions which are subject to amortization include core deposit intangibles and mortgage servicing rights with the following carrying values:

 

     December 31, 2005    December 31, 2004

(dollars in thousands)

   Gross
Carrying
Amount
   Accumulated
Amortization
   Net
Carrying
Amount
   Gross
Carrying
Amount
   Accumulated
Amortization
   Net
Carrying
Amount

Core deposit intangibles

   $ 10,282    $ 2,873    $ 7,409    $ 5,244    $ 1,667    $ 3,577

Mortgage servicing rights

     313      269      44      313      210      103
                                         

Total

   $ 10,595    $ 3,142    $ 7,453    $ 5,557    $ 1,877    $ 3,680
                                         

 

51


The related amortization expense of purchase accounting intangible assets from prior acquisitions follows:

 

(dollars in thousands)

   Amount

Aggregate amortization expense:

  

For the year ended December 31, 2003

   $ 912

For the year ended December 31, 2004

     964

For the year ended December 31, 2005

     1,265

Estimated amortization expense:

  

For the year ended December 31, 2006

   $ 1,154

For the year ended December 31, 2007

     1,048

For the year ended December 31, 2008

     1,035

For the year ended December 31, 2009

     1,035

For the year ended December 31, 2010

For the years ended December 31, 2011 and thereafter

    
 
1,035
2,147

NOTE 8 – DEPOSITS:

Certificates of deposit with a balance of $100,000 and over were $311,470,000 and $235,724,000 at December 31, 2005 and 2004, respectively. A schedule of maturities of all certificates of deposit as of December 31, 2005 is as follows:

 

(dollars in thousands)

   Amount

Year Ending December 31,

  

2006

   $ 459,533

2007

     198,186

2008

     70,733

2009

     13,639

2010

     16,108

2011 and thereafter

     4,582
      

Total

   $ 762,781
      

NOTE 9 – SHORT-TERM BORROWINGS:

Short-term borrowings at December 31, 2005 and 2004 are summarized as follows:

 

(dollars in thousands)

   2005    2004

Securities sold under agreements to repurchase

   $ 68,104    $ 44,453

Federal Home Loan Bank advances

     745      192,000
             

Total short-term borrowings

   $ 68,849    $ 236,453
             

Securities sold under agreements to repurchase, which are classified as secured borrowings, generally mature daily. Securities sold under agreements to repurchase are reflected at the amount of cash received in connection with the transaction. The Company may be required to provide additional collateral based on the fair value of the underlying securities.

The short-term borrowings at December 31, 2005 consist of one FHLB advance with a maturity term of one year, at a fixed interest rate of 4.22%. The short-term borrowings at December 31, 2004 consist of FHLB advances with maturity terms of seven days, at fixed interest rates ranging from 1.98% to 2.38%.

 

52


(dollars in thousands)

   2005     2004     2003  

Outstanding at December 31

   $ 68,849     $ 236,453     $ 162,590  

Maximum month-end outstandings

     199,574       246,354       162,590  

Average daily outstandings

     143,100       188,589       115,014  

Average rate during the year

     2.37 %     1.40 %     1.24 %

Average rate at year end

     1.83 %     2.01 %     1.13 %

NOTE 10 – LONG-TERM DEBT:

Long-term debt at December 31, 2005 and 2004 is summarized as follows:

 

(dollars in thousands)

   2005    2004

Federal Home Loan Bank notes at:

     

4.109 to 4.344% variable, 3 month LIBOR index

   $ 55,000    $ 35,000

2.468 to 7.283% fixed

     157,931      140,159

Junior subordinated debt:

     

Statutory Trust I, 3 month LIBOR plus 3.25%

     10,310      10,310

Statutory Trust II, 3 month LIBOR plus 3.15%

     10,310      10,310

Statutory Trust III, 3 month LIBOR plus 2.00%

     10,310      10,310

American Horizons Statutory Trust I, 3 month LIBOR plus 3.15%

     6,351      —  
             

Total long-term debt

   $ 250,212    $ 206,089
             

FHLB advance repayments are amortized over periods ranging from eighteen months to twenty years, and have a balloon feature at maturity. Advances are collateralized by a blanket pledge of mortgage loans and a secondary pledge of FHLB stock and FHLB demand deposits. Total additional advances available from the FHLB at December 31, 2005 were $344,644,000 under the blanket floating lien and $ 96,046,000 with a pledge of investment securities. The weighted average rate at December 31, 2005 was 4.59%.

The Company and the Bank also have various funding arrangements with commercial banks providing up to $75,000,000 in the form of federal funds and other lines of credit. At December 31, 2005, there was no balance outstanding on these lines and all of the funding was available to the Company.

Junior Subordinated Debt consists of a total of $37,281,000 in Junior Subordinated Deferrable Interest Debentures of the Company issued to statutory trusts that were funded by the issuance of floating rate capital securities of the trusts. Issues of $10,310,000 each were completed in November 2002, June 2003 and September 2004. The remaining issue of $6,351,000, which was completed in March 2003, was assumed in the American Horizons acquisition. The debentures qualify as Tier 1 Capital for regulatory purposes. The term of the securities is 30 years, and they are callable at par by the Company anytime after 5 years. Interest is payable quarterly and may be deferred at any time at the election of the Company for up to 20 consecutive quarterly periods. During such period the Company is subject to certain restrictions, including being prohibited from declaring dividends to its common shareholders.

Advances and long-term debt at December 31, 2005 have maturities in future years as follows:

 

(dollars in thousands)

   Amount

Year Ending December 31,

  

2006

   $ 24,082

2007

     35,969

2008

     34,642

2009

     78,054

2010

     37,167

2011 and thereafter

     40,298
      

Total

   $ 250,212
      

 

53


NOTE 11 – ON-BALANCE SHEET DERIVATIVE INSTRUMENTS AND HEDGING ACTIVITIES:

The Company has stand alone derivative financial instruments in the form of interest rate swap agreements, which derive their value from underlying interest rates. These transactions involve both credit and market risk. The notional amounts are amounts on which calculations, payments, and the value of the derivatives are based. Notional amounts do not represent direct credit exposures. Direct credit exposure is limited to the net difference between the calculated amounts to be received and paid, if any. Such difference, which represents the fair value of the derivative instruments, is reflected on the Company’s balance sheet in other assets and other liabilities.

The Company is exposed to credit-related losses in the event of nonperformance by the counterparties to these agreements. The Company controls the credit risk of its financial contracts through credit approvals, limits and monitoring procedures, and does not expect any counterparties to fail their obligations. The Company deals only with primary dealers.

Derivative instruments are generally either negotiated over-the-counter (OTC) contracts or standardized contracts executed on a recognized exchange. Negotiated OTC derivative contracts are generally entered into between two counterparties that negotiate specific agreement terms, including the underlying instrument, amount, exercise prices and maturity.

At December 31, 2005 and 2004, the information pertaining to outstanding interest rate swap agreements is as follows:

 

(dollars in thousands)

   2005     2004  

Notional amount

   $ 78,450     $ 61,000  

Weighted average pay rate

     2.8 %     3.5 %

Weighted average receive rate

     2.3 %     1.3 %

Weighted average maturity in years

     4.6       4.2  

Unrealized gain (loss) relating to interest rate swaps

   $ 1,093     $ (461 )

No interest rate swap agreements were terminated prior to maturity in 2005 or 2004. Changes in the fair value of interest rate swaps designated as hedging instruments of the variability of cash flows associated with long-term debt are reported in other comprehensive income. These amounts subsequently are reclassified into interest income and interest expense as a yield adjustment in the same period in which the related interest on the long-term debt affects earnings. As a result of these interest rate swaps, interest income was increased by $82,000 and $0 and interest expense was increased by $470,000 and $1,221,000 for the years ended December 31, 2005 and 2004, respectively.

Risk management results for the years ended December 31, 2005 and 2004 related to the balance sheet hedging of long-term debt indicate that the hedges were 100% effective and that there was no component of the derivative instruments’ gain or loss which was excluded from the assessment of hedge effectiveness.

NOTE 12 – INCOME TAXES:

The provision for income tax expense consists of the following:

 

     Years Ended December 31,  

(dollars in thousands)

   2005     2004     2003  

Current federal expense

   $ 8,784     $ 8,400     $ 8,554  

Deferred federal expense

     (3,236 )     1,816       216  

Tax credits

     (568 )     (484 )     (91 )

Tax benefits attributable to equity-based compensation plans allocated to paid in capital

     2,452       1,836       1,537  
                        

Total income tax expense

   $ 7,432     $ 11,568     $ 10,216  
                        

 

54


There was a balance due of federal income taxes of $2,366,000 and $441,000 at December 31, 2005 and 2004, respectively.

The provision for federal income taxes differs from the amount computed by applying the federal income tax statutory rate of 35 percent on income from operations as indicated in the following analysis:

 

     Years Ended December 31,  

(dollars in thousands)

   2005     2004     2003  

Federal tax based on statutory rate

   $ 10,301     $ 13,617     $ 11,819  

Increase (decrease) resulting from:

      

Effect of tax-exempt income

     (2,831 )     (2,445 )     (2,227 )

Interest and other nondeductible expenses

     372       263       240  

Nondeductible ESOP expense

     149       625       518  

Tax credit

     (568 )     (484 )     (91 )

Other

     9       (8 )     (43 )
                        

Income tax expense

   $ 7,432     $ 11,568     $ 10,216  
                        

Effective rate

     25.3 %     29.7 %     30.3 %

The net deferred tax asset (liability) at December 31, 2005 and 2004 is as follows:

 

(dollars in thousands)

   2005     2004  

Deferred tax asset:

    

Allowance for loan losses

   $ 12,803     $ 6,565  

Discount on purchased loans

     521       —    

Deferred compensation

     426       289  

Time deposits

     391       635  

Borrowings

     1,468       1,833  

Unrealized loss on cash flow hedges

     —         161  

Unrealized loss on investments classified as available for sale

     3,414       —    

Other

     647       612  
                

Subtotal

     19,670       10,095  
                

Deferred tax liability:

    

FHLB stock

     (1,067 )     (1,686 )

Premises and equipment

     (3,636 )     (3,526 )

Acquisition intangibles

     (5,502 )     (3,434 )

Deferred loan costs

     (1,074 )     —    

Unrealized gain on cash flow hedges

     (487 )     —    

Unrealized gain on investments classified as available for sale

     —         (371 )

Other

     (777 )     (682 )
                

Subtotal

     (12,543 )     (9,699 )
                

Deferred tax asset, net

   $ 7,127     $ 396  
                

Retained earnings at December 31, 2005 and 2004 included approximately $21,864,000 accumulated prior to January 1, 1987 for which no provision for federal income taxes has been made. If this portion of retained earnings is used in the future for any purpose other than to absorb bad debts, it will be added to future taxable income.

 

55


NOTE 13 – EARNINGS PER SHARE:

Weighted average shares of common stock outstanding for basic EPS excludes the weighted average shares not released by the Employee Stock Ownership Plan (“ESOP”) of 1,593, 39,761 and 96,511 shares at December 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003, respectively and the weighted average unvested shares in the Recognition and Retention Plan (“RRP”) of 265,873, 201,128 and 169,591 shares at December 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003, respectively. Shares not included in the calculation of diluted EPS because they are anti-dilutive were stock options of 22,000, 66,750 and 36,250 and RRP grants of 27,171, 16,875 and 8,750 at December 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003, respectively. The following sets forth the computation of basic net income per common share and diluted net income per common share.

 

     Years Ended December 31,
     2005    2004    2003

Numerator:

        

Income applicable to common shares

   $ 22,000,000    $ 27,339,000    $ 23,552,000
                    

Denominator:

        

Weighted average common shares outstanding

     9,154,994      8,377,008      7,929,334

Effect of dilutive securities:

        

Stock options outstanding

     591,301      656,281      631,046

Warrants

     11,099      8,838      —  

RRP grants

     55,108      50,764      46,555
                    

Weighted average common shares outstanding - assuming dilution

     9,812,502      9,092,891      8,606,935
                    

Earnings per common share

   $ 2.40    $ 3.26    $ 2.97

Earnings per common share – assuming dilution

   $ 2.24    $ 3.01    $ 2.74

NOTE 14 – CAPITAL REQUIREMENTS AND OTHER REGULATORY MATTERS:

The Company (on a consolidated basis) and the Bank are subject to various regulatory capital requirements administered by the federal and state banking agencies. Failure to meet minimum capital requirements can initiate certain mandatory and possibly additional discretionary actions by regulators that, if undertaken, could have a direct material effect on the Company’s financial statements. Under capital adequacy guidelines and the regulatory framework for prompt corrective action, the Company and the Bank must meet specific capital guidelines that involve quantitative measures of their assets, liabilities and certain off-balance sheet items as calculated under regulatory accounting practices. The capital amounts and classification are also subject to qualitative judgments by the regulators about components, risk weightings and other factors. Prompt corrective action provisions are not applicable to bank holding companies.

Quantitative measures established by regulation to ensure capital adequacy require the Company and the Bank to maintain minimum amounts and ratios of total and Tier 1 capital to risk-weighted assets and of Tier 1 capital to average assets. Management believes, as of December 31, 2005 and 2004, that the Company and the Bank met all capital adequacy requirements to which they are subject.

As of December 31, 2005, the most recent notification from the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation categorized the Bank as well capitalized under the regulatory framework for prompt corrective action. To be categorized as well capitalized, an institution must maintain minimum total risk-based, Tier 1 risk-based and Tier 1 leveraged ratios as set forth in the following table. There are no conditions or events since the notification that management believes have changed the Bank’s category. The Company’s and the Bank’s actual capital amounts and ratios as of December 31, 2005 and 2004 are also presented in the table.

 

56


     Actual     Minimum     Well Capitalized  

(dollars in thousands)

   Amount    Ratio     Amount    Ratio     Amount    Ratio  

December 31, 2005

               

Tier 1 leverage capital:

               

IBERIABANK Corporation

   $ 204,778    7.65 %   $ 107,073    4.00 %   $ N/A    N/A %

IBERIABANK

     187,674    7.03       106,844    4.00       133,554    5.00  

Tier 1 risk-based capital:

               

IBERIABANK Corporation

     204,778    10.70       76,562    4.00       N/A    N/A  

IBERIABANK

     187,674    9.81       76,519    4.00       114,779    6.00  

Total risk-based capital:

               

IBERIABANK Corporation

     228,878    11.96       153,124    8.00       N/A    N/A  

IBERIABANK

     211,761    11.07       153,039    8.00       191,298    10.00  

December 31, 2004

               

Tier 1 leverage capital:

               

IBERIABANK Corporation

   $ 181,445    7.63 %   $ 95,085    4.00 %   $ N/A    N/A %

IBERIABANK

     162,127    6.86       94,553    4.00       118,191    5.00  

Tier 1 risk-based capital:

               

IBERIABANK Corporation

     181,445    11.13       65,228    4.00       N/A    N/A  

IBERIABANK

     162,127    9.96       65,091    4.00       97,636    6.00  

Total risk-based capital:

               

IBERIABANK Corporation

     201,561    12.36       130,456    8.00       N/A    N/A  

IBERIABANK

     182,243    11.20       130,181    8.00       162,726    10.00  

NOTE 15 – BENEFIT PLANS:

EMPLOYEE STOCK OWNERSHIP PLAN

In 1995, the Company established an Employee Stock Ownership Plan (“ESOP”) for the benefit of all eligible employees of the Bank. The leveraged ESOP is accounted for in accordance with SOP 93-6, Employers’ Accounting for Employee Stock Ownership Plans . Full-time employees of the Bank who have been credited with at least 1,000 hours of service during a 12-month period and who have attained age 21 were eligible to participate in the ESOP.

Under SOP 93-6, unearned ESOP shares are not considered outstanding and are shown as a reduction of shareholders’ equity as unearned compensation. Dividends on unallocated ESOP shares are considered to be compensation expense. The Company will recognize compensation cost equal to the fair value of the ESOP shares during the periods in which they become committed to be released. To the extent that the fair value of the Company’s ESOP shares differ from the cost of such shares, this differential will be credited to equity. The Company will receive a tax deduction equal to the cost of the shares released. As the loan is internally leveraged, the loan receivable from the ESOP to the Company is not reported as an asset nor is the debt of the ESOP shown as a Company liability. Dividends on allocated shares have been used to pay the ESOP debt.

During 2005, the ESOP was fully funded and the plan was merged into the Company’s 401(k) plan.

Compensation cost related to the ESOP for the years ended December 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003 was $530,000, $2,221,000 and $1,953,000, respectively. The fair value of the unearned ESOP shares, using the closing quoted market price per share at year end was approximately $686,000 at December 31, 2004. There were no unearned

 

57


ESOP shares outstanding as of December 31, 2005. A summary of the ESOP share allocation as of December 31 of the year indicated is as follows:

 

     2005     2004     2003  

Shares allocated beginning of year

   484,974     477,301     464,406  

Shares allocated during the year

   12,923     54,528     59,074  

Shares distributed during the year

   (497,897 )   (46,855 )   (46,179 )
                  

Allocated shares held by ESOP at year end

   —       484,974     477,301  

Unreleased shares

   —       12,923     67,450  
                  

Total ESOP shares

   —       497,897     544,751  
                  

STOCK OPTION PLANS

The Company issues stock options under various plans to directors, officers and other key employees. The option exercise price cannot be less than the fair value of the underlying common stock as of the date of the option grant and the maximum option term cannot exceed ten years. The stock options granted were issued with vesting periods ranging from one-and-a half to seven years. On December 30, 2005, the Board of Directors approved the immediate vesting of all outstanding unvested stock options awarded to employees, officers and directors. As a result of the accelerated vesting, the Company recorded $470,000 of compensation expense in 2005. There was no compensation expense recorded in 2004 or 2003 related to stock option plans. At December 31, 2005 future awards of 716,700 shares could be made under the stock option plans.

The stock option plans also permit the granting of Stock Appreciation Rights (“SARs”). SARs entitle the holder to receive, in the form of cash or stock, the increase in the fair value of Company stock from the date of grant to the date of exercise. No SARs have been issued under the plans.

The following table summarizes the activity related to stock options:

 

     Options
Outstanding
    Weighted Average
Exercise Price

At January 1, 2003

   1,404,343     $ 16.25

Granted

   268,438       32.36

Canceled

   (27,623 )     24.98

Exercised

   (181,203 )     14.17
            

At December 31, 2003

   1,463,955       19.30

Granted

   316,563       45.75

Canceled

   (9,250 )     31.43

Exercised

   (167,593 )     15.06
            

At December 31, 2004

   1,603,675       24.90

Granted

   204,611       48.39

Canceled

   (15,050 )     40.59

Exercised

   (242,275 )     13.96
            

At December 31, 2005

   1,550,961     $ 29.55
            

Exercisable at December 31, 2003

   711,099     $ 14.73

Exercisable at December 31, 2004

   741,073     $ 16.67

Exercisable at December 31, 2005

   1,550,961     $ 29.55

 

58


The following table presents the weighted average remaining life as of December 31, 2005 for options outstanding within the stated exercise prices:

 

     Outstanding    Exercisable

Exercise Price Range Per Share

   Number
of
Options
   Weighted
Average
Exercise
Price
  

Weighted

Average

Remaining
Life

   Number of
Options
   Weighted
Average
Exercise
Price

$10.70 to $12.05

   169,167    $ 11.00    4.1 years    169,167    $ 11.00

$12.70

   107,530    $ 12.70    0.4 years    107,530    $ 12.70

$13.80 to $15.80

   32,036    $ 14.69    3.3 years    32,036    $ 14.69

$16.40 to $19.50

   130,286    $ 17.83    3.7 years    130,286    $ 17.83

$20.00 to $29.90

   358,250    $ 22.36    5.7 years    358,250    $ 22.36

$30.81 to $39.85

   225,959    $ 31.80    7.2 years    225,959    $ 31.80

$41.14 to $49.79

   505,733    $ 46.36    8.7 years    505,733    $ 46.36

$51.11 to $54.91

   22,000    $ 52.96    9.8 years    22,000    $ 52.96

The fair value of each option is estimated on the date of grant using an option-pricing model with the following weighted average assumptions used for 2005, 2004 and 2003 grants: dividend yields of 2.00, 1.80 and 1.94 percent; expected volatility of 24.07, 19.08 and 23.42 percent; risk-free interest rate of 4.33, 4.03 and 3.70 percent; and expected lives of 7.0 years. The weighted average fair value per share at the date of grant for shares granted during 2005, 2004 and 2003 was $14.28, $11.58 and $6.63, respectively.

RESTRICTED STOCK PLANS

The Company established a recognition and retention plan (“RRP”) for certain officers and directors during the year ended December 31, 1996. A supplemental stock benefit plan adopted in 1999 and the 2001 and 2005 Incentive Plans also allow grants of restricted stock. The cost of the shares of restricted stock awarded under these plans is recorded as unearned compensation, a contra equity account. The fair value of the shares on the date of award is recognized as compensation expense over the vesting period, which is generally seven years. The holders of the restricted stock receive dividends and have the right to vote the shares. For the years ended December 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003, the amount included in compensation expense was $1,824,000, $1,113,000 and $757,000, respectively. At December 31, 2005, 1,236 shares were available in the RRP plan for future awards. The weighted average grant date fair value of the restricted stock granted during the years ended December 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003 was $48.85, $46.12 and $34.58, respectively. A summary of the changes in awarded shares follows:

 

     2005     2004     2003  

Balance, beginning of year

   214,013     163,620     120,866  

Granted

   120,207     86,564     85,688  

Forfeited

   (2,875 )   (3,483 )   (2,500 )

Earned and issued

   (43,572 )   (32,688 )   (40,434 )
                  

Balance, end of year

   287,773     214,013     163,620  
                  

401 (K) PROFIT SHARING PLAN

The Company has a 401(k) Profit Sharing Plan covering substantially all of its employees. Annual employer contributions to the plan are set by the Board of Directors. No contributions were made by the Company for the years ended December 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003. The Plan provides, among other things, that participants in the Plan be able to direct the investment of their account balances within the Profit Sharing Plan into alternative investment funds. Participant deferrals under the salary reduction election may be matched by the employer based on a percentage to be determined annually by the employer.

 

59


NOTE 16 – RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS:

In the ordinary course of business, the Bank has granted loans to executive officers and directors and their affiliates amounting to $628,000 and $569,000 at December 31, 2005 and 2004, respectively. During the year ended December 31, 2005, total principal additions were $494,000 and total principal payments were $435,000. Unfunded commitments to executive officers and directors and their affiliates totaled $251,000 at December 31, 2005.

NOTE 17 – OFF-BALANCE SHEET ACTIVITIES:

The Company is a party to financial instruments with off-balance sheet risk in the normal course of business to meet the financing needs of its customers. These financial instruments include commitments to extend credit and standby letters of credit. Such commitments involve, to varying degrees, elements of credit and interest rate risk in excess of the amount recognized in the consolidated balance sheets. The same credit policies are used in these commitments as for on-balance sheet instruments. The Company’s exposure to credit loss in the event of nonperformance by the other parties is represented by the contractual amount of the financial instruments. At December 31, 2005, the fair value of guarantees under commercial and standby letters of credit was $135,000. This amount represents the unamortized fee associated with these guarantees and is included in the consolidated balance sheet of the Company. This fair value will decrease over time as the existing commercial and standby letters of credit approach their expiration dates.

At December 31, 2005 and 2004, the Company had the following financial instruments outstanding, whose contract amounts represent credit risk:

 

     Contract Amount

(dollars in thousands)

   2005    2004

Commitments to grant loans

   $ 48,482    $ 23,927

Unfunded commitments under lines of credit

     397,568      280,320

Commercial and standby letters of credit

     13,241      6,953

Commitments to extend credit are agreements to lend to a customer as long as there is no violation of any condition established in the contract. Commitments generally have fixed expiration dates or other termination clauses and may require payment of a fee. Since many of the commitments are expected to be drawn upon, the total commitment amounts generally represent future cash requirements. The Company evaluates each customer’s credit-worthiness on a case-by-case basis. The amount of collateral, if deemed necessary by the Company upon extension of credit, is based on management’s credit evaluation of the counterparty.

Unfunded commitments under commercial lines-of-credit, revolving credit lines and overdraft protection agreements are commitments for possible future extensions of credit to existing customers. These lines-of-credit usually do not contain a specified maturity date and may not be drawn upon to the total extent to which the Company is committed.

The Company is subject to certain claims and litigation arising in the ordinary course of business. In the opinion of management, after consultation with legal counsel, the ultimate disposition of these matters is not expected to have a material effect on the consolidated financial position of the Company.

NOTE 18 – FAIR VALUE OF FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS:

The fair value of a financial instrument is the current amount that would be exchanged between willing parties, other than in a forced liquidation. Fair value is best determined based upon quoted market prices. However, in many instances, there are no quoted market prices for the Company’s various financial instruments. In cases where quoted market prices are not available, fair values are based on estimates using present value or other valuation techniques. Those techniques are significantly affected by the assumptions used, including the discount rate and estimates of future cash flows. Accordingly, the fair value estimates may not be realized in an immediate settlement of the

 

60


instrument. SFAS No. 107 excludes certain financial instruments and all non-financial instruments from its disclosure requirements. Accordingly, the aggregate fair value amounts presented may not necessarily represent the underlying fair value of the Company.

The following methods and assumptions were used to estimate the fair value of each class of financial instruments for which it is practicable to estimate that value:

Cash and Cash Equivalents: The carrying amounts of cash and short-term instruments approximate their fair value.

Investment Securities: Fair value equals quoted market prices and dealer quotes.

Loans: The fair value of mortgage loans receivable was estimated based on present values using entry-value rates at December 31, 2005 and 2004, weighted for varying maturity dates. Other loans receivable were valued based on present values using entry-value interest rates at December 31, 2005 and 2004 applicable to each category of loans. Fair values of mortgage loans held for sale are based on commitments on hand from investors or prevailing market prices.

Deposits: The fair value of NOW accounts, money market deposits and savings accounts was the amount payable on demand at the reporting date. Certificates of deposit were valued using a weighted average rate calculated based upon rates at December 31, 2005 and 2004 for deposits of similar remaining maturities.

Short-term Borrowings: The carrying amounts of short-term borrowings maturing within ninety days approximate their fair values.

Long-term Borrowings: The fair values of the Company’s long-term borrowings are estimated using discounted cash flow analyses based on the Company’s current incremental borrowing rates for similar types of borrowing arrangements.

Derivative Instruments: Fair values for interest rate swap agreements are based upon the amounts required to settle the contracts.

Off-Balance Sheet Items: The Company has outstanding commitments to extend credit and standby letters of credit. These off-balance sheet financial instruments are generally exercisable at the market rate prevailing at the date the underlying transaction will be completed. At December 31, 2005 and 2004, the fair value of guarantees under commercial and standby letters of credit was immaterial.

The estimated fair values and carrying amounts of the Company’s financial instruments are as follows:

 

     December 31, 2005    December 31, 2004

(dollars in thousands)

   Carrying
Amount
  

Fair

Value

   Carrying
Amount
  

Fair

Value

Financial Assets

           

Cash and cash equivalents

   $ 126,800    $ 126,800    $ 53,265    $ 53,265

Investment securities

     572,582      572,832      566,955      567,994

Loans and loans held for sale, net

     1,890,949      1,880,481      1,638,619      1,652,821

Derivative instruments

     1,463      1,463      419      419

Financial Liabilities

           

Deposits

   $ 2,242,956    $ 2,237,494    $ 1,773,489    $ 1,772,975

Short-term borrowings

     68,849      68,849      236,453      236,453

Long-term debt

     250,212      254,583      206,089      207,707

Derivative instruments

     369      369      880      880

 

61


The fair value estimates presented herein are based upon pertinent information available to management as of December 31, 2005 and 2004. Although management is not aware of any factors that would significantly affect the estimated fair value amounts, such amounts have not been comprehensively revalued for purposes of these financial statements since that date and, therefore, current estimates of fair value may differ significantly from the amounts presented herein.

NOTE 19 – COMPREHENSIVE INCOME:

The following is a summary of the components of other comprehensive income:

 

     Years Ended December 31,  

(dollars in thousands)

   2005     2004     2003  

Unrealized gain (loss) on securities available for sale, net

   $ (10,854 )   $ 369     $ (1,261 )

Reclassification adjustment for net (gains) losses realized in net income

     39       (698 )     (267 )
                        

Net unrealized gain (loss)

     (10,815 )     (329 )     (1,528 )

Tax effect

     3,785       115       535  
                        

Net-of-tax amount

     (7,030 )     (214 )     (993 )
                        

Unrealized gain (loss) on cash flow hedges

     1,555       648       715  

Tax effect

     (544 )     (227 )     (251 )
                        

Net-of-tax amount

     1,011       421       464  
                        

Other comprehensive income (loss), net of income taxes

   $ (6,019 )   $ 207     $ (529 )
                        

NOTE 20 – RESTRICTIONS ON DIVIDENDS, LOANS AND ADVANCES:

The Bank is restricted under applicable laws in the payment of dividends to an amount equal to current year earnings plus undistributed earnings for the immediately preceding year, unless prior permission is received from the Commissioner of Financial Institutions for the State of Louisiana. Dividends payable by the Bank in 2006 without permission will be limited to 2006 earnings plus an additional $3,380,000.

Accordingly, at January 1, 2006, $278,587,000 of the Company’s equity in the net assets of the Bank was restricted. Funds available for loans or advances by the Bank to the Company amounted to $22,576,000. In addition, dividends paid by the Bank to the Company would be prohibited if the effect thereof would cause the Bank’s capital to be reduced below applicable minimum capital requirements.

 

62


NOTE 21 – CONDENSED PARENT COMPANY ONLY FINANCIAL STATEMENTS:

Condensed financial statements of IBERIABANK Corporation (parent company only) are shown below. The parent company has no significant operating activities.

Condensed Balance Sheets

December 31, 2005 and 2004

 

(dollars in thousands)

   2005    2004

Assets

     

Cash in bank

   $ 2,799    $ 11,023

Investment in subsidiary

     281,967      230,610

Other assets

     17,172      11,919
             

Total assets

   $ 301,938    $ 253,552
             

Liabilities and Shareholders’ Equity

     

Liabilities

   $ 38,369    $ 33,390

Shareholders’ equity

     263,569      220,162
             

Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity

   $ 301,938    $ 253,552
             

Condensed Statements of Income

Years Ended December 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003

 

(dollars in thousands)

   2005    2004    2003

Operating income

        

Dividends from subsidiary

   $ 22,000    $ 21,500    $ 12,000

Other income

     374      249      64
                    

Total operating income

     22,374      21,749      12,064
                    

Operating expenses

        

Interest expense

     2,330      1,498      1,046

Other expenses

     3,174      1,942      1,634
                    

Total operating expenses

     5,504      3,440      2,680
                    

Income before income tax expense and increase in equity in undistributed earnings of subsidiary

     16,870      18,309      9,384

Income tax benefit

     1,750      1,117      915
                    

Income before increase in equity in undistributed earnings of subsidiary

     18,620      19,426      10,299

Increase in equity in undistributed earnings of subsidiary

     3,380      7,913      13,253
                    

Net Income

   $ 22,000    $ 27,339    $ 23,552
                    

 

63


Condensed Statements of Cash Flows

Years Ended December 31, 2005, 2004 and 2003

 

(dollars in thousands)

   2005     2004     2003  

Cash Flows from Operating Activities

      

Net income

   $ 22,000     $ 27,339     $ 23,552  

Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided by operating activities:

      

Depreciation and amortization

     (16 )     48       47  

Increase in equity in net income of subsidiary

     (3,380 )     (7,913 )     (13,253 )

Noncash compensation expense

     2,294       1,115       759  

Gain on sale of assets

     (13 )     —         —    

Increase in dividend receivable from subsidiary

     (5,000 )     (2,000 )     (8,000 )

Other, net

     81       2,365       1,644  
                        

Net Cash Provided by Operating Activities

     15,966       20,954       4,749  
                        

Cash Flows from Investing Activities

      

Cash paid in excess of cash received in acquisition

     —         —         (9,538 )

Cash received in excess of cash paid in acquisition

     410       —         —    

Proceeds from sale of premises and equipment

     203       —         —    

Capital contributed to subsidiary

     (15 )     (66 )     (97 )

Payments received from ESOP

     151       277       394  
                        

Net Cash Provided by (Used in) Investing Activities

     749       211       (9,241 )
                        

Cash Flows from Financing Activities

      

Dividends paid to shareholders

     (8,836 )     (6,606 )     (5,185 )

Proceeds from long-term debt

     —         10,000       10,000  

Repayments of long-term debt

     —         —         (2,500 )

Net change in short-term borrowings

     —         —         —    

Costs of issuance of common stock in acquisition

     (6 )     —         (191 )

Payments to repurchase common stock

     (17,504 )     (18,862 )     (6,177 )

Proceeds from sale of treasury stock for stock options exercised

     1,407       2,549       1,770  
                        

Net Cash Used in Financing Activities

     (24,939 )     (12,919 )     (2,283 )
                        

Net (Decrease) Increase in Cash and Cash Equivalents

     (8,224 )     8,246       (6,775 )

Cash and Cash Equivalents at Beginning of Period

     11,023       2,777       9,552  
                        

Cash and Cash Equivalents at End of Period

   $ 2,799     $ 11,023     $ 2,777  
                        

 

64


NOTE 22 – QUARTERLY RESULTS OF OPERATIONS:

 

(dollars in thousands, except per share data)

   First
Quarter
   Second
Quarter
   Third
Quarter
    Fourth
Quarter

Year Ended December 31, 2005

          

Total interest income

   $ 31,454    $ 33,549    $ 34,541     $ 35,786

Total interest expense

     10,905      12,274      13,499       13,853
                            

Net interest income

     20,549      21,275      21,042       21,933

Provision for loan losses

     650      630      15,164       625
                            

Net interest income after provision for loan losses

     19,899      20,645      5,878       21,308

Noninterest income

     6,081      6,745      6,640       6,674

Noninterest expense

     15,676      16,047      15,773       16,943
                            

Income (loss) before income taxes

     10,304      11,343      (3,255 )     11,039

Income tax expense (benefit)

     3,004      3,215      (1,914 )     3,126
                            

Net Income (Loss)

   $ 7,300    $ 8,128    $ (1,341 )   $ 7,913
                            

Earnings (loss) per share – basic

   $ 0.81    $ 0.88    $ (0.15 )   $ 0.86

Earnings (loss) per share – diluted

   $ 0.75    $ 0.82    $ (0.15 )   $ 0.80
                            
Year Ended December 31, 2004           

Total interest income

   $ 25,402    $ 26,192    $ 28,047     $ 28,969

Total interest expense

     7,436      8,073      8,816       9,657
                            

Net interest income

     17,966      18,119      19,231       19,312

Provision for loan losses

     1,055      704      857       1,425
                            

Net interest income after provision for loan losses

     16,911      17,415      18,374       17,887

Noninterest income

     5,556      5,825      5,857       5,979

Noninterest expense

     13,215      14,013      14,229       13,440
                            

Income before income taxes

     9,252      9,227      10,002       10,426

Income tax expense

     2,761      2,740      2,966       3,101
                            

Net Income

   $ 6,491    $ 6,487    $ 7,036     $ 7,325
                            

Earnings per share – basic

   $ 0.78    $ 0.76    $ 0.84     $ 0.88

Earnings per share – diluted

   $ 0.72    $ 0.71    $ 0.78     $ 0.80

 

65


Corporate Information

Corporate Headquarters

IBERIABANK Corporation

200 West Congress Street

Lafayette, LA 70501

337.521.4012

Corporate Mailing Address

P.O. Box 52747

Lafayette, LA 70505-2747

Internet Address

www.iberiabank.com

Annual Meeting

IBERIABANK Corporation Annual Meeting of Shareholders will be held on Wednesday, May 3, 2006 at 4:00 p.m. at the Windsor Court (4th Floor Gallery) located at 300 Gravier Street, New Orleans, Louisiana.

Shareholder Assistance

Shareholders requesting a change of address, records or information about lost certificates should contact:

Investor Relations

Registrar and Transfer Company

10 Commerce Drive

Cranford, NJ 07016

800.368.5948

www.invrelations@RTCO.com

For Information

Copies of the Company’s financial reports, including forms 10-K and 10-Q, are available without cost by sending a written request to Investor Relations at the corporate mailing address noted above. This and other information regarding IBERIABANK Corporation and IBERIABANK may be accessed from our web site. In addition, shareholders may contact:

Daryl G. Byrd, President and CEO

337.521.4003

John R. Davis Senior Executive Vice President

337.521.4005

Stock Information

 

     MARKET PRICE   

DIVIDENDS

DECLARED

2005

   HIGH    LOW    CLOSING   

First Quarter

   $ 51.04    $ 43.97    $ 44.33    $ 0.22

Second Quarter

   $ 49.07    $ 43.59    $ 48.79    $ 0.24

Third Quarter

   $ 55.56    $ 47.70    $ 52.86    $ 0.26

Fourth Quarter

   $ 56.20    $ 49.42    $ 51.01    $ 0.28
       MARKET PRICE   

DIVIDENDS

DECLARED

2004

   HIGH    LOW    CLOSING   

First Quarter

   $ 49.29    $ 43.90    $ 45.51    $ 0.19

Second Quarter

   $ 46.03    $ 42.00    $ 45.92    $ 0.21

Third Quarter

   $ 45.27    $ 41.69    $ 45.06    $ 0.22

Fourth Quarter

   $ 52.60    $ 44.76    $ 52.03    $ 0.22

At December 31, 2005, IBERIABANK Corporation had approximately 1,700 shareholders of record.

Securities Listing

IBERIABANK Corporation’s common stock trades on the NASDAQ Stock Market under the symbol "IBKC." In local and national newspapers, the company is listed under “IBERIABANK.”

Dividend Investment Plan

IBERIABANK Corporation shareholders may take advantage of our Dividend Reinvestment Plan. This program provides a convenient, economical way for shareholders to increase their holdings of the Company's common stock. The shareholder pays no brokerage commissions or services charges while participating in the plan. A nominal fee is charged at the time that an individual terminates plan participation. This plan does not currently offer participants the ability to purchase additional shares with optional cash payments.

To enroll in the IBERIABANK Corporation Dividend Reinvestment Plan, shareholders must complete an enrollment form. A summary of the plan and enrollment forms are available from the Register and Transfer Company at the address provided under Shareholder Assistance.

EXHIBIT 21

SUBSIDIARIES OF THE REGISTRANT

IBERIABANK Corporation, a Louisiana corporation, is a bank holding company. The table below sets forth all of IBERIABANK Corporation’s subsidiaries as to State or Jurisdiction of Organization as well as their relationship to IBERIABANK Corporation. All of the subsidiaries listed below are included in the consolidated financial statements, and no separate financial statements are submitted for any subsidiary.

 

Subsidiary

  

State or Jurisdiction
of Organization

IBERIABANK

   Louisiana

Acadiana Holdings, LLC

   Louisiana

IBERIABANK Insurance Services, LLC

   Louisiana

Jefferson Insurance Corporation

   Louisiana

Iberia Financial Services, LLC

   Louisiana

Finesco, LLC

   Louisiana

EXHIBIT 23

CONSENT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED ACCOUNTING FIRM

We consent to the incorporation by reference in the registration statements of IBERIABANK Corporation on Form S-8 (File No. 333-28859, 333-79811, 333-81315, 333-41970, 333-64402, 333-117356 and 333-130273) of our report dated February 15, 2006, on our audits of the consolidated financial statements of IBERIABANK Corporation and Subsidiary as of December 31, 2005 and 2004, and for each of the three years in the three-year period ended December 31, 2005, management’s assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2005 and the effectiveness of the internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2005, which reports are incorporated by reference in this Annual Report on Form 10-K.

/s/ Castaing, Hussey & Lolan, LLC

New Iberia, Louisiana

March 13, 2006

EXHIBIT 31.1

CERTIFICATIONS

SECTION 302 CERTIFICATION OF THE CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER

I, Daryl G. Byrd, President and Chief Executive Officer of IBERIABANK Corporation, certify that:

1. I have reviewed this annual report on Form 10-K of IBERIABANK Corporation;

2. Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;

3. Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the registrant as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;

4. The registrant’s other certifying officer(s) and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f)) for the registrant and have:

 

  a) Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the registrant, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;

 

  b) Designed such internal control over financial reporting, or caused such internal control over financial reporting to be designed under our supervision, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles;

 

  c) Evaluated the effectiveness of the registrant’s disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and

 

  d) Disclosed in this report any change in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the registrant’s most recent fiscal quarter (the registrant’s fourth fiscal quarter in the case of an annual report) that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting; and

5. The registrant’s other certifying officers and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the registrant’s auditors and the audit committee of the registrant’s board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent functions):

 

  a) All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the registrant’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and

 

  b) Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting.

 

Date: March 15, 2006    

/s/ Daryl G. Byrd

   

Daryl G. Byrd

President and Chief Executive Officer

EXHIBIT 31.2

SECTION 302 CERTIFICATION OF CHIEF FINANCIAL OFFICER

I, Anthony J. Restel, Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer of IBERIABANK Corporation, certify that:

1. I have reviewed this annual report on Form 10-K of IBERIABANK Corporation;

2. Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;

3. Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the registrant as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;

4. The registrant’s other certifying officer(s) and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f)) for the registrant and have:

 

  a) Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the registrant, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;

 

  b) Designed such internal control over financial reporting, or caused such internal control over financial reporting to be designed under our supervision, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles;

 

  c) Evaluated the effectiveness of the registrant’s disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and

 

  d) Disclosed in this report any change in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the registrant’s most recent fiscal quarter (the registrant’s fourth fiscal quarter in the case of an annual report) that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting; and

5. The registrant’s other certifying officers and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the registrant’s auditors and the audit committee of the registrant’s board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent functions):

 

  a) All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the registrant’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and

 

  b) Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting.

 

Date: March 15, 2006    

/s/ Anthony J. Restel

   

Anthony J. Restel

Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer

EXHIBIT 32.1

CERTIFICATION OF CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER PURSUANT TO

SECTION 906 OF THE SARBANES-OXLEY ACT OF 2002

In connection with the Annual Report of IBERIABANK Corporation (the “Company”) on Form 10-K for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2005 (the “Report”), I, Daryl G. Byrd, President and Chief Executive Officer of the Company, certify that to the best of my knowledge:

(1) The Report fully complies with the requirements of section 13(a) or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934; and

(2) The information contained in the Report fairly presents, in all material respects, the financial condition and results of operations of the Company as of and for the periods covered in the Report.

 

/s/ Daryl G. Byrd

Daryl G. Byrd

President and Chief Executive Officer

March 15, 2006

A signed original of this written statement required by Section 906 has been provided to the Company and will be retained by the Company and furnished to the Securities and Exchange Commission or its staff upon request. The information furnished herein shall not be deemed to be filed for purposes of Section 18 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, nor shall it be deemed incorporated by reference in any filing under the Securities Act of 1933.

EXHIBIT 32.2

CERTIFICATION OF CHIEF FINANCIAL OFFICER PURSUANT TO

SECTION 906 OF THE SARBANES-OXLEY ACT OF 2002

In connection with the Annual Report of IBERIABANK Corporation (the “Company”) on Form 10-K for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2005 (the “Report”), I, Anthony J. Restel, Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer of the Company, certify that to the best of my knowledge:

(1) The Report fully complies with the requirements of section 13(a) or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934; and

(2) The information contained in the Report fairly presents, in all material respects, the financial condition and results of operations of the Company as of and for the periods covered in the Report.

 

/s/ Anthony J. Restel

Anthony J. Restel

Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer

March 15, 2006

A signed original of this written statement required by Section 906 has been provided to the Company and will be retained by the Company and furnished to the Securities and Exchange Commission or its staff upon request. The information furnished herein shall not be deemed to be filed for purposes of Section 18 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, nor shall it be deemed incorporated by reference in any filing under the Securities Act of 1933.